Home

EST3 Installation and Service Manual - Bass United

Contents

1. Signature detectors Signature modules 01020001 01020125 01020126 01020250 CR f SN Vey 9 8 eie c dci my ee fo a P Kod ee ee ees ee oe n di 71 Cabinet 1 0102 01360129 01370001 e p E O OHIO OWN oH f oH fe c 5 CI 5 5 C3 C3 C3 C3H a Erg jm Dp EEG um C d gj uj i aL aL joj n fo in In st EFI D E c LT at J aL a m DC PI 000 oHlo
2. D Alert 5 D Alert 5 4th FI 4th FI E 2 Stat 2 oC i o usi m Page da Page 3rd FI 3rd FI oC Alrt 5 ert 5 2nd FI D 2nd FI EA 9 gt o i Statusi m y fm Page of 1st FI 1st FI A B D Figure 1 18 Audio zone selection displays Display A is a model 3 12SG Each floor switch provides audio zone selection for the Page signal and the integral green LED indicates the audio zone is selected Display B is a model 3 12GY Each floor switch provides Page audio zone selection The green LED to the upper left of the switch indicates the audio zone is selected The yellow LED to the lower left of the switch indicates audio circuit trouble EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Displays C and D are model 3 6 3Sxxx The display configuration permits manual selection of the Alert EVAC and Page signals by floor This configuration is well suited for systems which do not sound signals through the entire facility during an alarm Responsible authorities can then manually add EV AC and Alert signals to other floors of the facility Display configuration D is used in facilities which sound the Alert signal in all areas not receiving the EVAC signal This eliminates the need to switch the Alert signal The middle switch is not used the middle LED indic
3. i 1 li 2 3 position From signature controller Data in a e Data out next device eae SSSQS T6 15 14 13 JPT 12 1 10 9 IN OUT IN OUT Circuit pair 1 Circuit pair 2 GFD LED1 LED2 Earth power Trouble GF Contacts GND NC COM NO 8 7 6 5 4 32 Device type monitor Personality code 7 3 Message ground fault amplifier To earth ground Polarity is not important From UL ULC listed 24 VDC fire alarm panel UL ULC listed 47 K ohm EOL Data out next device Data in From signature _ controller or previous device Audio risers from banked apmplifiers UL ULC listed 2 3 47KohmEOL NN m TB1 TELEPHONE TELEPHONE 25VAUDIO 25V AUDIO 7OVAUDIO 70V AUDIO CHANNEL 2 k CHANNEL 1 Power 11 2 ee Wiring notes monitor TB2 module 1 Supervised Input 1 Device type monitor TB1 Personality code 7 3 Message channel 2 trouble 2 Power limited 3 Nonpower limited W Input 2 Device type monitor viene le 4 The GFD and CT1 must be installed in the same Personality code 3 Q enclosure Message channel 1 trouble 432 5 Jumper J1 on the
4. ee LLL O oooQ0 In JB4 JB1 E IOP3A UP swt1 o O00000 123456 9 o 10 EOL SS SS SS SS S S SGGSG TY E u u dud a T AUDIO DATA TELEPHONE PAGE REMOTE MIC AUX PRIMARY SECONDARY OUT KEY AUDIO TB1 47 EOL 3 ASU 10 EOL KD D o o o SIGA CT1 Note Configure the SIGA CT1 as a non latching input circuit with the Monitor device type KD D DD From 24 Vdc NAC signal source From Signature P controller or previous device To next device To 24 notification appliance circuit Figure 5 11 Application wiring diagram 5 52 000000000000 DB25 male connector to PT 1S Printer rear view TB2 lo DD qmi 2 3 4 2 3 4 TEMPORL TONE j EARTH GRND 24 voc COMMON g Rs232 INPUT SJ PRINT SUPV our Q 9 CODED Q swi1 CDR 3 Ez ERR EB ER EE EER LE o Note Refer to the CDR 3 installation sheet for SW1 settings 2 JP2 a z TEMP BELL CODE JP1 CDR3 ASU CDR EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Connecting an external modem for use with the Remote Diagnostics Utility Using the Remote
5. TB1 RISER OUT next SIGA CC1 or RISER OUT UL ULC Listed EOLR From 3 FTCU RISER IN RISER IN From Signature controller module or DATA IN DATA OUT next device previous device DATA IN DATA OUT Figure 1 19 SIGA CC1 with one phone installed Five phones per circuit Installing up to five phones per branch circuit is a realistic compromise between installing a single phone per circuit and more than five phones per circuit In the rare instance that all five phones are off hook and a need to communicate with a sixth remote phone arises the 3 FTCU operator can temporarily disconnect the entire branch circuit Then the second branch circuit can be connected to complete the conversation The advantages of installing up to five telephone stations or jacks on a SIGA CC1 Signature module personality code 6 are a reasonable balance between cost and performance and the system maintains the high quality voice circuit at all times because the maximum number of off hook handsets can never be exceeded The main disadvantage of installing up to five phones per branch telephone circuit is that a circuit failure can render the entire branch circuit useless Additionally the location of the incoming caller is not precisely known and troubleshooting is more difficult Limited number of portable telephone handsets Another method of limiting the number of off hook phones to five limits the number of
6. 72 Year Ch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 circle all that apply 70 National Electrical Code Article 760 Manufacturer s Instructions Other specify Signed Dated Organization System Software System Firmware Installed Revision Checksum Date Application Programming Initial Program Installation Revisions amp Reasons Programmed by name Date of Programmer s Latest Factory Certification Data Entry Program Revision Used Maintenance Frequency of routine tests and inspections if other than in accordance with the referenced NFPA standards System deviations from the referenced standards are signed for Central Station or Alarm Service Company title date signed for representative of the authority having jurisdiction title date EST3ROC1 CDR EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 25 Power up and testing Record of Completion Page 2 of 2 Initiating Devices and Circuits indicate quantity Manual Stations Combination Detectors 72 Local Automatic Devicos circle active sensors If alarm transmitted off premise location s received Smoke Detectors lon Photo lon Photo Heat Duct Detectors lon Photo lon Photo Heat Waterflow Switches Other list 72 Emergency Voice Alarm Service Voice alarm channels Single Multiple
7. Enclosure Quick opening screw 362219 Conduit knockout Tamper switch mounting screws Cable ties eooeoeceso Figure 5 12 Suggested modem installation using MFCA and SIGA MP1 5 54 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Running the RPM and distributing profiles The Resource Profile Manager RPM is an add on tool that works with the SDU The RPM lets you e Create a description of the companies and buildings at a site e Assign security and access control devices to companies and buildings e Specify a primary company owner for each CRC Allocate device resources among companies that share the devices This information 1s displayed in a two pane window that includes a tree structure and a data table The tree structure shows the organization of companies and buildings and the assignment of partitions and devices to the buildings The data table shows the labels properties and allocation numbers for the current tree selection You could think of this as the overall resource profile for the project The RPM lets you export resource profiles for individual companies These are later imported into the Access Control Database ACDB and Keypad Display Configuration KDC programs Once imported the profiles determine what the users see and control when creating their portions of the security or access control system To create and distribute resource profiles you follow these general steps
8. s 5100 40 129 eunjeuBis ewes y uo seijddns Jejsoog u eiixne e dnjnuu ssoJoe uoneziuouuou s euBis ujejureui oj juew 5150 e es 9 S eyop uonejueuunoop jddns 1ejsooq Kueipixne y 295 uongejedo OWN pue Jejse N siseuec z esueg pue esuegs 1 103 ped esp c xn 002 eu peuinbeJ u ym feje1 pejsi juejeninbe 10 2 pejou esiweuyo ssejun Jamod pue si ul S urs 9 5999 6 Ov cixer AlddNS 31048 annoy 0 OV ed LLO 5 3ON3IIS NYOH 2 ma z AlddNS 1 El ___ L INVd 19e1u02 q 8 nee ON ih LHM ed i woo SO I PON 2 ON A WOO zesues a QN E aioa 1no TE W
9. PPCC0010 PPCCO010 E eeo An b PPCCOO011 PPCCO0011 B PPCCO012 PPCCO012 12 switches and 12 switches and 24 LEDs 12 LEDs DEV ADDRESS 01 CDR Figure A 6 Control display module switch and LED device addresses EST3 Installation and Service Manual A 9 System addresses Device addresses Figure A 7 shows the device logical addresses that the system assigns to various rail modules Ls 1 S 2 eeeeoeooee Zoned amplifier modules Signature detectors PPCC0001 PPCC0125 Signature modules PPCC0126 PPCC0250 Signature modules PPCC0376 PPCC0500 Signature detectors PPCC0251 PPCC0375 Signature controller module Figure A 7 Rail module device addresses A 10 002 1 PPCCO003 PPCCO004 sfs sls sls sfs s sj SERES o ele ele eje eje o e PPCCO005 PPCCO0006 PPCC0008 PPCCO007 Initiating device circuit module Sensors PPCCO001 PPCC0099 7 sy a ed led i Modules 101
10. INPUT 1 RISER IN DATA IN DATA OUT DATA IN DATA OUT To Next Device From Signature Controller or Previous Device Figure 4 17 Two channel Class B wiring SIGA CC2 Module EST3 Installation and Service Manual 4 25 Centralized audio applications Style Z Class A Only UL ULC Listed 47KQ EOL Class B Only TB4 1 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 TB2 From CH1 INPUT 1 RISER IN CH1 INPUT 1 RISER IN DATA IN DATA IN From Signature Controller or Previous Device 3bwire3 cdr CH1 INPUT 1 RISER OUT To Next Device or URSM Supervisory CH1 INPUT 1 RISER OUT Module DATA OUT DATA OUT To Next Device Figure 4 18 Single channel Class A wiring SIGA UM Module 4 26 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Troubleshooting Centralized audio applications The ATP senses loss of AC power or brownout conditions affecting the amplifiers It also provides battery backup to the amplifiers if the audio system is active when the power failure or brownout occurs The ATP must have a 3 ATPINT interface Card installed in order to work with the EST3 system The ATP enters a trouble state if any of the following events occur ATP brownout or loss of AC power Low battery charge or missing battery with J2 enabled Ground fault if ground fault detection J1
11. 7 V KPA oe e _ a EM xS M M Zoned A Zoned M ME Zoned Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Lot Page Page Alert Figure 1 4 Normal amplifier operation Possible fault condition Amplifier loses communication with Central Processor module Panel loses communication with network data riser Panel loses communication with network audio riser 1 8 Amplifier operation If the panel is configured for stand alone operation the amplifier automatically switches to the EVAC channel and outputs its 1 kHz temporal tone when the panel detects an alarm If the panel is not configured for stand alone operation the amplifier will not output any signal Amplifier switches to the EVAC channel only in response to the local panel s programming uses the default EVAC message Amplifier switches to the EVAC channel in response to the system programming For EVAC the amplifier uses its 1 kHz temporal tone For Alert the amplifier uses its 1 kHz 20 bps tone Backup amplifiers In the event of an amplifier failure not a field wiring problem the backup amplifier automatically replaces the failed amplifier as shown in Figure 1 5 EST3 Installation and Service
12. Black 2 TBI should be set the previous device Figure 4 6 URSM wiring 4 12 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications ATP and 3 ATPINT installation ATP installation Refer to Figure 4 7 To install the ATP 1 Remove the cover plate from the left side of the ATP The cover plate 15 held in place by four screws 2 Install four short spacers 5 in the flanges of the card cage and secure with nuts 6 3 Mount the 3 ATPINT board 4 on the four short spacers 5 and secure with four long spacers 3 4 Install the new cover plate 2 on the long spacers with the screws 1 provided T T 1 2 3 ee I 5 ais e Figure 4 7 3 ATPINT installation bottom view EST3 Installation and Service Manual 4 13 Centralized audio applications ATP wiring r Do Not Use 11 S 5 S o UT FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST HE OF Ex IN OUT RISER OUT PRE AMP REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME 8 RATING FUSE 1 1 120 OUT OUTRISER OUT PRE AMP IN LLEEDEDLLEG PREAMPS HC EE o L Do Not Use 4 Figure 4 8 ATP with 3 ATPINT installed rear view ATP terminal connections AMP POWER 1 Type NEMA 5 15p receptacle to plug in one amplifier Output is rated at 120 Vac 5 A max AMP POWER 2 Type NEMA 5 15p receptacle to plug in one
13. 3 6 static sensitive handling 8 3 strict anti passback 3 11 strikes description 3 7 strobe synchronization 5 6 substituting hardware 8 5 substituting known good Signature series devices 8 41 synchronization of NACs 5 6 System description 1 2 T testing control and emergency communications 6 7 initial and reacceptance 6 6 initiating devices 6 21 notification appliances 6 23 timed anti passback 3 11 transformers AC power source application 3 39 circuit common 3 8 CRCXF CRC Transformer 3 5 elevator control application 3 23 remote controls application 3 46 wiring diagram 3 41 trouble and maintenance log 7 7 trouble registers 8 59 trouble tables Signature 8 62 troubleshooting wiring problems 8 77 two person rule dual LED control 3 6 two person rule application 3 47 U UL and ULC requirements C 10 UL security application requirements C 3 unexpected fault 8 63 uninterruptible power supply 5 48 Universal Riser Supervisory Module 4 10 unlock timer 3 9 V visitor access level 3 31 visitor and escort dual LED control 3 6 multiple card readers application 3 30 Wiegand pin cards 3 6 EST3 Installation and Service Manual wire length calculations 24 notification appliance circuits B 11 25 or 70 Vrms notification appliance circuits B 17 addressable analog data circuits B 19 network dat
14. User defined routes 1 to 15 Enabled Disabled 0 to 240 seconds 1 to 255 Send on activation Send on restoration N A Alarm device type Pull device type Heat device type Verified smoke device type Water flow device type Alarm device type Pull device type Heat device type Verified smoke device type Water flow device type Alarm zone device type Fire zone device type Matrix group device type 1 to 255 Content Settings permitted in UL 864 All Cabinets No Cabinets 3 User defined routes 1 to 15 4 Enabled Disabled 5 0 to 240 seconds 6 1 to 255 7 Activation and restoration triggers must match the message type In Signature module configuation personality code 18 is prohibited 11 Alarm device type 8 Pull device type Heat device type Verified smoke device type Water flow device type Alarm device type 8 Pull device type Heat device type Verified smoke device type 9 Water flow device type Alarm zone device type Fire zone device type Matrix group device type 1 to 255 10 vii Content Programmable feature or option Matrix groups Members Matrix groups Device activation count Notes Permitted in UL 864 Possible settings Alarm device type Pull device type Fire device type Call point device type Heat device type Verified smoke device type Water flow device type 3 to 10 Settings permitted in UL 864 Alar
15. activate address alarm alarm silence timer alarm silence or reset inhibit timer AND statement audible circuit change of state check in group Class A IDC Class A NAC An alarm device or zone Access Control Database program Software that lets end users create and maintain an access control database The program communicates with the system either by direct RS 232 connection or by telephone lines to a 3 MODCOM To turn on or energize Pertains to outputs including logical outputs A number used to uniquely identify a device output panel etc within an EST3 system The state of a fire alarm initiating device that has detected a smoke or fire condition The state of a security device that has been triggered A panel option that automatically silences the notification appliance circuits NACs after a preprogrammed time limit after the last alarm A panel option that prevents anyone from silencing notification appliance circuits NACs or resetting the panel for a programmed period after the last alarm A system input that activates when ALL the input conditions as indicated in its AND statement list are active A notification appliance circuit that is turned OFF when the Alarm Silence switch is pressed Occurs whenever an input zone or device changes from a restored to an active condition or from the active condition back to the restored condition A collection of input devices used to monitor th
16. not properly configured in SDU database Amplifiers not properly installed or defective Speaking too loud into microphone Speak such that the last green LED on the page level meter only flickers occasionally Gain of individual amplifiers set too high Adjust Aux input gain control on ASU Auxiliary input wiring open or shorted Adjust Aux input gain control on ASU 9 ASUMX memory not firmly seated in connector Audio database not correctly downloaded into 3 ASU Incorrect message label referenced Amplifier and message labels and rules incorrect or mislabeled Wiring between 3 ASU and 3 FTCU open shorted or incorrectly wired EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Table 8 13 3 ASU Audio Source Unit Troubleshooting Problem Remote Microphone trouble Possible cause 1 Wrong or missing EOL resistor on microphone key input 2 No supervisory tone on DC current on remote microphone audio output 3 FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit Table 8 14 3 FTCU 3 ASU FT Firefighter Telephone Control Unit Troubleshooting Problem Unit does not respond No RX or TX LED activity Signature modules do not Switch telephones correctly Low telephone volume level Call displayed by LCD doesn t match connected call Possible cause 1 Power or data connectors loose or connected wrong on Rail Chassis Interface Card 2 Ribbon cable between Rail Chassis Interface Card and
17. CPU 3 PPS M 3 BPS M 3 BBC M 3 MODCOM CPU 3 PS M 3 MODCOM 3 PPS M 3 BPS M 3 BBC M Service and troubleshooting Description CPU hardware failure RAM or Stack memory fails its interval check Database corrupt No message present problem erasing flash message space fails internal checks Executable program corrupt Port 1 serial communication circuit open or shorted N A N A Port 2 serial communication circuit open or shorted N A Panel out of service In mode to accept download data 1 Module in wrong slot 2 Incorrect display on module Loss of signal on primary audio connection 1 Rail voltage gt 30 or 24 2 Excessive rail current load 3 Faulty or misadjusted 3 PPS 3 BPS Line cut fault detected on phone line 1 Loss of signal on secondary audio connection Excessive rail current load Line cut fault detected on phone line 2 1 Enclosure vents clogged 2 Heat sink not fastened properly 8 27 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 20 Local trouble pseudo points Address Label 0612 Receiver Test Line 1 0613 Lo Batt Cut Off 0613 Receiver Test Line 2 0614 AC Brownout 0614 RS 232 Channel 0615 Batt Trbl 0616 Network ClassA CircuitA Fail ure 01 01 0617 Network ClassA CircuitB Fail ure 01 01 0616 Aux Pwr Ovld Ckt 2 0617 DSP Supervision 0617 Pwr Supply Fail 0618 Aux Pwr Ovld Ckt 1 0619 Drvr Pwr Supply Fail 0620 Demux Audio Input
18. CPU n CPU TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2 NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO OUT IN AIN OUT IN AIN OUT IN AIN OUT IN AIN A A B B A A B B A A B B A A B B l l l l l l 1X 13 L Z X FEY FX acra r3 LLLA LX LX LA 2 oooooQod Downstream lt Upstream Figure 1 10 Class B network data riser wiring using copper wire Note As a matter of convention a Class B network data riser should start at the CPU module that does not have wires connected to its Network A port When wiring a Class B network give careful consideration as to the location of the service panel The service panel provides a single point from which you can download files to all other panels on the network For this function to work properly you must use the panel at the start of the network data riser as the service panel See Downloading data files for more information Class A network data risers In a Class A network a single break or short in the network data riser wiring does not interrupt communications between panels Figure 1 11 shows the wiring for a Class A network EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 17 System overview B1 CAB1 B1 C
19. Centralized audio applications Branch speaker wiring Signature modules are used to connect individual floor branch speaker circuits to the main riser Single channel branch speaker circuits can be wired as Class A Style Z using the SIGA UM module Class B Style Y circuit configuration can be accomplished using either the SIGA UM or SIGA CC2 modules The branch speaker circuits of two channels can be wired as Class B style Y circuits using the SIGA CC2 module Typical Speaker Circuit Style Y Class B UL ULC Listed 47KQ EOL 3bwire1 cdr TB2 RISER OUT To Next Device or RISER OUT GJ URSM Suprvisory From ATP Module RISER IN RISER IN DATA IN DATA OUT To Next Device DATA IN DATA OUT From Signature Controller or Previous Device Figure 4 16 Single channel Class B wiring SIGA CC1 Module From ATP UL ULC Typical Listed CH2 INPUT 2 Speaker 47KQ EOL 2 RISER IN Circuit CH2 INPUT 2 RISERIN C Style Y Class B CH2 INPUT 2 RISER OUT 10 Next Device or URSM Supervisory CH2 INPUT 2 RISER OUT Module TB4 5 5 2 E 2 pU 9 CH1 INPUT 1 RISER OUT To Next Device From URSM Supervisory CH1 INPUT 1 RISER OUT CH1 INPUT 4 Module RISER IN
20. Horns without audible Other Method of transmission of alarms to public fire service comunications center 2 Local Annunciator Signaling Line Circuits Power Supplies Quantity and Style of connected SLCs per NFPA 72 Table 3 6 1 Primary main Secondery standby Quantity ___ Style Nominal Voltage Storage battery Current Rating Amp Hour rating Overcurrent protection Calculated for hours of Type __ system operation Current rating Location Dedicated generator Location of fuel supply Emergency or standby system used to backup primary supply Emergency system described in 70 Article 700 Legally required standby system described in NFPA 70 Article 701 Optional standby system described in 70 Article 702 meeting the performance requirements of Article 700 or 701 EST3ROC2 CDR 6 26 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Chapter 7 Preventive maintenance Summary This chapter provides a listing of required scheduled maintenance items and procedures Content General 7 2 Preventive maintenance schedule 7 3 Signature device routine maintenance tips 7 5 Detectors 7 5 Modules 7 5 Signature detector cleaning procedure 7 6 System trouble and maintenance log 7 7 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 7 1 Prevent
21. network communication between CPU modules in other cabinets is also processed by the CPU Network communication is RS 485 when the 3 RS485 card is installed in CPU connector J2 and fiber optic when the 3 FIBMB or 3 NSHM module is connected to J2 of the CPU Network and audio data circuits Figure 8 1 and Table 8 4 show the location and normal state of the communication status LEDs on the CPU module 699969666965 Sooo Rx1 Tx1 Rx2 Tx2 Rx3 Tx3 oe oe H NETWORK AUD AUDO AUDIO AUDIO sor Se Se 5 aUa AN BN sor B DI II 0 s os o f 12 22 2 O CPULEDS CDR Figure 8 1 CPU module Table 8 4 CPU LED indications LED Normal Description state RX1 Flicker Local Rail Receive Activity TX1 Flicker Local Rail Transmit Activity RX2 Flicker Network Data Ch A Receive Activity TX2 Flicker Network Data Ch A Transmit Activity EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting RX3 Flicker Network Data Ch B Receive Activity TX3 Flicker Network Data Ch B Transmit Activity EST3 network wiring alternates between channel A and channel B as shown in Figure 8 2
22. 0620 Waiting for SDU Download 8 28 Source 3 MODCOM 3 PPS M 3 BPS M 3 BBC M 3 MODCOM 3 PPS M 3 BPS M 3 BBC M 3 MODCOM 3 PPS M 3 BPS M 3 BBC M CPU CPU 3 PPS M 3 BPS M 3 BBC M 3 MODCOM 3 PPS M 3 BPS M 3 BBC M 3 PPS M 3 BPS M 3 BBC M 3 PPS M 3 BPS M 3 BBC M 3 ZAXX 3 MODCOM Description Line 1 test transmission to CMS failed Battery voltage below 19 5 Vdc when on battery backup Line 2 test transmission to CMS failed AC line voltage below 96 Vac for 3 PPS or 196 Vac for 3 PPS 230 Communication failure with RS 232 card on module 1 Battery wiring open 2 Battery voltage below 24 Vdc 3 Battery internal resistance too high load test failure CPU unable to receive data on data riser circuit A CPU unable to receive data on data riser circuit B 1 Excessive load 2 Circuit shorted The DSP chip on the module failed 1 Cables between power supply and monitor module loose or missing 2 Defective power supply or monitor module 1 Excessive load 2 Circuit shorted 1 Cables between power supply and monitor module loose or missing 2 Defective power supply or monitor module Digitized audio data missing Database download from the SDU is in progress or was incomplete EST3 Installation and Service Manual Table 8 20 Local trouble pseudo points Address Label 0621 Amp Overcurrent 0622 Primary Audio Output DC 0623 Primary Audio Output Analog 0624 Backu
23. 1 calls connected and the location of the connected call is displayed in reversed text Converse over the phone connection to verify clear noise free communications Take a second firefighter telephone on a different circuit off hook Verify that the incoming call buzzer sounds the display indicates 1 Calls Pending the location of the incoming call is displayed in reversed text and 1 calls connected is shown in the display Silence the buzzer by pressing the ACK switch Press the Connect switch Verify that the display indicates 0 calls pending 2 calls connected the location of the second connected call is displayed in reversed text the location of the first call is displayed in normal text below the second call location Converse over the phone connection to verify clear noise free communications Press the Review Connected switch moving the reversed text to the first call s location message Without hanging up the first telephone press the Disconnect switch Verify the display indicates 1 Calls Pending the location of the call being disconnected is displayed in reversed text at the top of the screen and 1 calls connected is shown in the display Hang up the first telephone Verify that the display indicates 0 Calls Pending and 1 calls connected 6 Repeat Step 5 connecting five 5 phones simultaneously and verify acceptable voice quality 7 Press the Call and Page by Phone switche
24. 3 FTCU loose or defective 3 Ribbon cable between 3 FTCU main board and cover loose or defective 4 Defective 3 FTCU 1 Network data riser open shorted or wired incorrectly 2 TB2 on the CPU loose or wired incorrectly 3 Defective 3 FTCU 4 Signature module has incorrect label personality code or device type 5 Defective Signature module 1 More than five handsets active at one time 2 Phone riser open shorted or wired incorrectly 3 Connector TB1 on 3 FTCU loose 4 Defective telephone 1 Signature module incorrectly labeled in rule 2 Signature module misidentified or installed in wrong location SIGA audio amplifiers The following material refers to these amplifier models e SIGA AA30 Audio Amplifier e SIGA AA50 Audio Amplifier Note At publication time these modules were not approved for use in UL 864 9th edition applications Call Technical Support to determine the current approval status of the modules EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 21 Service and troubleshooting 8 22 DS3DS2 Table 8 15 SIGA AAxx LED indications LED Color Description DS1 Yellow Power Amp Enabled DS2 Yellow Backup Mode DS3 Green Amplifier Active DS4 Green flashing Normal daughter board DS5 Red flashing Active Condition daughter board Gain adjustment With the amplifier connected to the speaker load use the gain adjust potentiometer R116 to get a 25 Vrms or 70 Vrm
25. 4 Verify proper IDC zone response Non restorable Semiannually 1 Visual inspection 2 Putzone Test mode 3 Test mechanically and or electrically 4 Verify proper IDC zone response Restorable Semiannually 1 Visual Inspection detectors 2 Putzone in Test mode 3 Activate at least one detector on each IDC All detectors on each IDC must be tested within five years Smoke Annually 1 Visual inspection 2 Putzone in test mode Conduct a Functional test to verify proper IDC zone response 4 Check sensitivity 5 Clean as required Waterflow Every two 1 Putzone in Test mode Sivienes omits 2 Activate sprinkler test valve Refer to Sprinkler system test procedure All initiating Annually 1 Enter Test mode device giraut Activate IDC zone Appropriate NACs should activate and zone information should be annunciated 3 Restore device and reset zone 4 Open the IDC field wiring Trouble should be annunciated 5 Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing Remote Annually 1 Verify all indicators operating properly annunciators Notification Annually 1 Visual Inspection appliances 2 Put panel in Alarm Drill or Test mode Verify that all indicating appliances are operating properly EST3 Installation and Service Manual 7 3 Preventive maintenance Preventive maintenance schedule Testing Component Interval Test Procedure Panel LEDs Annually 1 Illuminate all LEDs by pressing the Panel Silence and and trouble
26. 5395 24 20 6005 20 20 Reader sounder CRCSND 0 Strike rating 100 mA 12 V 33 0 150 mA 12 V 40 0 200 mA 12 V 42 0 250 mA 12 V 47 0 300 mA 12 V 51 0 35 mA 12V 55 0 400 mA 12 V 58 0 450 mA 12 V 63 0 500 mA 12 V 65 0 Maglock rating 100 mA 12V 80 80 150 mA 12 V 126 126 200 mA 12 V 156 156 250 mA 12 V 187 187 300 mA 12 V 233 233 350 mA 12 V 283 283 400 mA 12 V 376 376 450 mA 12 V 436 436 500 mA 12 V 470 470 Total alarm load must lt 3 5 A Total amp hours Battery Note Standby time length of time that the device will draw standby current from battery There is no minimum standby time for access control B 22 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System calculations Providing adequate voltage for devices To determine whether each CRC and KPDISP will have adequate input voltage calculate the voltage drops along the SAC bus Voltage drops can be estimated or actual Estimated voltage drop To estimate the voltage drop use Table B 9 and Table B 10 which show the maximum wire length for a given number of doors at a given current load The tables assume even spacing between the doors and an equal load at each door 1 First determine the load per door by adding the alarm currents of the CRC door lock card reader and sounder 2 Determine the number of doors you need to secure Find the number of doors Table B 9 then search across that row for the column with the current you
27. Access control applications 3 40 Control panel SAC bus 24 Vdc connects to CRC terminals but bypasses CRC internally Passive infrared detector CRCXF Card Transformer reader Maglock or strike Request to exit button ACDBIKOG operation Figure 3 14 CRC using AC power The figure above shows the CRC power coming from the 16 5 Vac transformer The 3 PPS M power supply coming from the control panel simply passes through the CRC The 3 SAC connects to the CRC through the SAC bus This wiring is shown in Figure 3 15 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Control panel CRCXF Transformer 16 5 Vac Power supply 24 Vdc Figure 3 15 Wiring details for transformer supply Power supply Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the CRC Configure the input power as AC Configure the output power as continuous If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications must have ground fault detection disabled and must have a circuit ground circuit common that is isolated from earth ground Hardware configuration The control panel must contain the following rail modules e 3 SAC Security Access Control module 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply module The 3 SAC module supports the SAC bus Power for the CRC is normally taken from the 3 PPS M and is routed with the
28. Clean Detector 2 Bad lon Chamber 2 Replace Detector ESK Slope Too Low 1 Dirty Detector 1 Clean Detector 2 Bad lon Chamber 2 Replace Detector Quiescent Too Large Devices on the Signature Place a short or low resistance data circuit are drawing too shunt across the data circuit much current during the mapping process 8 60 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Table 8 37 Signature detector trouble messages Trouble message Quiescent Too Small Short on Relay Base External or Isolator Relay Failure to Switch External or Isolator Relay Switched Value Too Small lon Rate of Rise Too High lon Quiescent Too High lon Quiescent Too Low lon Value Too Low Thermal Value Too High Thermal Value Too Low A D Converter Fault EEPROM Checksum Error EEPROM Write Time out Unknown Device Type EEPROM Write Verify Fault Ambient Light Too High Photo Quiescent Too High Photo Quiescent Too Low Photo Value Too High Possible cause Devices on the Signature data circuit are not drawing enough current during the mapping process Bad Relay Base Bad Base 1 Bad Relay Base 2 External Electrical Noise Bad Base Bad lon Chamber Dirty Detector Dirty Detector Defective Detector Bad Base Bad Base Defective A D converter Bad EEPROM Bad EEPROM Bad EEPROM Bad EEPROM 1 Dirty Detector 2 Outside light reaching detector chamber Dirty Detector Dirty Detector Bad Base Table 8 38 Signature module troubl
29. If the incoming lines to the protected premises involve a rotary telephone line arrangement make the connection to the line having the highest number This will create the least interference with business lines Note If connection will be made to a telephone company line that is also used for normal business purposes advise customer that the telephone service will be disrupted for a few minutes during the connection period In areas where the telephone company requires that their own connector block be installed it should be wired as per the USOC RJ 31X or RJ 38X configuration The RJ 38X configuration is identical to RJ 31X except for a jumper between 2 and 7 which is used in some residential applications but is not used by the 3 MODCOM EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 37 Installation 5 38 When the 3 MODCOM is configured as a two line dialer module two incoming lines must be used and connections must be made to each line Installing the 3 MODCOM module Make sure that panel power 15 off then proceed as follows 1 Use an antistatic wrist strap to ground yourself to an unpainted part of the cabinet 2 Carefully remove the 3 MODCOM from the antistatic bag in which the module is packed Always handle it by the edges or by the plastic door 3 Place the bag on a flat work surface then place the module connector side up on the empty bag Check for shipping damage Orient the module so the two eight position
30. Installed speakers __ speakers per zone Telephones jacks installed NEPA 72 Auxiliary Type of connection indicate quantity Compulsory Guard s Tour comprised of transmitter stations and Local Energy Shunt Parallel Telephone intermdediate stations Location Phone for receipt of signals Sprinkler System Electric Fire Pump Valve supervisory devices Fire pump power Building temperature points Fire pump running NFPA 72 Remote Station Site water temperature points Phase reversal 5 RT Alarm Site water supply level points Supervisory Engine Driven Fire Pump Other Supervisory Function s Selector in auto position specify Control panel trouble 72 Proprietary Transfer switches If alarms retransmitted off premise location amp phone of receiving organization Engine running Method of alarm retransmission Notification Appliances amp Circuits NFPA 72 Central Station Prime Contractor Notification Appliance Circuits Central Station Location Type and quantity of installed Notification Appliances Method of transmission of alarms to central station Bells inch Visual Signals Type ____ McCulloh One Way Radio Digital Alarm Communicator Speakers with audible Multiplex _ Two Way Radio Others
31. Local rail module installation 5 24 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator module 5 26 3 SAC Security Access Control module 5 40 3 AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller and IRC 3 5 41 AC power and DC battery wiring 5 42 Connecting auxiliary booster power supplies 5 44 Connecting the PT 1S impact printer 5 46 Adjusting amplifier output levels 5 49 Connecting a CDR 3 Zone Coder for coded tone output 5 50 Connecting an external modem for use with the Remote Diagnostics Utility 5 53 Running the RPM and distributing profiles 5 55 Power up and testing 6 1 Cabinet power up procedure 6 3 Runtime and system errors 6 4 Initial and reacceptance test procedures 6 6 Control and emergency communications equipment testing 6 7 Detector input module and output module testing 6 18 Initiating device testing 6 21 Notification appliance testing 6 23 Record of completion 6 24 Preventive maintenance 7 1 General 7 2 Preventive maintenance schedule 7 3 Signature device routine maintenance tips 7 5 Signature detector cleaning procedure 7 6 System trouble and maintenance log 7 7 Service and troubleshooting 8 1 Overview 8 3 Hardware problems 8 5 Modules 8 7 Audio components 8 20 Pseudo point descriptions 8 24 Signature data circuit SDC operation 8 35 Basic Signature data circuit troubleshooting 8 37 Signature controller module
32. NORMAL CRPSBX CDR Figure 4 2 3 ATP front view The Amplifier Terminal Panel is a 5 1 4 inches 13 34 cm high x 19 inches 48 3 cm wide unit that senses loss of AC power or brownout conditions affecting the amplifiers It also provides battery backup to the amplifiers if the audio system is active when the power failure or brownout occurs The ATP must have a 3 ATPINT interface Card installed in order to work with the EST3 system PRE AMP 1 PREAMP 1 25V 000 1 1 IN OUTRISER OUT PRE AMP PREAMP 2 IN OUTRISER OUT PRE AMP PRE AMP 2 3atpint3 cdr Figure 4 3 3 ATPINT Interface Card The ATP with 3 ATPINT installed is mounted in an RKU rack and provides termination for the power amplifier s audio power and control signals The panel has an integral battery charger capable of charging a maximum of 40 Ah sealed lead acid batteries The charger is fully supervised and provides a silenceable trouble buzzer and trouble contacts One ATP is required for every two amplifiers When a brownout condition is sensed at the ATP the trouble contacts and AC fail contacts are closed and an EST3 supervisory zone reports the condition to the EST3 system The EST3 system 18 designed to provide 24 to the ATP s audio activity input via control relay enabling backup power only when both primary EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio app
33. Network audio channel parameters Channel attribute Priority PAGE 1 EVAC 2 ALERT 3 AUXILIARY 4 1 10 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Table 1 1 Network audio channel parameters Channel attribute Priority GENERAL 5 Each channel attribute has a priority level associated with it When more than one channel is commanded to source a given amplifier the amplifier will connect to the source having the highest priority The Page channel will only go active when the microphone push to talk switch is pressed Special audio source unit page modes The front panel of the ASU offers four special page mode switches All Call e EVAC e Alert All Call Minus These switches provide instantaneous switching of the page signal to the most frequently contacted areas of the building The special page modes do not require any source switching by the zoned audio amplifiers When a special page mode switch is activated the signal content of the eight outgoing audio channels is modified Figure 1 8 illustrates this principle In the normal page mode the eight audio signal sources are each connected to a separate audio channel as represented by a B at the intersection of the signal source and the audio channel shown at the lower left of Figure 1 8 Each audio channel is represented as a vertical line in this figure The eight audio channels are actually multiplexed together and distributed over a common pair of wir
34. PPCC0199 8 8 Addressable analog controller module DEV ADDRESS 02 CDR EST3 Installation and Service Manual Appendix B System calculations Summary This appendix provides worksheets for calculating system parameters such as wire distance battery capacity and memory Content Network data riser limits B 2 Overview B 2 Data network specifications B 2 Cable properties B 3 Calculating a maximum length B 3 Calculating maximum wire capacitance per foot B 4 Signature data circuit wire length B 5 Determining the maximum allowable branch length B 5 Determining the total loop length B 10 Notification appliance circuit calculations 11 Introduction B 11 What you ll need B 11 Worksheet method B 13 Equation method B 14 25 or 70 Vrms wire length B 17 Addressable analog circuit wire length B 19 Cabinet battery B 20 SAC bus power B 21 Determining the need for a remote power supply B 21 Providing adequate voltage for devices B 23 CPU memory 26 Fiber optic cable worksheet B 28 EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 1 System calculations Network data riser limits B 2 Overview Cumulative data network capacitance refers to the total capacitance of all copper wire used for the data riser The cumulative capacitance of data networks must be within certain limits to permit stable network com
35. Partitions are fundamental groups used with security systems A partition 15 a group of devices intended to provide security for a given area of the site Partitions can be armed and disarmed separately partitions are created and defined in the SDU and each CRC CRC input circuit KPDISP SIGA SEC2 circuit and SIGA MD circuit can be assigned to a partition Partitions also play a role in KPDISP message routing For the 3 MODCOM module the SDU determines the dialer and modem parameters defines the receivers and accounts and assigns each account to the correct receiver Finally the SDU includes the RPM tool described earlier in this topic ACDB KDC operation The Keypad Display Configuration KDC program runs on the end user s PC It lets him create and maintain a database of information about KPDISPs users and access levels This 1s part of the overall security database During setup of the program the user imports the resource profile created by the RPM during system programming Once installed the user can create and revise his KDC database Changes and additions are transmitted via modem to the 3 MODCOM or via direct RS 232 connection to the CPU The data is then routed to the correct 3 SAC and KPDISP units Security applications The remaining topics in this chapter cover specific security applications Each topic gives you an overview of the application and shows you the components required and their interco
36. Sense Re Sense Audio Data iom Data 13 14 Rail Data Rail Data 9 10 Not Used 11 14 Common 5 1 EA J10 AOUT J41 BOUT oo NI Jon o Bottom Rail Bottom Rail __ ui a M a Pin Function H eR 1 4 24 VDC H 5 All Fail ae 6 9 Not Used e A eme N 10 121 Ground eon 12 DOUT The DC voltages can be checked with a digital meter Data signals on pins 7 and 8 of the top rail can be verified by looking at the Receive RX and Transmit TX LEDs on any module installed on the rail 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply module The transmit TX and receive RX LEDs on the Primary Power Supply Monitor Module should flicker indicating normal two way communication activity with the CPU PSMONLED CDR If the 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply is used in conjunction with one or more 3 BPS M Booster Power Supplies there is EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 7 Service and troubleshooting interaction between the supplies Under most conditions a defective power supply will be identified by the system and annunciated as a trouble The system may continue to operate nearly normally as the battery connected to the faulty supply will automatically be switched into the circuit as the load demands Table 8 1 Nom
37. Using the chain lists An element in the displayed chain caused the map fault Examine the chain and look for gaps within the short address or serial number lists of a chain or sub chain Gaps in the list indicate areas that were not successfully mapped gap within the chain does not mean that the missing device has a problem only that that device was not successfully mapped e Compare the Chain and Device response lists the devices on the Device Response list should also appear on the Chain Response list Look for duplicate short addresses or serial numbers on the same list Failure of a device to successfully map may be the result of a problem with another device or wiring in a chain or sub chain not directly connected to the unmapped device Although the missing or duplicate devices are not always the cause of map failure good troubleshooting technique suggests that these devices be examined for defects wiring errors and duplicate entries in the SDU program etc Displaying message counters During normal operation the Signature controller module issues numerous communication messages to the Signature devices on its SDCs The message counters indicate how many times a communication message has been issued and the number of successful return messages To display the message counters click the Message Counters tab EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 57 Service and troubleshooting Click Here to Close
38. amplifier Output is rated at 120Vac 5 A max BATT IN These terminals are for connection of gel cell batteries When the internal battery charger is enabled J3 on the APSB terminal board installed a maximum of 40 Ah of gel cell batteries can be charged POWER FAIL Normally open that activates when primary power to the amplifiers is either lost or in brownout condition This contact is to be supervised by Signature series input module configured as a supervisory input PANEL TROUBLE Normally open relay contacts that close when any of the following power problems sensed e Loss of 24 Vdc power e Failure of the battery charger circuit if enabled e blown fuse or circuit breaker Ground fault if enabled ACTIVITY 24 Vdc should be provided to these terminals through SIGA CR contacts when either an alarm is present in the system or when the system user activates the paging system When this input is active and the amplifier 15 in power fail power relay contacts will transfer and provide battery power to the terminals marked BATT OUT Each battery output terminal is capable of providing 20 A of battery current 4 14 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications In addition to the terminals listed above two groups of terminals are provided for connection of audio signals one for each channel WARNING Do not use the preamp in and out terminals on the main body of the ATP if the 3 ATPI
39. and a maglock to lock the door The door contact switch and REX switch are connected to the input loops of the CRC Note Refer to NFPA 101 and the local AHJ to determine the requirements for delayed egress applications EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Card CRC Card reader reader inside CRCSND outside Door contad Maglock Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 5 Delayed egress doorway Hardware configuration A maglock is most commonly used for delayed egress applications but you can use any locking device that has no manual override For example a strike with no knob could be used The door contact is used to detect unauthorized opening of the door The CRC activates the CRCSND and reports a security alarm event when the door is opened without badging or use of the REX The door contact signal 15 also required to relock the door when the CRC is reset The lock cannot be reset until the door is closed SDU programming Most codes require you to program rules that unlock the door when the panel goes into alarm or when the panel goes into trouble When configuring the CRC set the Delayed Egress Time field to the value in seconds you want to use Define the input loops as follows EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 19 Access control applications 3 20 For the door contact input l
40. if the detector continues to generate an alarm during the fixed confirmation period the alarm is considered valid and processed by the EST3 control panel Alarm verification reduces the occurrence of nuisance alarms as it provides a time frame in which the cause of the alarm can be investigated to determine whether an actual alarm condition exists The alarm verification period can be increased or decreased through the SDU program as limited by the listing agencies Alternate alarm verification The alternate alarm verification feature operates the same way the alarm verification feature operates using a second alternate programmed reset retard period Prealarm setting Signature smoke detectors can be configured to enter a prealarm state which generates a monitor event message Detectors configured for prealarm have a prealarm pseudo point for which rules can be written During configuration you specify a percentage of the alarm sensitivity setting that will generate a prealarm event EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 27 System overview Alternate prealarm setting The alternate prealarm setting is similar to the prealarm setting but it represents a percentage of the alternate alarm sensitivity that will generate a prealarm event 1 28 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Network applications This section deals with the initial layout of the network cabinets as well as application configuratio
41. reported to CPU module EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 15 Service and troubleshooting 3 OPS Off Premises Signal module Table 8 9 3 OPS Off Premises Signal module troubleshooting Problem Possible cause Module in trouble Master box circuit open or not reset Reverse polarity circuit open 3 6 EOL resistor not installed on unused circuits Remote receiver indicates circuit trouble and does not receive alarm Circuit polarity reversed Circuit open Excessive circuit resistance Incompatible receiver Defective module 3 OPS Not activated by panel SDU database Incompatible receiver Remote receiver does NOT indicate circuit trouble and does not receive alarm on Pr a FP YO DN Defective module 3 IDC8 4 Initiating Device Circuit module Table 8 10 3 IDC8 4 Initiating Device Circuit module troubleshooting Problem Possible cause Module in trouble 4 7 EOL resistor not installed on unused IDC circuits 15 EOL resistor not installed on unused NAC circuits No communication with CPU module Module not defined in SDU database Field wiring connector not plugged into module NAC output not working Jumpers installed incorrectly Circuit folding back due to overload Circuit Silenced Circuit shorted Polarized device defective or reversed on circuit IDC circuit not working 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 External source configured but not connected 3 4 5 6 1 In
42. run a Sensitivity report using the Reports command Addressable analog detectors on a 3 AADC 1 Module circuit 1 Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards Individually activate each detector Verify that the appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the LCD module Verify that the detector initiates the appropriate system responses Duct mounted detectors should be tested to verify that minimum maximum airflow requirements are met Remove the detector from its base Verify that the appropriate Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module After all detectors have been individually inspected run a Sensitivity report using the Reports command Traditional 2 wire smoke detectors connected to 3 IDC8 4 modules l Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards Individually activate each detector Verify that the appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the LCD module Verify the detector circuit initiates the appropriate system responses Duct mounted detectors should be tested to verify that minimum maximum airflow requirements are met Remove the detector from its base Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module Conventional 2 wire smoke detectors connected to SIGA UM modules 1 Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship
43. trouble state Changes to the active state when the first point on a panel or any panel in the same network routing group changes to the monitor state Changes to the active state when an operator presses a switch that executes the Evacuation command Pseudo point that changes to the active state when an operator presses a switch that executes the Drill command Changes to the active state when an operator presses the Call or Call Minus switch on the 3 ASU Changes to the active state when an operator presses a switch that executes the AlarmSilence command Changes to the active state when a panel s two stage alarm timer expires Changes to the active state when an operator presses a switch that executes the Reset command Changes to the active state when the first phase of the 3 phase reset cycle starts Changes to the active state when the second phase of the 3 phase reset cycle starts EST3 Installation and Service Manual Table 8 18 System pseudo points Address Label 0014 Reset Phase 3 0015 First Disable Response 0016 Fail Safe Event 0017 Service Group Active 0018 Two Stage Timer Active 0019 Loop Controller Reset Extension 0020 Service Device Supervision 0021 User Trouble 0022 Ext Database Incompatibility 0023 Reboot Fault 0101 Comm Fail xx 0164 0200 Task xx Watchdog Violation 0222 0261 Configuration Mismatch Card 0279 XX 0281 DB Out Of Sync with CPU 0299 Card xx EST
44. 1 to riser 1 Shield if used rap uis n aerae m Audio Riser Output 2 4 UL ULC Listed 15 EOL ON LAST ATP ONLY 1 For Class B circuits Only From Power Amp Output i To Power Amp Audio 23 Do Not Use 1 25V 1 PREAMP 2 25V 1 2 Input 2 wired identical to Input 1 JUMPER SETTINGS P1 1 2 Pre Amp 1 Input 70 Vrms P1 2 3 Pre Amp 1 Input 25 Vrms P2 1 2 Pre Amp 2 Input 70 Vrms P2 2 3 Pre Amp 2 Input 25 Vrms Figure 4 9 ATP with 3 ATPINT wiring EST3 Installation and Service Manual re LL IN ad Louel um PUR AMP 1 T E Tapina cay ET BATT OUT FORCONTINUED FROTECTION AGAINST THE OF FIRE REPLACE ONLY WTH SAME TYPE8 RATING FUSE 120 VAC OUT 120 60HZ 10A MAX 3AB 20A AMP 1 TB5 on SAMPCON1 CDR FOWER PANEL ACTIVI AIL BATT IN 24 VDC 40AH MAX BATT Lour TEL 2 mre T NRAMER 2 iin 5 5 Do Not Use Wiring Notes Circuit polarity shown in supervisory condition Supervised circuit Power limited circuit Non Power limited circuit Back up amplifier size must equal the wattage of the largest amplifier to be backed up Set J1 amp J2 to match source amplifier output voltage Additional ATPs may be connected to the same audio source by connecting
45. 1 1 Russian 1 1 1 Polish 1 Slovak 1 1 Only Western European character set is supported KPDISP language support Marketplace c c 5 8 S 3 o 5 O m Language 2 o z Chinese traditional Taiwan Chinese simplified PRC Dutch X English UK X English US X X X X French Canadian X X Hebrew X X X Italian X X X Korean Extended Wansung 1 24 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview KPDISP language support Marketplace m 9 c S o 3 n Language 2 4 o z Polish X Portuguese Brazil X X Russian X X X Slovak X Spanish South America X X Turkish X X X 1 25 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Signature series devices 1 26 The Signature series family consists of intelligent smoke and heat detectors bases input output modules and ancillary devices The EST3 network supports Signature series devices using several models of the Signature Driver Controller module Up to 125 detectors and 125 modules can be connected to the Signature Data Circuit on these modules The Signature series smoke and heat detectors contain their own microprocessors This allows the devices to make alarm decisions based on the information gathered by the sensing elements incorporated in the device Signature series detectors can be installed in any of four detector bases The Standard Base provides wiring terminals for connection to a re
46. 1 Enter company and installer contact information 2 Create buildings and assign them to companies 3 Assign partitions and devices to the buildings for each company 4 Allocate device resources to each company 5 Export a resource profile for each company The RPM includes a Mass Assign function to help you establish a uniform baseline allocation of resources A Summary display is available so you can review and print the profile in several different forms When your project includes security or access control applications run the RPM and distribute resource profile diskettes to the ACDB and KDC users Refer to the SDU Online Help for details on these steps Refer to the Card Reader Controller CRC Technical Reference Manual for details on configuring CRCs EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 55 Installation 5 56 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Chapter 6 Power up and testing Summary This chapter provides information and procedures necessary to perform initial system power up and acceptance testing Content Cabinet power up procedure 6 3 Initial power up 6 3 Runtime and system errors 6 4 Introduction 6 4 Runtime errors 6 4 System errors 6 5 Initial and reacceptance test procedures 6 6 Introduction 6 6 Control and emergency communications equipment testing 6 7 Primary power supplies 6 7 Booster power supplies 6 7 CPU with LCD module 6 8 3 RS232 card instal
47. 1 33 System overview Backup amplifiers Each cabinet can contain 1 zoned amplifier module to use to back up the remaining primary zoned amplifier modules installed in the same cabinet with the following restrictions All the amplifiers must have the same output voltage rating If the cabinet contains older amplifier modules 15 and 30 watt and newer amplifier modules 20 and 40 watt the amplifier used to back up the primary amplifier modules must be of the older type Note In cases where older and newer zoned amplifiers exist in the same cabinet the older modules should be replaced with newer modules for optimum results The backup amplifier must have an output wattage rating equal to or greater than the largest primary amplifier it is backing up If not the output capacity of the speaker circuit is diminished proportionately wire used to wire the backup amplifier to the other amplifiers must be the same size or greater than that used to wire the speaker circuit Cabinet space The 20 and 40 watt amplifiers each require one space on the rail assembly The 95 watt amplifier requires two rail spaces The number of zoned amplifier modules that can be installed in a single cabinet is limited by the number of available rail spaces the number of power supplies installed in the cabinet and battery limits if any Audio channels The EST3 audio system provides eight 8 simultaneous channels for dist
48. 1524 3048 4572 6096 7620 1524 3048 4572 6096 7620 1524 3048 4572 6096 7620 B 19 System calculations Cabinet battery B 20 Use the following method to calculate the minimum ampere hour capacity of a battery required in order to operate a panel in the absence of AC power Battery calculations must be performed separately for each cabinet in the system Determine the total amount of current in milliamps required by all of the components that derive power from the battery while the panel is in standby mode Multiply the total amount of standby current by the number of hours that the panel is required to operate in standby mode while on battery power Determine the total amount of current in milliamps required by all of the components that derive power from the battery while the panel is in alarm mode Multiply the total amount of alarm current by the number of minutes that the panel 15 required to operate in alarm mode while on battery power Divide the result by 60 to convert minutes to hours Add the total amount of standby current and the total amount of alarm current then divide the result by 1000 to convert to ampere hours Multiply this number by 1 2 to add a 20 safety factor to the calculations EST3 is UL Listed for battery operation durations as follows Standby 60 hours max e Alarm 30 minutes max EST3 Installation and Service Manual SAC bus power System calculations This topic provides inf
49. 24 emergency exit sounder 3 4 emergency exit sounder time 3 20 3 25 energized system precaution 5 3 equipment basic access control system 3 2 error messages 8 53 ESD precaution 5 3 evacuation EVAC channel 1 37 external modem connecting for the remote diagnostics utility 5 53 F feature function domain 1 30 fiber optic cable worksheet B 28 firefighter telephone 1 15 floor access 3 21 G general channel 1 37 ground fault 8 64 ground fault detection 3 8 3 44 3 46 ground faults 8 78 Signature data circuit 8 39 H handicap privileges 3 26 timers 3 27 handicap access door application 3 26 hardware adding 8 6 substitution 8 5 hardware problems 8 5 high and low card readers 3 30 Holdup alarm C 8 EST3 Installation and Service Manual input circuits delayed egress application 3 20 description 3 5 dummy loads 3 23 elevator control application 3 23 emergency exit door application 3 24 3 25 intermittent locks 3 37 internal fault 8 63 IRC 3 upgrade 5 41 J jumper settings AC power source 3 41 continuous locks 3 36 DC power supply 3 44 intermittent locks 3 38 remote power supply 3 44 jumpers 3 8 K keypads description 3 6 L LEDs dual LED control 3 31 3 48 length of SAC bus 3 3 lobbies 3 16 Local mercantile Grade A premises C 3 lock circuit dummy
50. 273 X X X X X X X X X 14 756 518 350 X X X X X X X X X X 15 705 495 330 X X X X X X X X X 16 672 464 304 X X X X X X X X X 17 629 442 X X X X X X X X X X X 18 576 414 X X X X X X X X X X X 19 570 399 X X X X X X X X X X X 20 540 380 X X X X X X X X X X X Note All distance measurements given in feet X means that the 3 PPS M will not support these devices at any distance B 24 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System calculations Table B 10 SAC bus wire length for number of doors vs current loads using 14 AWG wire Doors ON A NN 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 70 4000 4000 4000 3480 2900 2460 2170 1920 1710 1550 1430 1344 1248 1162 1095 1024 969 918 874 820 100 4000 4000 3000 2400 2000 1710 1505 1360 1215 1100 1012 936 858 812 750 720 680 630 608 580 150 4000 2700 2040 1600 1365 1140 1015 904 810 740 682 624 585 532 510 480 442 414 399 380 200 3000 2000 1500 1200 1000 870 756 680 612 550 506 468 429 406 375 352 340 X X X 250 2400 1600 1200 960 800 690 602 544 477 440 407 372 351 322 X Load mA 300 350 400 2000 1750 1500 1360 1160 1000 1020 870 750 800 700 600 675 575 500 582 492 438 511 434 378 448 384 336 405 351 X 370 310 X 341 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 450 13
51. 3 4 N A N A N A pi 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 N A N A N A N A 2 5 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 N A N A N A N A N A d Cabinet 5 3 4 5 6 N A N A N A N A N A 2 5 Cabinet 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 Legend 1 through 6 Cabinets that receive commands from the sending cabinet N A Not applicable Figure 1 16 Routed network commands for the domain illustrated in Figure 1 15 EST3 Installation and Service Manual In Figure 1 16 the Cabinet 1 entry under the Cabinet State column indicates that Cabinet 1 should receive from cabinets 1 2 3 and 4 all information about changes of state Because Cabinet 1 1s the location of the operator controls it should send information about reset alarm silence trouble silence drill and acknowledgments to all the cabinets in the domain which are cabinets 1 2 3 and 4 In this example the drill command is common to both systems Note that the drill command is also sent to cabinets 5 and 6 by Cabinet 1 The Cabinet 2 entry under the Cabinet State column indicates that Cabinet 2 receives its change of state information from cabinets 1 2 3 and 4 Because there are no operator controls located at cabinet 2 there is no need to send reset alarm silence trouble silence drill and acknowledgment information to other cabinets As an alternative the table could show these commandis sent to other cabinets because they can never be issued due to the lack of an L
52. 3 IDC8 4 jumpers amp wiring Added power supply location information 3 SSDC 1 Filter Board Humidity limits Isolator limits Revised 3 ASU amp 3 RS485 specifications Battery shelf data Module current draw 3 CPU1 network wiring Added 3 AADC module CDR 3 Zone Coder Centralized audio components Buffered RS 232 Communications Cable PT 1S Switch settings 3 FIB information 3 TAMP 5 RACCR Enclosure SIGA APS Power Supply SIGA AAxx Audio Amplifiers Incorporated changes concurrent with software release version 1 5 Revised structure to reduce duplicate information Revised to incorporate security and access control integration Added Canadian security standards to Related Documents and removed Appendix D System Compatibility Revised per 3 SDU release 3 3 3 4 and 3 5 Revised to conform to UL 864 9th edition requirements EST3 Installation and Service Manual Content Important information Limitation of liability This product has been designed to meet the requirements of NFPA Standard 72 Underwriters Laboratories Inc Standard 864 and Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Inc Standard ULC 527 Installation in accordance with this manual applicable codes and the instructions of the Authority Having Jurisdiction is mandatory GE Security shall not under any circumstances be liable for any incidental or consequential damages arising from loss of property or other damages or losses owing to the fa
53. 5 System calculations B 6 Note To calculate the wire distance with respect to circuit resistance the tables assume that the circuit is end loaded all devices are clustered more towards the end of the circuit and the circuit uses standard non shielded wire To determine the maximum allowable length of a Signature data circuit branch l Identify the device located farthest from the Signature controller Determine the number of Signature detectors modules and SIGA UMs configured for 2 wire smokes that lie on the same conductive path between the device identified in step 1 and the Signature controller Calculate the number of detector and module addresses Some Signature modules require two addresses Determine the size of the wire used to construct the circuit Find the maximum allowable wire distance for the longest branch in the lookup tables as follows If no SIGA UMs are installed use Table B 1 If 1 to 5 SIGA UMs are installed use Table B 2 If 6 to 10 SIGA UMs are installed use Table B 3 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System calculations Table B 1 Maximum branch length with 0 SIGA UMs configured for 2 wire smokes Signature Signature Maximum allowable wire distance using non twisted non shielded wire pairs detector module addresses addresses 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG ft m ft m ft m 1 25 0 7437 2267 11815 3601 18792 5728 26 50 0 7038 2145 11180 3408 17782 5420 51 75 0 6638 2023 10545 3214 16772 511
54. 5 LRM addresses when using 3 LCDXL1 Main LCD Display A 8 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System addresses Control display module addresses Figure A 6 shows the device logical addresses that the system assigns the control display modules PPCCO129 cl PPCCO129 PPCCOO01 E PPCCO130 PPCCO002 i de PPCCO131 PPCC0003 133 8 PPCCO132 PPCC0004 PPCC0134 ul PPCCO133 PPCCO005 Piera gt a PPCC0134 PPCC0006 PPCCO137 PPCC0135 PPCC0007 138 10 PPCCO136 PPCC0008 139 fo 137 PPCC0009 PPCCO140 PPCCO141 r1 142 118 PPCCO138 PPCC0010 143 PPCCO139 11 144 a PPCCO140 PPCCO012 145 56 146 6 141 PPCCO013 PPCCO147 PPCCO142 PPCCOO14 148 PPCCO143 PPCCO015 149 150 __ 8 PPCCO144 PPCC0016 151 rj PPCCO145 PPCC0017 152 Ho 146 18 24 LEDs 6 groups of 3 switches and 3 LEDs PPCCOO01 PPCCOO01 FECI PPCC0002 PPCC0002 F PPCC0003 PPCC0003 B PPCC0004 PPCC0004 5 PPCC0005 E cT PPCCOO06 PPCCOO06 ECCO B PPCC0007 PPCC0007 So 1H PPCCOO08 PPCCOO08 PPCCO009 PPCCO009
55. 864 signal synchronization Circuit SIGA CC1 SIGA MCC1 Installation requirements Signature CC1 modules do not generate temporal signals they 15 SIGA MCC1S G1M and G1M RM simply turn the NAC circuit on or off You must configure the notification appliances for temporal or steady output as desired The G1M and G1M RM Genesis Signal Master modules can be used to synchronize NACs consisting of Genesis appliances They can also be used to synchronize mixed consisting of Genesis and Enhanced Integrity appliances but the first appliance must be a Genesis device and the Genesis Signal Master module must be mounted on this device G1M and G1M RM Genesis Signal Master modules cannot be used to synchronize NACs consisting of Enhanced Integrity appliances 1 You can also use SIGA UM and SIGA MAB modules configured as Class B addressable NAC modules personality code 16 2 If notification appliances are used on the data line for more than one zone each zone must have isolation so that a break ground or wire to wire fault shall not affect more than one zone 3 Ifthe riser is used for more than one notification zone install in accordance with the survivability from attack by fire requirements in NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 7 Installation 5 8 Typical circuits The circuit diagrams that follow use the term zone to indicate notification zon
56. Class B network siring one line diagram E x3 A B A B A B CPU CPU CPU Class A network wiring one line diagram EE A B A B A B CPU CPU CPU Figure 8 2 Network wiring one line diagrams 1 and TX1 should flicker continuously indicating normal two way CPU module to rail module communication activity When multiple CPU modules are networked together using Class B wiring RX2 TX2 RX3 and TX3 on all panels except the first and last should flicker continuously indicating normal two way network communication activity on both data channels When multiple CPU modules are networked together using Class A wiring RX2 TX2 RX3 and TX3 should flicker continuously indicating normal two way network communication activity on data channels A and B The network and audio riser data circuits are isolated at each CPU module This prevents a shorted data circuit from interrupting communication on the entire circuit Figure 8 3 shows typical Class B network data circuit L E BEEE 3NETTS1 CDR Figure 8 3 Class B network data circuit EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 11 Service and troubleshooting When trying to isolate trouble on a network or audio data circuit remember that both shorted and open circuit segments will interrupt communication between two CPU modules Figure 8 4 shows an open or short circuit fault between cabinets 3
57. EEPROM Signature data circuit voltage low Open or shorted input or output circuit Voltage is out of range on the wire that supplies 24 Vdc power to SIGA UM Voltage on the wire supplying 24 Vdc smoke power to SIGA UM is out of range Bad RAM Possible solution Manually reset relay Replace Module See Table 8 32 Short or low resistance shunt on Signature data circuit Excessive circuit resistance Defective base Defective wiring Replace module Replace module Replace module Replace module Check Signature data circuit Check input output circuit wiring Check power supply output Check wiring Check power supply output Check wiring Replace Module Displaying trouble tables The Trouble Tables display eight categories of active device trouble Each list displays the short address or serial number of the devices experiencing that trouble condition The total number of devices in each list is indicated at the bottom of the list The active troubles displayed in the Trouble Tables should be compared with a device s trouble history displayed in the Display Device Trouble lists to determine any possible trouble pattern EST3 Installation and Service Manual Click Here to Close LPC Di Service and troubleshooting agnostics Click Here to Select SDC Circuit Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card Click Here to Select Cabinet Trouble Tables Tab Internal Fault List Device Type Fault L
58. ENVOY annunciators e KPDISP A secure access system can be implemented using either Signature or Analog Addressable security devices Signature devices are less prone to false alarms and are more resistant to tampering since they cannot be swapped with deliberately compromised devices SDU programming When you create a secure access application use the SDU to create partitions as required When configuring the partitions set the Entry Delay Timer and Exit Delay Timer values to zero When configuring SIGA SEC2 and SIGA MD devices set the Delay to None You can use LCD menu commands to arm and disarm the partitions To do so you must check the Enable LCD Security Control Functions check box This is located on the Options tab of the Cabinet Configuration dialog box Checking this box causes the Security menu to appear in the Command Menus list You can use any suitable Control LED module to arm and disarm partitions Configure the switches as momentary contact switches and use them to activate command lists Program the command lists to perform the desired arm and disarm actions and control the LEDs Refer to the SDU Online Help for more information on rule programming for secure access applications 2 20 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Chapter 3 Access control applications Summary EST3 supports rugged and adaptable access control systems This chapter introduces you to the equipment required for access control
59. Function Internal Fault Signature controller module hardware problem Data Checksum Trouble Configuration data bad Fault 3 SDC Card hardware problem Line Fault SDC open or shorted Map Fault Memory contents differ from actual SDC device conditions Mapping in Progress The Signature controller module is currently mapping the SDC Map disabled The mapping process has been manually turned off 8 66 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Table 8 39 Current status parameters Indicator Dirty Device Unconfigured Alarm Line Initialization Serial Table Full I F Communication Fault I F Internal Fault Balanced Map Programming Mode RAM Fault Stack Fault Map Pending Dev New Starts in Progress Stand Alone Stand Alone Alarm Ground Fault Device Ground Fault Delta suspended Function A dirty smoke detector has been identified The module has detected an alarm on a device which is not in its database SDC power on phase devices not supervised Indicates when data controller card needs to be reinitialized Signature controller module to 3 SDC communication problem 3 SDC card hardware problem Two or more device strings appear identical to the system Signature controller module in upload or download mode Internal memory problem Internal program error Ready to map SDC when SDC conditions warrant The Signature controller module is processing a
60. II e Distinct ring 3 type 5 26 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Note Only Line 1 can be used to receive incoming calls Using the 3 MODCOM messages can be sent to a central monitoring station CMS or received from remote computers When reporting to a CMS alarm trouble and supervisory status data are transmitted as they occur Each message identifies the point or device or circuit that is involved The 3 MODCOM can receive data from two programs the Access Control Database program ACDB or the Keypad Display Configuration program KDC ACDB and KDC information is downloaded on demand from remote computers This lets the end users create and maintain their own security and access control databases Functions Configuration You create the required configuration data using the 3 SDU and download this data to the module using standard programming procedures The data is stored in the nonvolatile memory of the 3 MODCOM Configuration data determines the setup of the 3 MODCOM defines the line properties the receiver attributes and the account parameters This data includes transmission details such as telephone numbers and dialing options Some reference data relating to user access control and security systems is downloaded from the ACDB or KDC programs and stored in the 3 MODCOM Point transmission Using enhanced communication protocols the 3 MODCOM module is capable of transmitting
61. It s a good idea to hold some allocation in reserve giving each company only what it needs It is much easier to allocate additional resources as needed than to reclaim resources that are already allocated In our example the resource profile for company A would contain CRC 1 the lobby door and CRC 2 the suite 101 door For Company A you might choose to allocate 80 of 2 and 20 of CRC 1 Similarly the resource profile for company B would allocate 80 of CRC 3 and another 20 of CRC 1 The site owner will need access to the CRC2 and CRC3 doors for cleaning or inspection purposes The site owner resource profile could allocate 20 of CRC 1 10 of CRC 2 and 10 of CRC 3 This leaves 40 of CRC 1 unallocated and 10 of CRC 2 and CRC 3 unallocated The unallocated resources are reserved for future expansion or changes ACDB operation The site owner the owner of company A and the owner of company B can all use telephone lines to communicate with the control panel via the 3 module They can download additions and changes to the CRCs and upload usage data for various ACDB reports EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 17 Access control applications Delayed egress 3 18 Description of the application Delayed egress doors help to control shoplifting at retail sites A delayed egress door has card readers and a request to exit REX switch Employees can badge in and out as they would at any ot
62. LED lights steady Press the Panel Silence switch to verify the panel buzzer silences and the Panel Silenced LED lights Initiate a second fire Alarm condition and verify that the first fire Alarm message remains at the top of the LCD window that the second fire Alarm event message appears at the bottom of the display the active point counter changes the event sequence indicates a 2 the active fire alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates A002 Press the Reset switch and verify that all devices reset and the panel returns to the normal condition 3 RS232 card installed in CPU 1 Verify the card is properly seated in its connector and secured with the snap rivet Verify that the baud rate of the peripheral device connected to the port matches the port setting as set using the SDU program Check the printer operation by initiating an active condition on the system or generating a system report via the keypad 3 RS485 card installed in CPU Class B configuration 1 Verify the card is properly seated in its connector and secured with the snap rivet EST3 Installation and Service Manual Power up and testing 2 Starting with the network in the normal condition use the status command to verify all connected cabinets are communicating over the network 3 Disconnect the network data communications wiring TB2 17 18 amp 19 20 from the cabinet with the primary LCD module and verify that all the
63. Manual System overview Network Data Riser Network Audio Riser Central Processor Module Equipment Enclosure Local Rail Bus 9 oe e M M Zoned Zoned M Zoned ME Zoned Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier M gt Alert Figure 1 5 Single amplifier failure The amplifier failure caused the backup amplifier to automatically connect to the same audio source as the failed amplifier The output of the backup amplifier replaced the output of the failed amplifier Note The backup amplifier will not replace an amplifier that has detected a field wiring problem to prevent the amplifier from driving into a shorted circuit 3 ASU Audio Source Unit The 3 ASU is the source of the network audio riser Available audio sources are local and remote voice PAGE functions and the firefighter telephone PAGE function An integral tone generator database is provided for the EVAC ALERT and other functions Alternately the 3 ASU s integral digital voice message playback unit can simultaneously provide up to 8 different prerecorded audio messages that may be assigned to any channel The multiplexer within the 3 ASU converts and compresses
64. Monitor module installed for control module Control module installed for monitor module Two device addresses are transposed If the total number of Communicating Devices is correct and a Communication Fault is reported the Unexpected Fault device should be set to the address listed as a Communication fault If the total number of Communicating Devices shown in the table is correct a device has been assigned the same address as a configured device If the total number of Communicating Devices is too low and a Communication Fault is reported the device in the Communication fault table is addressed at the location shown in the Duplicate Device table Wiring error or device not installed If Communicating Devices table short by one and Duplicate Device fault exists then address shown in Comm Fault table is addressed at location shown in Duplicate Device table OR If Communicating Devices table OK and Unexpected Fault exists then the Unexpected Fault device should be set to the address shown in the Communication Fault table Circuit incorrectly wired or connector loose Defective detector or isolator base Broken conductor Device not installed on circuit Device not entered into SDU databases Circuit incorrectly wired Defective detector detector base or module Nicked insulation between conductors 8 71 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 40 Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation Table N
65. Note that the CRC supports any type of reader that uses the industry standard Wiegand output format These include e Proximity e Wiegand pin Magnetic stripe Barcode e Keypad Smart card Biometric For simplicity we present all the applications in this chapter as operating with proximity readers but other reader types can be used Some applications work best with card readers that support dual LED control The CRC uses two LEDs or two LED states to indicate that further actions are required after the initial badging operation before access is granted These applications are Two person rule Visitor and escort schedule Some card readers are also equipped with a keypad The keypad allows for entry of a PIN number in addition to the card code EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications The CRC can accommodate any PIN number of 1 4 digits along with the associated card code The need to enter a PIN is controlled by two factors whether or not the CRC is armed and whether or not the access schedule calls for use of a PIN Lock The CRC supports any type of door locking or releasing device Common lock devices are strikes and maglocks A strike opens the door when power is supplied while a maglock secures the door while power 15 supplied RPM Resource Profile Manager tool The Resource Profile Manager RPM tool is part of the SDU It uses the project database to let
66. Options Screen Select the cabinet that houses the Signature controller module with the trouble condition using the Cabinet drop down list EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 51 Service and troubleshooting 8 52 Select the label of the Signature controller module with the trouble condition Select the loop Signature Data circuit on the module having the trouble condition using the loop SDC drop down list COM port and baud rate To use the Signature diagnostic tools the information from the faulty Signature data circuit or device must first be read uploaded into the System Definition Utility SDU program Use the COM Port and Baud Rate drop down lists to set the COM port parameters on the SDU computer that 15 to be used during uploading The suggested baud rate 1s 19200 Upload To upload the Signature data from the Signature controller module into the SDU program click the Download DSDC Tables button When the Signature data has been downloaded from the Signature controller module it is stored as part of the project The Signature data can be recalled without being connected to the module by using the Load Tables from Disk button Serial number or short address The devices listed in the diagnostic tables can be displayed by serial number or short address You can mix short address and serial number displays using the Requested Diagnostic Table check boxes and the Device Lists radio buttons in combination S
67. Other factors Power supply Central monitoring station Hardware configuration SDU programming ii ACDB KDC operation Figure 2 3 Grade C central station certificate This certificate requires that the control panel be fitted with an ATCK Attack Kit and a 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch No local bell is required A single phone line that is tested at least once in every 24 hour period can be used Alternately two lines with line cut monitoring can be used in place of a line with 24 hour testing EST3 Installation and Service Manual Security applications When this application includes partitions the partition that contains the EST3 panel equipped with the 3 MODCOM must be armed 24 hours a day and have limited high level access Local mercantile grade A alarm certificate Figure 2 4 shows the equipment that can be used as part of a Local Mercantile Grade A Alarm Certificate installation The control panel cabinet must be fitted with an ATCK Attack Kit and 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch A listed Grade A local bell is also required The bell requires a tamper detection loop Both the bell circuit and the tamper detection loop can be supported by a 3 IDC8 4 module Listed Grade A bell and bell housing lt Tamper loop Bell circuit Wires must be in a metal conduit with no boxes or other Control Panel junctions 3 IDC8 4 SAC bus ERE 5 H Other factors E Power supply Hardwar
68. Security devices A door contact device monitors the door position open or closed for various applications A motion detector detects a person s approach and can be used to unlock the door A request to exit REX push button or bar can be used to manually unlock the door Security devices such as glass break detectors can be associated with the door to enhance its security or to monitor a nearby window EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 5 Access control applications 3 6 Output circuit Each CRC supports one output circuit in the form of N O and N C dry contact connections The output circuit can be used for such devices as e Automatic door openers Door holder control Card reader By card reader we mean any of the different types of credential reader supported by the CRC A card reader scans a card to determine the card number and passes the card number to the CRC A card reader is a self contained module capable of reading one type of access card and transmitting the card s code to a card reader controller All the required electronics are assembled in the card reader housing The card reader connects directly to the CRC which processes the card code and grants or denies access Each CRC can support several card readers Typically a CRC will control an entry and exit card reader for the doorway It can also support multiple readers for such applications as two person rule or anti passback
69. Service Manual Access control applications The 3 SAC module supports the SAC bus Power for the CRC is normally taken from the 3 PPS M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted pair wires SDU programming If the CRC is to be used for two person rule it must be configured in the SDU On the CRC Configuration tab the 2 Person Rule box must be checked You can also assign a predefined command list to the Access Denied 2 Person Timeout event This setting 1s found on the CRC Command Lists tab EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 49 Access control applications 3 50 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Chapter 4 Centralized audio applications Summary EST3 supports centralized audio This chapter introduces you to the equipment required and discusses special installation and backup considerations for centralized audio applications Refer to the manual entitled EST3 Installation Sheets for specific component settings and terminal connections Content Equipment required 4 2 ATPC Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet 4 3 Overview 4 3 Equipment racks 4 3 ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel 4 6 Battery backup 4 7 Audio amplifiers 4 8 URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module 4 10 Application 4 10 Installation 4 11 Terminal connections 4 11 Operation 4 11 ATP installation 4 13 ATP wiring 4 14 ATP terminal connections 4 14 ATP jumper settings 4 15 3 ATP
70. Trouble Silence switches at the same time bugcer 2 Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing Panel primary Acceptance 1 Remove Primary AC power power ie cceptance 2 Verify panel operates from battery tests 3 Verify panel goes into trouble 6 second delay 4 Restore AC power at end of test 5 Resetand lock panel at conclusion of all testing Panel Acceptance 1 Remove primary AC power secondary and 2 Measure standby and alarm currents and compare with power nee Cop nce battery calculations to verify adequate battery capacity 3 Test under full load for 5 minutes 4 Measure battery voltage under full load 20 4 to 27 3 Vdc 5 Restore AC power at end of test 6 Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing Panel trouble Annually 1 Verify operation of system Trouble LED and trouble buzzer signals 2 Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing LCD clock Each visit Verify displayed time is correct Reset clock if incorrect Supervisory Semiannually 1 2 3 signal initiating devices Auxiliary Monthly 1 system off premises fire alarm signal transmission Remote Every two 1 system off months premises waterflow signal transmission 7 4 Put zone in Test mode Operate valve Test pressure temperature and water level sensors per the sprinkler system test procedure Coordinate test with receiving location Verify receipt of all transmitted signals Reset and lock panel at conclusion of al
71. Verify that the module s Trouble relay activates and the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue and that the receiving station receives a circuit fault indication Initiate an active fire alarm You should measure 20 to 25 volts between TB1 5 and TB1 6 paying attention to the polarity change Verify receipt of the alarm at the municipal receiving station Initiate an active Supervisory condition You should measure 20 to 25 volts between TB1 9 and TB1 10 paying attention to the polarity change Verify receipt of the Supervisory condition at the municipal receiving station EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 13 Power up and testing 6 14 3 ASU Audio Source Unit 1 Verify that the 3 ASU is installed using accepted workmanship standards The audio sub system messages and configuration information must be downloaded into the Audio Source Unit using the System Definition Utility SDU program before starting testing Verify that the 3 ASUMX expansion card 1f used is firmly seated in its connector Verify the wiring to all devices Starting with the network in the normal condition use the Status command to verify all amplifiers are communicating over the network Disconnect the network audio communications wiring TB1 1 2 from the 3 ASU and verify that all the audio amplifiers connected to the network appear in the Trouble queue Restore the connection If a supervised
72. address 102 Until all devices are installed and the circuit re mapped testing a relocated detector will cause the panel to respond as though the detector was still installed in its original location During mapping all devices remain operational and are capable of initiating an alarm Figure 8 14 shows that both the IPHS and the PHS retain their old S N to address correlations while the circuit is mapping Mapping activity is indicated on the front panel display and the DSDC Status screen if the data entry computer is connected Once mapped the mapping supervision function will automatically correlate a panel address to a specific map location until manually changed using the data entry program EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 43 Service and troubleshooting Control Panel Display PHS mpgO The same detectors SIN 34 1 returned to service in new locations before re mapping IPHS S N 33 1 DSDC Status Screen CT1 S N 48 1 MAPPING P code 02 CT2 S N 49 1 3MAP4 CDR P codes 01 01 Figure 8 14 Detectors returned to new locations during re mapping Figure 8 15 shows the resultant map after re mapping Note that the new S N to panel address correlations have been made the IPHS is now correlated with address 102 and the PHS is correlated with address 101 The relocated devices will now respond as programmed for the original address location Control Panel Display PHS The same detectors 101 SIN 34 1 returned
73. applications Control panel SAC bus 24 Vdc bypasses CRC Signature Controller 3 PPS M Ex Passive infrared detector Remote power Card supply reader 24 Vdc Maglock or strike SIGA loop monitors remote Request to power supply exit button Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 16 CRC using remote power The negative side of the 3 PPS M power supply coming from the control panel connects to the CRC and to all other CRCs The positive side is broken and the remote power supply picks up the load This wiring is shown in Figure 3 17 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 43 Access control applications Remote power supply 24 Vdc Figure 3 17 Wiring for remote power supply 3 44 Power supply Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the CRC Configure the input power as DC Configure the output power as continuous Note that additional power supplies must be listed for fire alarm applications must have ground fault detection disabled and must have a circuit ground that is 1solated from earth ground Hardware configuration The control panel must contain the following rail modules e 3 SSDC 1 Single Signature Controller module e 3 SAC Security Access Control module 3 Primary Power Supply module The 3 SSDC 1 module supports the SIGA loop which supervises the remo
74. applications 24 3 SAC Security Access Control module The 3 SAC Security Access Control rail module controls a high speed RS 485 circuit called the Security Access Control SAC bus The SAC bus supports fire security and access control devices The 3 SAC handles message traffic for these devices interfacing them with the CPU as required Events are passed from the devices to the 3 SAC module then to the CPU for alarm processing The 3 SAC has two sets of circuit terminals and is capable of Class A or Class B configuration Each Class B circuit can include 31 devices for a total of 62 devices per module Class A circuits can include 30 devices total In the figure we show a Class B bus with a KPDISP Keypad Display control and display module SAC bus Since our security and access control devices require 24 Vdc we suggest that you always use a four wire cable two twisted pairs for the SAC bus and a 24 Vdc power supply For the data wires we suggest unshielded twisted pair with greater than 6 twists per foot in 14 to 22 AWG 1 50 to 0 25 sq mm For the power wires we recommend 14 or 16 AWG KPDISP Keypad Display The KPDISP Keypad Display is a control and display module for security and fire alarm systems The KPDISP has an LCD display and a telephone style keypad It operates on the 24 Vdc power supplied with the SAC bus The KPDISP is completely menu driven It lets the system user e Arm and disarm partit
75. appropriate message is displayed on the LCD module Put the input device in the Trouble mode and verify that the correct Trouble message is displayed Note Individual device testing will be done later 3 OPS Off premises Signaling module 1 Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail connectors and secured with the two snap rivets Verify that removable terminal strip is firmly seated Familiarize yourself with the configuration of the module to be tested If the module is connected to a municipal box or central station advise the appropriate parties that testing is in progress Local Energy Municipal Box City Tie configuration With the municipal box connected between TB1 2 and TB1 3 open the circuit Note You can temporarily substitute a 150 2W resistor for the municipal box Verify that the module Trouble activates and the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue Reconnect EST3 Installation and Service Manual Power up and testing the circuit and initiate an active fire alarm You should measure 20 to 25 volts between TB1 3 and TB1 4 Press the panel Reset switch and wait for the system to reset Verify receipt of the alarm at the municipal receiving station Note If you activate the municipal box it will indicate Trouble until rewound 4b Single Reverse Polarity Circuit Old Style configuration Verify that 20 to 25 volts appears between 1
76. available portable phones available to the fire department to five The biggest advantage of this method EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 43 System overview is low cost as multiple remote telephone jacks can be installed on a single branch circuit The main disadvantage of this method are that five phones may not be adequate to properly cover the facility a circuit failure can render many of the phone jacks useless the location of the incoming caller is not precisely known and troubleshooting is more difficult 1 44 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Chapter 2 Security applications Summary EST3 has powerful and flexible security capabilities This chapter introduces you to the equipment required for security systems This chapter also illustrates and describes several security applications Each application is presented as a separate topic that includes a block diagram and description These give you an overview of the application and show the components required and their interconnection Refer to the EST3 Installation Sheets for specific component settings and terminal connections Content Security equipment 2 2 Certificate installations 2 8 Multiple 33MODCOM modules 2 12 Multiple site security and access 2 13 Multiple tenant security 2 16 Secure access 2 20 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 2 1 Security applications Security equipment Introduction The equipment req
77. busy Wait then retry Write protect switch on 3 ASUMX is on Check download connections and SDU settings then retry Check download connections and SDU settings then retry Firmware downloaded does not agree with version setting Note If you are experiencing frequent problems downloading to a 3 CPU low signal levels from the SDU computer may be the cause The Buffered RS 232 Communications Cable P N SDU CBL may be used to correct signal level problems Do not use this cable with the CPU System errors The CPU does not send data to the SDU program Except for problems with the communications between the CPU and the PC running the SDU program the majority of problems with the runtime process are annunciated on the LCD module s display Refer to Chapter 5 Service and Troubleshooting for system error codes and their possible causes EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 5 Power up and testing Initial and reacceptance test procedures 6 6 Introduction Once the system has been wired programmed and the circuit faults corrected all installed components should be tested as a system to insure proper operation The initial system check is designed to verify that all components of the system are installed and operating as designed Verifying that the system was designed and installed according to specifications requires all aspects of the system to be exercised and the results verified Where test results differ from tho
78. calculated in step 1 3 The intersection gives the maximum distance from the 3 PPS M or remote power supply to the last door 4 Ifthe distance to the last door in your installation is less than this distance no further calculations are needed 5 Ifthe distance to the last door in you installation is greater than this distance check Table B 10 using steps 1 through 4 6 Ifchanging the gauge of the wire does not work you must run a second power line or divide the SAC bus and add a remote power supply In either case recheck your estimates For example You are putting a CRC a strike rated at 250 mA 12 Vdc a CR 5395 and a CRCSND at 8 doors The furthest door is 500 feet from the control Using step 1 above you determine that the total alarm current for this door is 149 mA In Table B 9 for 16 AWG find 8 in the Doors column go across this row to the 150 mA column The intersection shows a maximum length of 584 feet Since the distance from the control panel to the last door is less than 584 feet no further calculations are needed Actual voltage drop To calculate the actual voltage drop based on the actual load for each device and the actual distance between each device follow these steps 1 Start the EST3 System Builder and select the 16 AWG check box 2 Enter the actual alarm load for the first device and the distance from the control panel to that device The system will calculate the voltage drop and indic
79. command failed because the Indicative of faulty wiring on the circuit or a sensor did not draw current or it was not faulty device Em to obtain stable mapping data from the 1 Verify correct wiring 2 Verify operational devices 3 Review the Chain Response List 4 Review the Device Response List While mapping a chain from a device back to Indicative of devices not operating consistently the Signature controller module the chain was built with holes in it 1 View the Chain and Device Response Lists to see a list of the devices that are present in the chain being processed 2 Compare the serial numbers in the above lists with the actual wiring to identify a conflict EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 53 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 35 Mapping error messages Message The map tables are inconsistent The actual SDC map does not match the stored expected map Setting the Address in the device failed Map supervision failure The map in use has invalid data This error initiates an automatic reconstruction of the map Mapping supervision detected a change on the SDC A rebuild of the map was scheduled Mapping supervision detected that the device address or the short address of the device being supervised has changed A rebuild of the map was scheduled The mapping command failed the sensor did not draw current or it was not possible to obtain stable mapping data from the SDC A reb
80. communicating with the Signature controller module Open fault The Open Fault List indicates those Signature modules with an open on their input or output circuits all p codes except 8 Ground fault The Ground Fault List indicates those Signature modules with a ground fault on their input or output circuits all p codes except 8 Short fault North American marketplaces The Short Fault List indicates those Signature modules with a short on their supervised output circuits p codes 5 7 15 16 European marketplace The Short Fault List indicates those Signature modules with a short on their supervised input circuits p codes 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 and those Signature modules with a short on their supervised output circuits p codes 5 7 15 16 Brand fault Incorrect brand of Signature devices installed on SDC EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting DSDC status Introduction The DSDC status function is used to determine the real time status of a Signature Data Circuit SDC This function is useful in isolating and correcting faults on an SDC The DSDC status function is useful in conjunction with the download and DSDC diagnostic functions Setting up the System Definition Utility program In order to use the DSDC Status function the computer running the SDU program must be connected to the 3 SSDC 1 The appropriate communication port must be connected to the mod
81. is enabled Fuse failure EST3 Installation and Service Manual 4 27 Centralized audio applications 4 28 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Chapter 5 Installation Summary This chapter provides installation information for system components and applications that supplements the instructions provided on individual component installation sheets Content Installation overview 5 3 Electrostatic discharge precaution 5 3 Energized system precaution 5 3 Circuit compatibility 5 3 Recommended cable manufacturers 5 4 UL 864 signal synchronization 5 6 Requirements 5 6 Typical circuits 5 8 Creating an initial startup version of the project database 5 16 System installation sequence 5 18 Preliminary field wiring testing 5 19 Chassis installation in EIA 19 inch racks 5 22 ATCK Attack Kit for cabinets 5 23 Local rail module installation 5 24 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator module 5 26 Features 5 26 Functions 5 27 Equipment 5 28 Configuration options 5 29 Failover operation 5 30 Compatibility 5 32 Transmission protocols 5 32 Transmission process 5 33 Programming considerations 5 35 Installation 5 36 3 SAC Security Access Control module 5 40 Product description 5 40 SAC bus 5 40 Recommended cabling 5 40 Additional power supply wiring 5 40 3 AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller and IRC 3 5 41 AC power and DC battery
82. loop on video bus Control display module faulty or missing or not properly configured Cabinet local rail communication failure Fault or break in video signal lines Fault in internal 3 SAC processor Executable program corrupt 3 SAC hardware failure 1 Module in wrong slot 2 Incorrect display on module Database corrupt Database download from the SDU is in progress or was incomplete Control display module faulty or missing or not properly configured Fault or break in Class A network data riser connection Cabinet local rail communication failure Any cabinet component or field wiring Audio data circuit open or shorted EST3 Installation and Service Manual Table 8 20 Local trouble pseudo points Address Label 0604 Internal Fault 0604 RAM Fault or Stack Fault 0605 Database Supervision 0605 DB Supervision Audio Default Tone 0606 Code Supervision 0607 Auxiliary Port One 0607 Data Card Fault 0607 Data Card Fault 1 0608 Auxiliary Port Two 0608 Data Card Fault 2 0609 Panel in Download Mode 0609 Configuration Fault 0610 Network Audio Circuit A Fault 0610 Rail Voltage Out of Spec 0610 Telephone Line 1 0611 Network Audio Circuit B Fault 0611 Rail Vitg Blw Batt 0611 Telephone Line 2 0612 Heat Sink Too Hot EST3 Installation and Service Manual Source General 3 AADC1 General 3 ASU General CPU 3 AADC1 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 CPU 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 CPU General
83. m ft m ft m 18 AWG 1489 454 1117 340 744 227 558 170 235 72 186 57 0 75 sq mm 16 AWG 2420 738 1815 553 1210 369 907 276 382 116 302 92 1 0 sq mm 14 AWG 3722 1134 2792 851 1861 567 1396 426 588 7 180 465 142 1 5 sq mm 12 AWG 6049 1844 4537 1383 3024 922 2268 691 955 291 756 230 2 5 sq mm B 18 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Addressable analog circuit wire length Table B 8 lists the maximum wire distances allowed for Addressable Analog circuits Notes System calculations Maximum wire resistance can not exceed 50 ohms Maximum wire capacitance can not exceed 0 05 microfarads Table B 8 Maximum allowable wire distance for Addressable Analog circuits Non twisted non shielded Wire Max loop gauge Capacitance 0 01 uF 0 02 uF 18 0 03 uF 0 04 uF 0 05 uF 0 01 uF 0 02 uF 16 0 03 uF 0 04 uF 0 05 uF 0 01 pF 0 02 uF 14 0 03 uF 0 04 uF 0 05 uF Twisted non shielded ft 4000 8000 12000 16000 20000 2777 5555 8333 11111 13888 2631 5263 7894 10526 13157 EST3 Installation and Service Manual m 1219 2438 3658 4877 6096 846 1693 2540 3387 4233 802 1604 2406 3208 4010 Twisted shielded ft m 1724 525 3448 1051 5172 1576 6896 2102 8620 2627 1219 372 2439 743 3658 1115 4878 1487 6097 1858 1190 363 2380 725 3571 1088 4761 1451 5952 1814 ft 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 m
84. main entrance of an office building and leads into a common lobby area Within the building two companies rent offices each with controlled access doors Telephone lines Common door Site owner ACDB Distributor Site Owner Company om Company B Suite 101 Company A Suite 102 Company B Resource profiles Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 4 Common door in a lobby area 3 16 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Hardware configuration The site has an EST3 control panel that includes a 3 SAC and a 3 MODCOM module The 3 SAC supports the SAC bus The 3 MODCOM module supports modem communication with the control panel over telephone lines SDU programming As the distributor you use the SDU to program the control panel for this application Part of the programming job is to use the Resource Profile Manager RPM to create resource profiles for the site owner and for each tenant company Resource profiles are imported into the Access Control Database ACDB program They determine which devices the user can see and program Resource profiles also establish transmission routes that permit modem communication with the EST3 panel When a device is shared the RPM lets you specify how much of the device is allocated to each company You can allocate resources either by percentages or by actual numbers
85. network mode or to this programmable rail module only single step mode fo o O ness zz E ELIIIIIII Bsssssssss fps sssis33 333333227 o 5 sis me O o Oo EO 3 o me O o Q E DE ii i 1 Optional serial ports may be used to Connect here to download data to download over the network 3 this programmable rail module only RS232 required single step mode Figure 1 12 Potential connection points for downloading data Downloading database files over the network A CPU module s Network A port and its modular phone jack share an interrupt with the module s microprocessor As such the microprocessor disables the Network A port whenever you connect the SDU computer to the modular phone jack Consequently download options
86. or output module Ground fault conditions Ground fault conditions require selective 1solation of portions of the data circuit to systematically narrow down the fault s location circuit with a ground fault approximately 10 or less to ground will cause the LCD module to light the Ground Fault LED Ground fault conditions can occur on the data circuit the 24 Vdc smoke power circuit or the input circuits to Signature series modules The general location of a ground fault can be determined using the LCD status command and Table 8 28 below Table 8 28 Ground fault indications LCD Ground Fault Location Ground Fault LED ON 1 Signature data circuit No Device 2 24 Vdc smoke power circuit Ground Fault LED ON 1 Positive leg of input circuit of Device PPCCDDDD Trouble device PPCCDDDD EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 39 Service and troubleshooting 8 40 Signature ontrolle Signature Signature ontroller ontroller 3SIGTS5 CDR Negative ground fault Positive ground fault Figure 8 9 Signature data circuit ground faults To isolate the ground fault open the suspect circuit both conductors at a location that will disconnect approximately 50 of the installed devices Figure 8 10 illustrates the technique on a data circuit A similar technique is used on smoke power or module input circuits to isolate ground faults Signature ontrolle Ground Fault LED OFF P Opening BOTH Ground cond
87. other system cabinets connected to the network appear in the trouble queue 3 RS485 card installed in CPU Class A configuration 1 Verify the card is properly seated in its connector and secured with the snap rivet 2 Starting with the network in the normal condition use the status command to verify all connected cabinets are communicating over the network 3 Disconnect the network data communications wiring TB2 17 18 amp 19 20 from the cabinet with the primary LCD module and verify that a Class network communications fault is annunciated Repeat step 2 to verify that all connected cabinets still communicate over the network 3 IDC8 4 Initiating Device Circuit module 1 Familiarize yourself with the circuit configuration of the individual module to be tested Remember modules of the same type can be configured differently 2 Forcircuits configured as initiating device circuits IDCs activate the circuit by shorting the circuit s two terminals Verify that the appropriate message appears in the proper message queue Disconnect the circuit or EOL resistor Verify that a Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue 3 For circuits configured as Notification Device Circuits NACs turn on the circuit by activating an IDC programmed to turn on the NAC or use the activate output device command via the keypad Verify that the circuit activates properly Restore the circuit Disconnect the circuit or EOL resisto
88. remote 24 Vdc power supply Any of these supplies is suitable for powering continuous locks See the topics Power from an AC source and Power from a remote source for more information about these options A typical application using continuous locks is shown in Figure 3 12 below Control panel pean ee Jm tei eve eevee Sa d 24 Vdc remote power supply or CRCXF transformer a S ACOBKOC operation Figure 3 12 CRC controlling a continuous lock The figure shows the power coming from the 3 PPS M in the control panel This power supply could be used to operate the EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 35 Access control applications 3 36 lock but use of a CRCXF or remote 24 supply is recommended to minimize the load on the panel power supply During open schedules or when an authorized card is read at a card reader the CRC provides power from the 3 PPS M to the door strike to unlock the door For maglocks the CRC provides power from the 3 PPS M or CRCXF or 24 Vdc power supply to activate the lock during closed schedules or between authorized card accesses Power supply Use power and load calculations to determine the need for remote power supplies or transformers Refer to the CRC Technical Reference Manual for calculation guidelines Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the CRC Refer to the installation sheet for correct jumper settings Configure
89. replaced with a known good component and the results again observed Substituting hardware Caution Never install or remove a module while power is applied to the cabinet The local rail modules in the EST3 system are microprocessor based The Signature driver controller module Central Processor Module CPU module 3 AADC1 Addressable Analog Device Controller module and 3 ASU Audio Source Unit all have flash memory which is used to store the operating firmware The flash memory is empty when the module is shipped from the factory When the configuration database is downloaded into the cabinet each component using flash memory receives specific information This information includes the module s location in the system and its configuration Note Because the content of each module is specific to its cabinet location do not substitute 3 SSDC 1 CPU 3 AADCI or 3 ASU modules without downloading the new cabinet configuration database If you are substituting a Signature driver controller module you must also download the specific Signature circuit information into the module s memory If you are substituting a 3 AADCI driver controller module you must also download its specific circuit configuration into its database If you are substituting 3 ASU modules you must also download the audio message database directly into the 3 ASU EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 5 Service and troubleshooting 8 6 Rail module su
90. s TB2 NAC B and NAC B terminals 3 Usethe IKHZ TONE switch to turn on the tone 4 Adjustthe amplifier s gain pot until the RMS meter displays the configured output level 25 or 70 Vrms 5 Connect the amplifier s field wiring 6 Usethe IKHZ TONE switch again and verify that the output level remains the same Readjust the amplifier s gain pot if necessary 7 Disconnect the amplifier s field wiring 8 Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each amplifier in the cabinet 9 Reconnect the field wiring for all the amplifiers in the cabinet Design considerations Your audio system will work best if the prerecorded tones and messages have roughly the same volume or amplitude The process of establishing a common maximum amplitude is sometimes called normalizing We suggest that you normalize your tones and messages to a maximum amplitude of 1 V peak to peak or an average of 0 7 Vrms The SDU does not contain a tool for normalizing your audio clips so you ll need to use a sound editor to normalize the clips before you import them into the SDU database The audio clips included in the EST3 Support Library CD have already been normalized EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 49 Installation Connecting a CDR 3 Zone Coder for coded tone output The CDR 3 Zone coder can be connected to the 3 ASU s AUX input to provide a coded or march time tone to the audio system Refer to Figure 5 11 If you re connecting a CDR 3 to a seria
91. standards Verify that jumper JP1 on each SIGA UM module is set to position 1 2 Individually activate each detector Verify that the appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 19 Power up and testing 6 20 LCD module Verify the SIGA UM initiates the appropriate system responses Duct mounted detectors should be tested to verify that minimum maximum airflow requirements are met Remove the detector from its base Verify that the appropriate SIGA UM Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module Signature series input modules 1 Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards Individually activate each initiation device Verify that the appropriate circuit type and location message is displayed on the LCD module Verify that the circuit initiates the appropriate system responses Open up the circuit Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module Signature series output modules 1 Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards Using the Activate Output command individually activate each output Verify that the device responds appropriately For supervised output circuits open up the circuit Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module If the output is activated by one or
92. technical personnel in servicing and troubleshooting the system Appendices A B and C provide supplementary information about system addressing calculations and compatibility EST3 Installation and Service Manual ix Content Safety information Important safety admonishments are used throughout this manual to warn of possible hazards to persons or equipment Caution Cautions are used to indicate the presence of a hazard which will or may cause damage to the equipment if safety instructions not followed or if the hazard 15 not avoided WARNING Warnings are used to indicate the presence of a hazard which will or may cause personal injury or death or loss of service if safety instructions are not followed or if the hazard is not avoided EST3 Installation and Service Manual The EST3 library Content EST3 documents A library of documents and multi media presentations supports the EST3 life safety system A brief description of each is provided below EST3 Installation and Service Manual P N 270380 Gives complete information on how to install and service the EST3 hardware The manual also includes installation information on selected Signature Series components SDU Online Help P N 180653 Provides full online support for configuring and programming a system using the System Definition Utility program EST3 System Operation Manual P N 270382 Provides detailed information on how to operate the syste
93. the OUT ports transmit a constant signal which can be used to measure cable loss 8 13 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 6 3 FIB troubleshooting Symptom No LED activity on any fiber optic port No LED activity on IN fiber optic port Steady on LED on IN fiber optic port Possible causes 1 Ribbon cable between interface and electronics card loose Improperly installed or broken 2 Electronics card not properly seated in J2 of CPU 1 Incorrect cable connected to port 1 Jumper JP1 left in test position Signature Controller modules Please refer to Signature Component Troubleshooting Chapter for complete information on Signature related troubleshooting Control display modules The information in this section applies to the following models of control display modules 3 12 1RY 3 2RY 3 12 2RY 3 128G 3 12SR 3 12SY 3 12 SIGY 3 12 SIRY 3 12 AS2Y 3 24G 3 24R 3 24Y 3 6 3531 3 6 35102 3 6 SIGYR The control display modules operate independently of the host module on which they are installed The displays do use the host module s electronics to communicate with the CPU The Lamp Test function pressing Panel Silence and Alarm Silence Switches simultaneously will quickly isolate hardware problems from programming problems with any display Table 8 7 Control display module troubleshooting Problem Module LEDs and switches inoperative AND host module inoperative 8 14 Possi
94. the ACDB program The ACDB runs on your computer You can connect the computer to the access control system in two ways e From an RS 232 port on the computer to an RS 232 port on the CPU From the computer modem to a 3 MODCOM via telephone lines The end result is that the ACDB database can be downloaded from your computer to the system Each CRC stores that portion of the database pertinent to its operation Locally defined unlock and open timers Using the ACDB program you can control how much time a cardholder has to enter or exit after badging in or pressing a request to exit button REX The CRC controls both the unlock time and door open time Both can be set in the ACDB program Unlock timers control the number of seconds that the door stays unlocked after a cardholder badges in When the unlock timer expires the door locks The ACDB has four unlock timers e Standard unlock Handicap unlock EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 9 Access control applications 3 10 e Manual unlock e Minimum unlock The CRC relay can be used to control a door opener Door open timers control the number of seconds that the relay remains active The ACDB has two door open timers Manual open time Relay open time Access control applications The remaining topics in this chapter discuss specific access control applications Each topic gives you an overview of the application showing the components required and their i
95. the installation sheets to determine the minimum appliance voltage required What if there are different types of appliances in the NAC and each type has a different minimum operating voltage In this case use the highest minimum voltage required by any appliance The total current requirement for the appliances will be the sum of the individual maximum currents drawn by each appliance when using DC power Use the maximum current for the appliance over the 16 V to 33 V range If all appliances draw the same maximum current the total current is the maximum current multiplied by the number of appliances If different appliance types have different maximum currents the total current is the sum of the maximum current for each appliance type multiplied by the number of appliances of that type Wire resistance Typical wire resistances are shown in the following table Table 4 Typical wire resistances Wire Resistance Resistance gauge 1 strand uncoated 7 strand uncoated AWG copper copper perfoot per meter perfoot per meter 12 0 00193 0 00633 0 00198 0 00649 14 0 00307 0 01007 0 00314 0 01030 16 0 00489 0 01604 0 00499 0 01637 18 0 00777 0 02549 0 00795 0 02608 When performing these calculations always refer to the actual cable supplier documentation and use the actual Q ft or Q m for the cable being used EST3 Installation and Service Manual System calculations Calculating cable length To calculate the
96. the ATP pre amp output to the pre amp input of the next ATP 4 17 Centralized audio applications 120VAC OUT 60HZ UF UT o PRE AMP 1 FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINSTTHERSKOFARE _ 20 RAM REPLACE ONLY WTH SAME eee 8 RATING FUSE 69 1 J D P 120 VAC OUT IE PREAMP 2 70V 25V j PRE AMP 2 2121 d eS Soe um Cb ee co L Do Not Use 4 Figure 4 10 Wiring from Dukane amplifier to ATP 4 18 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications 3 AMP 120VAC 3 2 J2 ENABLE BATTERY CHARGER J3 DISABLE aS 3AG CHARGER PET Mw uu uu uud l seeeeeseseaceses CBU AMP F2 CB2 4 2_ E CB3 6 24VDC OUT 1AMP5VDC BATERY IN awe BATTERY 5VDC TRBL 24VAC ATPPSSEC CDR Figure 4 11 Power supply terminal card with 3 ATPINT cover removed The output of the amplifier must be set for the proper value by adjusting the INPUT LEVEL adjustment on the back of the amplifier With a 1 000 Hz tone generated by the 3 ACPor 3 ZA20 the amplifier must be adjusted for 70 Vrms output using the appropriate RMS voltmeter FUSE 25A LEVEL ADJUST 25A SB 120VAC 60HZ Figure 4 12 Dukane amplifier rear view EST3 Installation and Service Manual 4 19 Cent
97. the input power as DC when using power from the control panel or a remote supply Configure input power as AC when using a transformer For this application configure the output power as continuous Hardware configuration The control panel must contain the following rail modules e 3 SAC Security Access Control module e 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply module The 3 SAC module supports the SAC bus Power for the CRC is taken from the 3 PPS M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted pair wires SDU programming When configuring the system for this application you ll need to configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the SDU For this application the Lock Type can be either Strike or Maglock as required to match the lock actually used EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Power for intermittent locks Description of the application By intermittent locks we mean locks that operate on average less than 30 seconds in every minute In these applications the CRC battery can provide the power needed to operate the lock The CRC can be powered by the 3 PPS M It uses this power source to charge an internal 1 2 Ah sealed lead acid battery The battery then provides the power needed to operate the door lock Because the battery powers the door strike this configuration cannot be used for maglocks or strikes that are active more than 30 seconds in a minute In th
98. this chapter Table 8 43 Addressable analog module troubleshooting matrix Module not responding correctly M500 M501 M500 M500 Possible Causes MF MF CF XF x x x x Module is installed in the wrong location or is improperly addressed x x X X Module has not been entered into 3 AADC1 database X Break off tab is set incorrectly X X X x A ground fault has occurred on data circuit or side of input output circuit Module in trouble on 3 AADC 1 circuit X X X X Module is missing or is incorrectly connected to the circuit X x x x ID error Module has not been loaded into the 3 AADC1 database x x X X A ground fault has occurred on input or output circuit X X The output circuit may be open shorted or incorrectly wired A polarized device may be installed in reverse The EOL resistor may be missing or incorrect x x x x Missing or incorrect EOL resistor Module incorrectly in alarm or active on CPU LCD module X X Initiating Device Circuit may be shorted or an initiating device is incorrectly installed EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 75 Service and troubleshooting X X x Applicable Not applicable EOL resistor value is too low Table 8 44 Addressable analog detector troubleshooting Symptom Detector not responding correctly Detector in trouble on CPU LCD Detector incorrectly in alarm on CPU LCD 8 76 Possible causes oS peo m mr 209 EINE ks o Detector insta
99. to an optional serial communications port does not affect the Network A port If a 3 RS232 option card is connected to the CPU you can download data to any panel on a Class B network regardless of where the panel physically connects to the network data riser 1 20 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Download connection from SDU computer B1 B1 CAB2 B1 CAB3 B1 CAB4 5 CPU CPU i CPU TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2 NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN AIN OUT IN A IN A A B B A A B B A A B B A A B B 1 l 1 l l l I l o0oooonQod o0ooooQ0odq LI 2 v Figure 1 14 Impact of disabling Network A terminal connection on Class A networks during a download On Class A networks however see Figure 1 14 disabling the Network port on panel CAB3 does not prevent the other panels from receiving data through CAB3 s Network B port Connecting the SDU computer to the modular phone jack does cause the panel to report a Network Class A Failure trouble When the network data riser is configured for Class B connecting to the panel modular phone jack causes the local CPU module to report a communications fault wi
100. up and testing Runtime and system errors 6 4 Introduction There are two major categories of errors which can occur when configuring a database for the network The System Definition Utility program is used to set up the contents of each cabinet Once all the cabinets have been defined devices labeled and rules written all this information is cross checked against itself This process is called compiling the program If there are incorrectly written rules unreferenced input or output devices or other problems with the design the compiler will generate a list of errors These errors must be corrected using the SDU When the data has been properly compiled the data is in a form that the CPU memory can receive Sending this information to the memory of the various CPUs making up the network is called downloading If an error occurs during the download process it is referred to as a runtime error Runtime errors There are a number of reasons that errors may occur when downloading data into the CPU controllers Initially certain errors are to be expected as the network database 1s loaded in steps Until all portions of the database are properly entered into memory errors will be generated During initial system configuration this 15 to be expected Most of these errors will resolve themselves as the system configuration progresses A second source of download errors is a mismatch between the cabinet configuration in the SD
101. 2 76 100 0 6238 1901 9910 3021 15762 4804 101 125 0 5839 1780 9275 2827 14752 4497 0 1 25 7267 2215 11544 3519 18361 5597 1 25 1 25 6867 2093 10909 3325 17351 5289 26 50 1 25 6467 1971 10275 3132 16342 4981 51 75 1 25 6068 1849 9640 2938 15332 4673 76 100 1 25 5668 1728 9005 2745 14322 4365 101 125 1 25 5268 1606 8370 2551 13312 4057 0 26 50 6697 2041 10639 3243 16921 5157 1 25 26 50 6297 1919 10004 3049 15911 4850 26 50 26 50 5897 1798 9369 2856 14901 4542 51 75 26 50 5498 1676 8734 2662 13891 4234 76 100 26 50 5098 1554 8099 2469 12881 3926 101 125 26 50 4698 1432 7464 2275 11871 3618 0 51 75 5906 1800 9383 2860 14923 4549 1 25 51 75 5250 1600 8340 2542 13265 4043 26 50 51 75 4633 1412 7360 2243 11707 3568 51 75 51 75 4051 1235 6435 1961 10235 3120 76 100 51 75 3498 1066 5558 1694 8839 2694 101 125 51 75 2973 906 4723 1440 7512 2290 0 76 100 3931 1198 6245 1903 9932 3027 1 25 76 100 3404 1037 5407 1648 8601 2621 26 50 76 100 2899 883 4605 1404 7324 2232 51 75 76 100 2413 735 3833 1168 6096 1858 76 100 76 100 1945 593 3089 942 4913 1498 101 125 76 100 1493 455 2371 723 3771 1149 0 101 125 2631 802 4180 1274 6649 2027 1 25 101 125 2165 660 3439 1048 5470 1667 26 50 101 125 1713 522 2721 829 4328 1319 51 75 101 125 1274 388 2023 617 3218 981 76 100 101 125 847 258 1345 410 2140 652 101 125 101 125 431 131 685 209 1089 332 EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 7 System calculations Table B 2 Maximu
102. 3 Installation and Service Manual Source CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Service and troubleshooting Functional description Changes to the active state when the third phase of the 3 phase reset cycle starts Changes to the active state when the first point on a panel or any panel in the same network routing group changes to the disable state Changes to the active state when a device asserts the rail alarm not line and the CPU module has not registered an alarm event Changes to the active state when an operator enables a Service Group from the LCD module Changes to the active state when a panel s two stage alarm timer starts Changes to the active state when a loop controller stays in the reset mode longer than expected Changes to the active state when an operator cancels a Service Group test while a circuit under test remained active Changes to the active state when an operator forces a trouble into the system Not implemented at this time Changes to the active state when a different database in one or more network nodes Changes to the active state when the CPU module is interrupted unexpectedly Changes to the active state when the CPU is unable communicate with the networked CPU module in cabinet xx Changes to the active state when task xx fails to execute properly Changes to the active state when the card in slot xx can not perfo
103. 3 SSDC1 expected data 3 SDDC1 2 Defective wiring 3 Defective device 0687 Grnd Fault Data Card 2 3 DSDC Wiring Fault 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 8 30 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Table 8 20 Local trouble pseudo points Address 0689 0690 Table 8 21 Address 0615 0622 0650 0651 0673 0674 0675 0675 0678 0683 0684 0685 Label Smoke Power Current Limit Card 2 Configuration Mismatch Slot 1 Local monitor pseudo points Label Incoming Ring Outgoing Call in Progress All Call Active Mic Key Active Mapping In Progress Data Card 1 Mapping Disbld Data Card 1 Device Maint Alert Device Maint Alert Data Card 1 Reconstct Line Data Card 1 Mapping In Progress Data Card 2 Mapping Disbld Data Card 2 Device Maint Alert Data Card 2 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Source 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 Source 3 MODCOM 3 ASU 3 ASU 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 3 AADC1 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 Service and troubleshooting Description Defective module N A Description An incoming call was received by the module Dialer is active Changes to the active state when an operator presses the Call switch Changes to the active state when an operator presses the push to talk Switch on the
104. 3 to OFF OFF and ON respectively 8 bits even parity These are the factory settings Set printer switches SW2 1 2 and 3 to match the baud rate set on the CDR 3 zone coder PT 1S Printer Specifications Dimensions HWD 3 2 in x 14 2 in x 10 8 in 8 13 cm x 36 cm x 27 4 cm Print Speed 232 Characters Second Baud Rates 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Wiring 3 18 AWG 0 75 mm Voltage 120 Vac 60 Hz Standby Power 40 VA 5 46 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Printing Power 120 VA Switch DIPSW factory settings located on main board Installation SW1 Sw2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 Sws OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF English English English 11 in form 11 in form auto LF off 8 bits enable front panel Switch SW1 factory settings located on serial board Factory Switch Setting SW1 1 OFF SW1 2 OFF SW1 3 ON SW1 4 OFF SW1 5 ON SW1 6 ON SW1 7 8 ON ON Description ON Odd parity OFF Even parity ON No parity OFF With parity ON 8 bits OFF 7 bits ON Ready Busy protocol OFF XON XOFF protocol ON Circuit test OFF Monitor test ON Print mode OFF Test mode OFF OFF SSD Busy OFF ON SSD Busy ON OFF RTS Busy ON ON DTR Busy Switch SW2 factory settings located on serial board Switch Factory Setting SW2 1 2 OFF OFF ON 3 SW2 4 OFF EST3 Installation and Service Manual Description OFF OFF OFF 110 bps ON OFF OFF 300 bps OFF O
105. 30 Audio applications 1 33 Audio channels 1 34 Manual audio zone selection 1 38 Messages 1 39 Firefighter phone system 1 42 Five phone off hook limit 1 42 One phone per circuit 1 42 Five phones per circuit 1 43 Limited number of portable telephone handsets 1 43 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 1 System overview System description 1 2 EST3 is designed using modular hardware and software components to facilitate rapid configuration installation and testing Most network components are provided as local rail modules LRMs that plug into the rail chassis assemblies Rail chassis assemblies are available to meet most any application Rail modules are used for data processing intrapanel communication of command control data response data audio signal processing and power distribution Each rail module provides an interface to support a control display module that can be mounted on the front of the module Most field wiring is terminated using removable terminal strips for easy installation and servicing of modules Cabinets are available in a variety of sizes The smallest 3 5 in addition to the central processor module and primary power supply module supports two rail modules and three control display modules The largest the 3 CAB21 supports as many as 18 rail modules and 19 control display modules An EST3 cabinet can be configured as a stand alone system or as part of a ne
106. 5 and TB1 6 paying attention to polarity Create a Trouble condition on the panel Verify that 0 volts appears between TB1 5 and TB1 6 Verify that the module s Trouble relay activates the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue and that the receiving station receives the Trouble indication Open the circuit wired between TB1 5 and TB1 6 Verify that the receiving station receives the Trouble indication Initiate an active fire alarm You should measure 20 to 25 volts between TB1 5 and TB1 6 paying attention to the polarity change Verify receipt of the alarm at the municipal receiving station 4c Three Reverse Polarity Circuit New Style configuration Verify that 20 to 25 volts appears between TB1 5 amp TB1 6 between TB1 7 amp TB1 8 between TB1 9 amp TB1 10 paying attention to polarity Create a Trouble condition on the panel Verify that 20 to 25 volts appears between TB1 8 and TB1 8 that the module s Trouble relay activates the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue and that the receiving station receives the Trouble indication Open the circuit wired between TB1 5 and TB1 6 Verify that the receiving station receives a circuit fault indication Open the circuit wired between TB1 7 and TB1 8 Verify that the receiving station receives a circuit fault indication Open the circuit wired between TB1 9 and TB1 10
107. 60 900 660 544 455 390 336 X 500 1200 800 600 480 405 348 eo X XK X X X X X XX XXX X 550 1100 740 555 436 365 312 x KK KK KK KK KK KX X 600 1000 680 510 400 335 x KK X X KK KK KK KK XK X 650 940 620 471 376 315 X x KK X X KK KK KK KX X Note All distance measurements given in feet X means that the 3 PPS M will not support these devices at any distance EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 25 System calculations CPU memory B 26 Use the CPU memory calculation worksheet Table B 11 to determine if a CPU requires additional memory Each line in the worksheet is a system variable and is referenced by a line identification ID letter The line IDs also appear in the formula column The result of solving a formula is then placed in the Results column Enter the values for each variable in the column on the same line Replace the variables in the formula by the value entered in the column having the same letter as the formula Calculate the formula and put the results in the Results column Determine the memory size required as indicated at the bottom of the worksheet Note The Systems Definition Utility will prevent you from downloading if the compiled project database exceeds the amount of memory on the CPU EST3 Installation and Service Manual System calculations Table B 11 CPU memory calc
108. AB2 B1 CAB3 B1 CABA rc ILU mm d CPU s CPU m CPU TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2 NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO OUT IN AIN OUT IN AIN OUT IN AIN OUT IN AIN A B B A B B A B B A A B B l l I l l l oooocoQq oooooQdq oooooQoq Figure 1 11 Typical Class A network data riser wiring using copper wire Download connections Each programmable rail module has a modular phone jack to use for downloading data directly from the SDU computer The modular phone jack on any CPU module can also be used to download data to other programmable rail modules in the same panel over the rail bus or to other panels over the network data riser In addition to the modular phone jack the CPU module has two serial communication ports that can be used to download data provided both of these conditions are met e A 3 RS232 option card is installed e The serial port used to download data is not configured for gateway or coder applications Tip To download data over the network without having to reconfigure the system temporarily install a 3 RS232 option card on any CPU module in the system and connect the SDU computer to serial port 1 1 18 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Connect here to download data to all three programmable rail modules over the rail bus
109. AMP1 FAIL MODULES REPORT RISER TROUBLE TO NETWORK CONTROLLER AMP2 FAIL AMP3 FAIL RKU SERIES ENCLOSURE URSM FROM 3 ZAxx A A AMP1_PRI BACKUP RISER Figure 4 14 Amplifier bank with spare amplifier EST3 Installation and Service Manual ARA 1 RELAY RELAY ACTIVATES 1 PRE AMP OUT IN AMP 1 FAILURE IN OUT 1 AMP 1 pm RISER 1 AMP1 BKUP a TT ATP 1 AUDIO POWER EOL ANAN AMPLIFIER 1 SIGA CR DEFINED AS T UDIOPOWER NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT SERS AMPLIFIER 2 OUT PRE AMP AMP 2 OUT2 OUT IN ARA 1 RELAY l RELAY ACTIVATES ON 2 FAILURE AMP2 BKUP SIGA CR DEFINED AS 6 oc D m NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT SIGA CR DEFINED AS APPL ACT NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT ARA 1 RELAY RELAY ACTIVATES ON W PRE AMP OUT IN AMP 3 FAILURE OUT3 IN AMP3 RE 2 AUDIO POWER STANT AMPLIFIER 3 SIGA CR DEFINED AS NENEA NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT IN ACT AMPLIFIER 4 SIGA CR DEFINED AS RISER 2 NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT OUT PRE AMP AMP 4 OUT4 OUT IN MI zr ATP2 ACT l Wiring Notes ZN Supervised A Power Limited A Not Power Limited 3ATPINT5 CDR 4 23 Centralized audio applications SIGA CT1 or CT2 INPUT MODULES Personality Code 3 DEFINED AS MONITOR
110. AUX_INPUT_ADJ switch This places the coder s supervisory tone onto the Auxiliary channel The supervisory tone occurs approximately every 5 seconds 7 Adjust the 3 ASU s auxiliary input gain pot until the RMS meter displays the amplifier s configured output level 22 28 5 50 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Vrms or 65 75 Vrms Turning the pot clockwise increases the gain while counter clockwise decreases the gain 8 Press the AUX INPUT ADJ switch a second time to restore the input 9 Reconnect the coded tone output of the CDR 3 back through the duration relay 10 Reconnect the field wiring to the remaining amplifier modules EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 51 Installation CPU Note Connect 3 ASU output to AUDIO A OUT for single cabinet 3 PSMON applications TB2 AUXILIARY POWER NETWORK AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO R c R C 1 2 OUT IN AIN AOUT BIN BOUT T A B B X 5 MIX 5 M zl _ li cli elt li 3513 112 2 2 2
111. As a general guideline 1096 of the quantity installed or a minimum of 1 each of the following installed equipment should be available as spare e Power supply e Local rail modules Amplifiers if no backup installed in system Printer ribbon As a general guideline 1096 of the quantity installed or a minimum of 3 each of the following installed equipment should be available as spare Monitor modules Control modules Heat detectors Ionization smoke detectors Photoelectric smoke detectors Base detector Duct detector filter kits e Breakglass replacement for pull stations Breakglass replacement for warden stations Horn bell strobe and speaker System batteries should be replaced at recommended intervals Stocking of spare batteries is not recommended because of shelf life limitations EST3 Installation and Service Manual Hardware problems Service and troubleshooting Identification Hardware problems are typically identified by an intermittent or total failure of a device Isolation Hardware problems may be categorized as problems within an equipment cabinet and problems with field wiring and devices The quickest way to locate a hardware problem 15 by selectively isolating portions of the system and observing the results of the isolation By selectively isolating smaller and smaller portions of the system hardware faults can usually be isolated The suspect component may then be
112. B3250 is rated at 250 watts output Both amplifiers operate from 120 Vac 50 60 Hz as well as 24 battery backup The amplifiers are mounted in an Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet Note The Model 1B3250 amplifier should be loaded to no more than 7296 of rated capacity The amp is derated by 28 to allow for continuous operation and line loss averages LJ D DUKANE Two Fifty Figure 4 4 Dukane 250 watt Amplifier Front View Table 4 2 1B3125 Amplifier specifications Rated output power Max signal input Input impedance Output voltage Primary power Battery power AC power consumption standby full load DC power consumption standby full load Dimensions HWD Weight 125 W 1 Vrms 75 25 or 70 Vrms 120 Vac 60 Hz 24 Vdc 27 W 360 W 0 W when using the ATP 11 5A 5 25 x 19 0 x 6 625 in 13 3 x 48 3 x 16 8 cm 22 5 Ib 10 1 kg Table 4 3 1B3 250 Amplifier specifications Rated output power Max signal input Input impedance 250 W 180 W max loaded 1 Vrms 75 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications Table 4 3 1B3 250 Amplifier specifications Output voltage 25 or 70 Vrms Primary power 120 Vac 60 Hz Battery power 24 Vdc AC power consumption standby 48 W full load 700 W DC power consumption standby 0 W when using the ATP full load 20A Dimensions HWD 8 5x 19x 15 in 21 6 x 48 3 x 38 1 cm Weight 55 Ib 24 9 kg EST3 Installat
113. CD module in the cabinet 1 31 System overview 1 32 Cabinets 3 and 4 receive their change of state information from all cabinets on the network as indicated in the cabinet state column This is necessary as cabinets 3 and 4 are part of both domains Again there is no need to send reset alarm silence trouble silence drill and acknowledgment information to other cabinets from cabinets 3 and 4 The Cabinet 5 entry under the Cabinet State column indicates that Cabinet 5 receives its change of state information from cabinets 3 4 5 and 6 Cabinet 6 information indicates that Cabinet 6 should receive from cabinets 3 4 5 and 6 all information about changes of state Because cabinet 6 is the location of the operator controls it should send information about reset alarm silence trouble silence drill and acknowledgments to cabinets 3 4 5 and 6 all the cabinets in the domain In this example the drill command is common to both systems Note that the drill command is also sent to cabinets 1 and 2 by Cabinet 6 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Audio applications System overview Amplifier selection The EST3 system provides amplifiers with 20 40 and 95 watt output ratings to meet any project requirement Selection of the proper amplifiers requires an understanding of the amplifier characteristics and application related information that follows Audio zoning The output of each amplifier usually covers a s
114. DC8 4 devices must be configured as a security zone in the SDU Hard Zone Type SECURITY EST3 Installation and Service Manual Listing requirements Signature modules must be configured as security devices in 3 SDU Device Type Active Latching gt Security IDC8 4 devices must be configured so Routing Label and Alternate Routing Label are set to No Cabinets that is the holdup event messages must not be displayed on any panel or other annunciator device The system must be programmed so that all local outputs are suppressed SIGA CTI SIGA CT2 and SIGA UM module loops used for holdup must be configured so Routing Label and Alternate Routing Label are set to No Cabinets that 15 the holdup event messages must not be displayed on any panel or other annunciator device The central monitoring station or FireWorks workstation must manned on a 24 hour basis The following material is extracted from UL 636 Section 86 It applies to Holdup alarm applications 86 Types of Remote Stations 86 1 A holdup alarm signal shall be transmitted to one of the following remote stations a Direct to a constantly manned police department equipped for broadcasting radio calls to cruising squad cars or to a central station or residential monitoring station with facilities for relaying calls to a police department with such broadcasting facilities The central station shall comply with the Standard for Central Station Burglar A
115. DEVICE TYPE 1 FAIL AMP2 FAIL AMP3 FAIL FAILN MODULES REPORT RISER TROUBLE TO NETWORK CONTROLLER Tr RKU SERIES ENCLOSURE RELAY ACTIVATES PREAMP OUT IN AMP 1 FAILURE AMP1 BKUP AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER 1 AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER 2 SIGA CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT SIGA CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT RELAY ACTIVATES ON AMP 2 FAILURE m AMP2 BKUP RELAY ACTIVATES ON AMP 3 FAILURE AMP3 BKUP PRE AMP OUT IN AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER 3 AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER 4 4 SIGA CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT APs 24VDC ATP2 ACT ARA 1 RELAY BACKUP RISER RELAY ACTIVATES ON AMP 4 FAILURE AMPA BKUP SIGA CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT PRE AMP OUT IN AUDIO POWER SPARE AMP SIGA CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT 96 2 Wiring Notes ATP3 ACT RELAY ACTIVATES IF ZN supervised AMP 2 OR AMP 4 FAILS A Power Limited Anot Power Limited AMP24 BKUP l M 3ATPINT4 CDR FROM 3 ZAxx 1 FROM 3 ZAxx 2 A AMPl PRI AMP2 PRI Figure 4 15 One spare amplifier in dual channel system 4 24 EST3 Installation and Service Manual
116. Diagnostics Utility requires that you connect an external modem to a CPU equipped with a 3 RS232 option card Some applications may require that the modem be permanently mounted The following is a suggested method for mounting a modem connected to the CPU First you will need to obtain the following parts e accessory enclosure SIGA MPI mounting plate 2cableties long enough to go around the modem and through the slots on the SIGA MP1 To mount the modem 1 Mount the MFCA enclosure back box at an acceptable location within reach of the panel Refer to Figure 5 12 2 Secure the modem to the SIGA MPI with the 2 cable ties 3 Screw the SIGA MPI to the MFCA enclosure back box 4 Connect all modem wiring Refer to the technical documentation that came with the modem for wiring connections RS 232 wiring must maintain a 1 4 in minimum separation between nonpower limited wiring 5 Screw the MFCA cover to the back box 6 Attach the modem RS 232 wires to the CPU serial port terminals The serial port must be configured for Remote Diagnostics in the project database See below R R C T X X S M 1 1 1 1 X X 2 2 ooooooooQ DB 25 male connector rear view to modem RS 232 connector EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 53 Installation SIGA MP1 mounting plate Slotted pan head screw 6 32X3 8 Lock washer 6
117. EST3 Installation and Service Manual P N 270380 Rev 7 0 105 7 DEVELOPED BY COPYRIGHT NOTICE TRADEMARKS GE Security Inc 8985 Town Center Parkway Bradenton FL 34202 941 739 4300 Copyright 2007 GE Security Inc This manual is copyrighted by GE Security Inc GE Security You may not reproduce translate transcribe or transmit any part of this manual without express written permission from GE Security This manual contains proprietary information intended for distribution to authorized persons or companies for the sole purpose of conducting business with GE Security Unauthorized distrib ution of the information contained in this manual may violate the terms of the distribution agreement Microsoft Microsoft Mouse Microsoft Windows Microsoft Word and Microsoft Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Content Document history iv Important information v About this manual ix The EST3 library xi Related documentation xii System overview 1 1 System description 1 2 Audio subsystem description 1 6 Digital network subsystem 1 16 Foreign language support 1 22 Signature series devices 1 26 Network applications 1 29 Audio applications 1 33 Firefighter phone system 1 42 Security applications 2 1 Security equipment 2 2 Certificate installatio
118. Energize AC power 3 PPS M 230 Power Supply and the 3 BPS M 230 Booster Power Supplies Connect batteries to the 3 PPS M 230 Power Supply and the 3 BPS M 230 Booster Power Supplies While the CPU s microprocessor is initializing the LCD displays status messages Connect the download cable assembly between the SDU computer and CPU connector J5 Using the SDU download the CPU database into the panel controller Refer to the next topic Runtime and system errors should error messages be displayed on the LCD module If an Audio Source Unit is part of the system its database must be downloaded in addition to the CPU database For best download performance we suggest you connect directly to the 3 ASU FT module and download its database in single step mode Clear up any network communications faults between cabinets If any Signature controller modules are installed as part of the system their individual databases must be downloaded in addition to the CPU database You will need to restart the network for these changes to be effective Correct all the circuit faults Test the system as described in the next section Note Remember that for a network system you ll need to make the initial download to each CPU separately to establish the correct cabinet numbers After the initial download all further downloads can be made from a single panel via the network EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 3 Power
119. F ft EST3 Installation and Service Manual System calculations Signature data circuit wire length Circuit resistance and capacitance determines the maximum length of a Signature data circuit Circuit resistance affects the wire length of the longest circuit branch Circuit capacitance affects the total amount of wire that can be used on the circuit Notes The design of the Signature data circuit must not exceed either of the two measurements There are no restrictions placed on the wiring used for the Signature data circuit Longer wire runs may be obtained using standard non twisted non shielded wire pairs Determining the maximum allowable branch length The maximum branch length is the wire distance measured from the Signature controller module to the last device on the longest circuit path as shown below Signature Controller Module WIRECALC2 CDR Several factors influence the maximum allowable branch length Wire gauge and type Number of Signature detectors and modules installed on the branch Number of SIGA UMs configured for 2 wire smoke detectors installed on the branch Table B 1 through Table B 3 provide the maximum allowable branch length for any detector module SIGA UM and wire gauge combination Using the wire distances specified in the tables ensures that the circuit does not exceed the maximum circuit resistance of the Signature data circuit EST3 Installation and Service Manual B
120. FPA 70 article 760 of the National Electrical Code Verify that the installed batteries are the proper capacity for the application With the batteries disconnected verify that the supply s full alarm load can be sustained by the power supply without the batteries connected With the batteries connected disconnect the AC source and verify that a power supply trouble is annunciated and that the supply s full alarm load can be sustained by the batteries Verify that the battery charger properly charges the batteries connected to both the primary and booster power supplies to 8096 capacity within 24 hours Booster power supplies l Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards Verify adequate separation between power limited and nonpower limited wiring Verify that the installed batteries are the proper capacity for the application With the batteries disconnected verify that the supply s full alarm load can be sustained by the power supply without the batteries connected With the batteries connected disconnect the AC source and verify that a power supply trouble is annunciated and that the supply s full alarm load can be sustained by the batteries EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 7 Power up and testing 6 8 CPU with LCD module 1 Verify the module is properly seated in all four rail connectors and secured with the four snap rivets Verify that removable termin
121. IGA MD Motion Detector SIGA SEC2 Security Loop Module Additional requirements Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 Listing requirements C 6 System must be programmed for a minimum of 15 minutes bell ring on alarm System must be programmed to indicate bell timeout with an LED System power supply bell power supply 24DC12 and bell monitoring module IDC8 4 must all be inside the ATCK Attack Kit protected cabinet System must be programmed to transmit opening and closing messages to the central monitoring station System must be configured using two phone lines with line cut detection or a single line with 24 hour test System must be programmed to provide closing confirmation ring back at the arming station Central station Grade C Standard UL 1610 Minimum hardware 3 RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch Central Processor Unit CPU 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply Main LCD Display LCD or KPDISP Keypad Display 3 MODCOM Modem Communication Module 3 SAC Security Access Module Signature Controller Modules SIGA MD Motion Detector SIGA SEC2 Security Loop Module Additional requirements Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds System must be progr
122. INT terminal connections 4 15 3 ATPINT jumper settings 4 16 ATP external battery charger 4 20 Amplifier backup 4 22 Branch speaker wiring 4 25 Troubleshooting 4 27 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 4 1 Centralized audio applications Equipment required 4 2 The EST3 system requires one 3 ZA20 amplifier for each audio channel to be operated simultaneously The output of each amplifier is reduced from 25 Vrms to the appropriate input level 1 Vrms using the 3 ATPINT interface and then fed into the input of the banked amplifiers The wiring between the output of each 3 ZA20 and its associated amplifier bank input should be twisted shielded pair and can be configured for Class A or Class B integrity monitoring The output of the banked amplifiers the audio riser is directed to the appropriate areas using Signature Series modules The SIGA CC1 module Figure 4 16 is used for single channel systems and the SIGA CC2 module Figure 4 17 is used for two channel systems EST3 audio system programming requires that the Signature modules controlling the audio signals be programmed in addition to the programming required for the 3 ZAxx amplifier s supplying the audio signal Note Remember to follow power limited or nonpower limited wiring practices as determined by the amplifier providing the audio signal EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications ATPC Amplifier Terminal Panel Ca
123. ISP modules can execute fire system commands Typically this privilege is reserved for the site owner or site security staff Refer to the SDU Online Help for more information KDC operation Each company owner must import the resource profile output from the RPM After importing this resource data each company EST3 Installation and Service Manual Security applications owner can create his portion of the security database according to the instructions included with the KDC program Changes to the tenant portion of the security database can be made at any time and from any location Note Fire and security functionality cannot be programmed into a control panel from a remote location You must perform all panel programming on site Changes to the security database have no impact on the parameters or operations of listed fire system equipment EST3 Installation and Service Manual 2 19 Security applications Secure access Description of the application Secure access is a simplified type of security application Typical secure access applications are operated from a secured control panel and use partitions with no entry or exit delay timers Secure access applications often use the control panel LCD module or dedicated Control LED display modules to control the security partitions Partitions can be armed or disarmed using any of the following LCD menus EST3 Control LED modules FireWorks interface
124. LE CABINET TER 2 CHASSIS CABINET A 3 CHASSIS CABINET aay At Ripa _ 3MODNUM CDR BATTERIES BELOW Figure 5 7 Local rail module slot identification A 3 ASU Audio Source Unit occupies the first three slots on its chassis and is identified using the lowest slot number of the three When a Firefighters Telephone Control Unit is supplied as part of the 3 ASU FT the telephone control unit occupies the last four slots on the chassis and is identified as the fourth slot number 11 or 18 on the chassis Connect the DC power cable P N 250187 to connector P2 on the power supply For the 3 PPS Primary Power Supply connect the 16 pin data ribbon cable P N 250188 Booster P N 250189 to connector P3 on the power supply For 3 BPS EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Booster Power Supplies connect a 14 pin data ribbon cable P N 250189 to connector P3 on the power supply Route both cables up through the rails for later connection to the power supply booster monitor module Install any local rail module option cards required by your application Option cards should be firmly seated in their connectors and then secured to the rail module by pressing the snap rivet faste
125. LJ LJ LJ N e ANZ Q Oo Q a a Q ZONE1 Temporal horn strobe Temporal and G1M module horn strobe Normal Active JP1 JP2 ME 1 1 8 10 EOLR jd 08 3 3 3 10 kQ EOLR ZONE 2 Temporal horn strobe Temporal and G1M module horn strobe 1 1 Normal Active 2 2 Q Pe 3 10 JP4 T EOLR oll 10 kQ EOLR 5 O x lt 8 lt gt z z a 24 ra 109 87654232 1 NAC 5 999999 Device type Visible Label Zone 2 Strobes NAC 6 Device type Audible Label Zone 2 Horns Figure 5 1 Typical 3 IDC8 4 card NAC wiring EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 9 Installation Figure 5 2 shows a Signature circuit wired as Class A and using isolation modules or bases for each IDC and NAC Sync Temporal module horn strobe Notification zone 1 IM IPHS CC1 CR 270 IPHS yf fa G SIGA B MT W Sa ET w RA _ Isolater SIGAA SA base Sync Temporal module horn strobe Notification B zone 2 8 Class A amp required IPHS CC1 CR 270 IPHS AUX riser pod Figure 5 2 Signature wiring for notification circuit signal synchronization 5 10 Figure 5 3 Shows two NACs on a Signature data cir
126. LPC Diagnostics Click Here to Select SDC Circuit Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card Click Here to Select Cabinet B DSDC Diagnostics Cabinet LPC Card Loop BLDG1 LEVEL3 SIG CIRCUIT 1 1 Message Counters Tab i Mapping Errors Device Chains H Trouble Tables Message Total Messages Sent Incorrect Message Count Percentage of Valid Messages Total cnt TSCRN3 CDR Figure 8 19 Message counters dialog box The message command appears in the left column followed by the number of times it has been issued the number of errors received after the message was issued and the percentage of correct responses During normal operation the percentage of messages received correctly should exceed 99 Intermittent device or wiring problems are indicated by a low successful message rate If successful message rates are tracked over time one can generate base line information for each circuit From the base line information any changes from the norm can be quickly identified and preventive measures taken before a communication problem develops Table 8 36 lists the messages sent and received by the Signature driver controller module Table 8 36 Signature controller module Internal Messages Query End Of Line Query Relay Status Find New Start Query Isolator Ground Fault Check Find New Active Query Status Query Device Mask Find New Unused2 Pulse Visible LED Query Group Mask Find New Unused3 Quer
127. N ejosJ X104 0727 4 eqos uJou pue JEULON eqoujs uJou jesodway ajnpow jeuBis ejBuis Figure 5 4 Typical SIGA CC1 NAC wiring 5 13 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation 5 14 Figure 5 5 shows an auxiliary booster power supply being used to power the NAC to provide synchronization and to provide horn silence capability Because the auxiliary booster supply has the ability to silence the horn circuit this application can be created using only the Signature loop wiring The SIGA CT1 module monitors the power supply for AC failure The SIGA CR module signals the power supply to turn the horns on or off The SIGA CCI module signals the power supply when the system goes into alarm turning the NAC on Note that the power supply can only synchronize the notification appliances to which it is connected If you need to synchronize several similar NACs on the same Signature loop you can use a SIGA CCIS module in place of the SIGA CCI EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation 99 9P ejeq yxou oL ino 5880415 9 SNMHH Z IXeL AlddNS 31084 Jasny c 9 dISIA ed A
128. N A Defective microphone or connections Phone page switch has been activated for a period which exceeds the time limit set via SDU program Mismatch between 3 ASUMX specified via SDU program and that installed in the 3 ASU 8 29 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 20 Local trouble pseudo points Address Label Source Description 0655 RAM Diagnostic Failure 3 ASU Memory failure in 3 ASU 0656 Audio Default Failure 3 ASU 1 3 ASUMX memory card missing 2 Audio database does not exist 0658 Audio Interface Failure 3 ASU 3 ASU hardware fault 0659 Audio Class Supervision 3 ASU One riser open or shorted 0670 In Bootloader 3 AADC1 PC connected to card attempting download 0670 In Bootloader 3 DSDC PC connected to card attempting 3 SSDC1 download 3 SDDC1 0671 Line Opened or Shorted 3 AADC1 Wiring Fault 0671 Line Opened or Shorted Data 3 DSDC Wiring Fault Card 1 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 0672 Map Fault Data Card 1 3 DSDC 1 Mismatch between actual data and 3 SSDC1 expected data 3 SDDC1 2 Defective wiring 3 Defective device 0677 Grnd Fault 3 AADC1 Wiring Fault 0677 Grnd Fault Data Card 1 3 DSDC Wiring Fault 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 0678 Reconstct Line 3 AADC1 N A 0679 Smoke Power Current Limit 3 AADC1 N A 0679 Smoke Power Current Limit 3 DSDC N A Card 1 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 0680 Internal Failure 3 LDSM N A 0681 Line Opened or Shorted Data 3 DSDC Wiring Fault Card 2 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 0682 Map Fault Data Card 2 3 DSDC 1 Mismatch between actual data and
129. N OFF 600 bps ON ON OFF 1200 bps OFF OFF ON 2400 bps ON OFF ON 4800 bps OFF ON ON 9600 bps ON ON ON 19200 bps ON DSR active OFF DSR inactive 5 47 Installation Switch SW2 factory settings located on serial board Switch Factory Setting Description SW2 5 ON ON 32 byte buffer threshold OFF 256 byte buffer threshold SW2 6 ON ON 200ms busy signal OFF 1s busy signal SW1 7 OFF ON Space after power on OFF Space after printer select SW1 8 OFF not used System printer power supply If your PT 1S system printer is required to operate during a brownout or AC power failure install an uninterruptible power supply per Figure 5 10 UPS Trouble Contact Monitor To 120 VAC 15 Amp Circuit U L 1481 listed UPS Signature Module To 3 CPUI 7 Uninterruptible Power Supply Run Time 174 minutes 20 PT1S Serial Printer Figure 5 10 Printer uninterruptible power supply wiring 5 48 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Adjusting amplifier output levels What you will need An initial startup version of the project database that contains a 1kHz tone and a switch programmed to turn the tone on See Creating an initial startup version of the project database An RMS voltmeter Fluke 83 or equivalent Adjustment procedure 1 Disconnect the field wiring to all the zoned amplifier modules in the cabinet 2 Place an RMS meter across an amplifier
130. NOTICE TO USERS INSTALLERS AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES This product incorporates field programmable software In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems UL 864 certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below Programmable feature or option Enable Supervision telephone line is supervised for ground faults a single open line or a wire to wire fault DACT Settings Line 2 Installed single line or dual line dialer Trouble Resound panel resound AC Power Delay vi Permitted Possible settings Settings permitted in in UL 864 UL 864 YIN Y No Yes Yes Y No Yes Yes Y Disabled 0 Disabled 2 1 second to 99 hours 01024 hours Y Disabled 1 to 3 hours 1 minute to 45 hours EST3 Installation and Service Manual Programmable feature or option Event message routing Event message display filtering Alarm Supervisory and Trouble options Delays programmed in rules CMS event reporting priority programmed in rules CMS activate and restore messages programmed in rules 4 state alarm IDC Alarm zone group members AND group members AND group device activation count Permitted in UL 864 lt Y EST3 Installation and Service Manual Possible settings All Cabinets No Cabinets
131. NT Interface is installed Route all preamp wiring to the 3 ATPINT The following terminals are provided on the ATP for audio channel 1 and channel 2 PREAMP IN Not used Refer to 3 ATPINT terminal connections PREAMP OUT Not used Refer to 3 ATPINT terminal connections PREAMP OUT Not used Refer to 3 ATPINT terminal connections AMP IN From the 70 V or the 25 V output of the power amplifier AMP OUT to be connected to the Signature Series control modules and terminated with a URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module The URSM must be monitored by a Signature Series input module configured as a supervisory circuit Each riser cannot supply a load greater than 180 W ATP jumper settings Refer to Figure 4 9 Table 4 5 3 ATP Jumper Settings Function Jumper Setting Ground fault detection J1 enable No ground fault detection J1 disable Internal battery charger operable J2 in Internal battery charger disabled J3 in 3 ATPINT terminal connections Refer to Figure 4 9 IN RISER To audio source amplifier 25 or 70 Vrms output or previous 3 ATPINT riser output OUT RISER 25 or 70 Vrms output to next 3 ATPINT IN RISER or EOL resistor EST3 Installation and Service Manual 4 15 Centralized audio applications 4 16 OUT PRE AMP Low level audio to audio power amplifier input 3 ATPINT jumper settings Refer to Figure 4 9 Table 4 6 3 ATPINT jumper settings Input Voltage Pre Amp 1 70 Vrm
132. ON SSH LO o H Lo o Hle Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 01360152 01370012 SYS_ADDR_EX1 CDR Figure A 1 Addressing example EST3 Installation and Service Manual A 3 System addresses LRM addresses 4 Figure A 2 Figure A 3 and Figure A 4 show the logical addresses that the system assigns to LRMs based on the panel configurations Figure A 5 shows the effect of using a wide LCD module such as the 3 LCDXL1 Main LCD Display EST3 Installation and Service Manual System addresses PPO1 2 4 5 o 59555655 Rail 1 Available in 1 2 and 3 rail cabinets PP32 PP33 PP34 PP35 PP36 7 PP07 lel gt 5 o H c Rail 2 Available in BL 2 and 3 rail B oo cabinets c BCJ gt 2 Lf al PPO8 PPO9 10 PP11 PP12 PP13 14 Rail 3 Available only in 3 rail cabinets PP40 PP41 PP42 PP43 PP44 PP45 PP46 LRM ADDR 01 CDR Figure 2 LRM addresses for 3 CHAS7 3 ASU FT 3 CHAS7 configuration EST3 Installation and Service Manual A 5 System addresses PPO1 2 PP04 5 Rail 1 Avail
133. OO Lesues QN ewo 1 T Y EWON Yl xw QD 002 JON v 5 Jejsooqj ueipxny Figure 5 5 Using an auxiliary booster supply to provide horn silence capability with two wires 5 15 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Creating an initial startup version of the project database Creating an initial startup version of the project database is useful for Assigning panel addresses when you bring up a system for the first time e Verifying the correct installation of the rail modules and control display modules Adjusting the gain on the 3 ASU and amplifier modules installed in a cabinet Follow these suggestions when creating an initial startup version of the project database Only include the hardware configuration for each cabinet in the system Do not include any device loops in the database These should be installed after verifying the cabinet configuration It is also not necessary to configure any rail modules The easiest way to create an initial startup version of the project database is to save the project under a different name using the Save As command Save the project as a different version after you have defined the cabinet chassis configuration and added all the rail modules for all the cabinets in the system Using this method eliminates doubling your workload by having to edit two databases as you add cabinets to the system If the cabinet con
134. RC executable program corrupt CRC database corrupt CRC lost communication with 3 SAC Input device on loop 1 activated Input device on loop 2 activated Changes to the active state when a task fails to execute properly Database download from the SDU is in progress or was incomplete Activate the strike device for a specified interval Activate the strike device Activate the CRC relay for a specified interval EST3 Installation and Service Manual Table 8 23 CRC pseudo points Address Label 5535 5536 Inside Reader Disable 5537 Outside Reader Disable 5538 Sounder Event type Access output Access output Access output Access trouble Service and troubleshooting Description Activate the CRC relay Disable the inside card reader device for load shedding Disable the outside card reader device for load shedding CRC sounder base trouble SS represents the CRC device number as configured in the SDU Table 8 24 KPDISP pseudo points Address Label SS06 RAM Fault or Stack Fault SS07 Code Supervision SS08 Database Supervision 5509 Communications Fault 5512 Task Supervision 5513 Waiting for Download SS14 User Record Supervision 5515 Controller Communication Fault 5516 Panel Communication Fault 5532 Entry Buzzer SS33 Exit Buzzer Event type Local trouble Local trouble Local trouble Local trouble Local trouble Local troubl
135. ST3 system permits any number of phones to be wired on a single phone circuit as long as they are not all used simultaneously There are a number of different designs which can be used to insure that no more than five phones are active at any one time One phone per circuit The advantages of installing a single firefighter phone station or jack on a SIGA CC1 Signature module personality code 6 are numerous The system provides complete control and annunciation phone circuit Installing a single phone on a circuit permits the operator to immediately identify the exact location of the calling party Because the 3 FTCU will only permit five circuits to be connected simultaneously the maximum number of off hook handsets can never be exceeded Should a branch telephone circuit be damaged during a fire the fault will not affect other phone circuits When there is only one phone per circuit troubleshooting of faults is simplified The largest disadvantage of installing one phone per branch telephone circuit is cost Each phone location requires a separate SIGA CC1 module EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Typical branch telephone circuit UL ULC Listed 47 EOLR Class B E TB3 Ceco 109 SIGA CC1 with personality code 6 8765 4321 TB2
136. Select COM port here Select baud rate here Select data circuit from list displayed here Select controller from list displayed here qq DSDC Status Cabinet DSDC Card Loop Com Port R Select cabinet from EMME gt list displayed here Internal Fault Balanced Map Data Checksum Trouble Programming Mode Code Checksum Trouble RAM Fault Data Card Fault Stack Fault Line Fault 2 Map Pending Map Fault Dev New Starts In Progress Data sheet displays 31 separate Mapping In Progress Stand Alone parameters on selected controller 7 Map Disabled Stand Alone Alarm card A lit LED indicates trouble Dirty Device Data Card Ground Fault Unprogrammed Device Alarm Device Ground Fault Ground Fault Delta Suspended Line Intialization System Reset Annunciator Fault Data Card Startup Fault Bootloader Mode Smoke Power Fault Data Card Communication Fault Unprogrammed Device Trouble Data Card Internal Fault Start Status 8 Disable Mapping Close Waiting to Establish C mmunications E Enable Mapping Click here to start receiving status information LPCSTAT1 CDR Click here to reinitialize the selected controller card Click here to disable mapping on the selected controller card Select display refresh rate here Click here to enable mapping on the selected controller card Figure 8 22 DSDC Status dialog box Table 8 39 Current status parameters Indicator
137. Supply e 3 IDC8 4 or 3 SSDC 1 or 3 SDDC 1 with SIGA CT1 SIGA CT2 or SIGA UM 3 RS485A 3 RS485B or 3 RS485R Additional requirements EST3 Installation and Service Manual C 7 Listing requirements C 8 e Grade AA is for stand alone or networked EST3 systems only Access control Standard UL 294 Minimum hardware e Central Processor Unit CPU 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply e Main LCD Display LCD e 3 SAC Security Access Module CRCorCRCXM Card Reader Controller Note The CRC or CRCXM Card Reader Controller is fully functional and does not require a supportive PC for access decisions Refer to the CRC and CRCXM Card Reader Controller Installation Sheet Holdup alarm Standard UL 636 Minimum hardware 3 RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet e ATCK Attack Kit 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch e Central Processor Unit CPU 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply Main LCD Display LCD 3 MODCOM Modem Communication Module or FireWorks 3 IDC8 4 Traditional Zone I O Module or Signature Controller Module plus SIGA CT1 SIGA CT2 or SIGA UM module Listed compatible holdup IDC devices Additional requirements e Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds e Systems using a 3 MODCOM must be configured using two phone lines with line cut detection or a single line with 24 hour test
138. System continues to re map data circuit Device Type Error 8 48 Possible causes 1 gt BON A discrepancy between the internal map and the devices installed on the Data Circuit serial personality code or device type Device ID entered incorrectly into SDU database More than 124 T taps on a data circuit Excessive circuit resistance Excessive circuit capacitance An intermittent connection causing one or more devices to loose then re establish communication with the Signature controller module A defective device or detector base There is a discrepancy between the device type recorded on the internal map and the device installed on the Data Circuit EST3 Installation and Service Manual Device troubleshooting Service and troubleshooting Each Signature series device has a red and green LED Their functions are indicated in Table 8 31 These LEDs are useful when trying to determine the communication and alarm or active status of Signature devices Table 8 31 Signature device LEDs LED Green flashing Red flashing Red and Green steady Device status Normal communication Alarm or Active either input of dual input modules Stand alone Alarm or Active either input of dual input modules Table 8 32 lists common troubles and possible causes for Signature Series modules For detailed information on identifying and locating Signature device problems refer to the Signature Diagnostic Tools Secti
139. T TERMINATE THE WIRES AT THE BATTERY AT THIS TIME WARNING Do not connect batteries until instructed to do so EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation CONTROLPANEL TI CABINET 3 PPS 230 SERES 3 BPS 230 zr c S SS SU I I TIN P N 46097 0110 BATTERY BATTERY 1 2 3BCIN1 CDR Figure 5 8 Remote battery cabinet wiring Note A minimum of a 10Ah battery must be used in all systems applications EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 43 Installation Connecting auxiliary booster power supplies UL requires that you monitor secondary power sources for loss of AC power Upon loss of AC power the control panel must provide an audible and visible trouble signal In addition remote station central station and proprietary type protected premises units must transmit a trouble signal off premises after a one to three hour delay To meet UL requirements you need to connect a SIGA CC1 or SIGA CCIS and a SIGA CTI to the booster supply The SIGA is used to activate the booster supply and to signal common troubles The SIGA CT1 is used to signal booster supply power failures Installation Mount the SIGA CCI and SIGA CT1 inside the booster supply as described in the booster supply s technical documentation and wire them as shown in Figure 32 Configuration Booster supply Set SW2 6 to ON This configures the booster supply s Trouble rel
140. The end user must subscribe to a TAP compatible alphanumeric paging service Depending on the paging service provider the TAP message can be broadcast via radio to a pager converted to an e mail or faxed to an end user The module is supplied with two seven foot cables P N 360137 for connecting the 3 MODCOMP to an RJ 31 jack You must obtain the RJ 31X jack locally and wire it to the telephone lines as indicated on the 3 MODCOM installation sheet RJ 31X jack telephone company jack An RJ 31X jack must be used to connect each line of the 3 MODCOM to the switched telephone network One jack is required for each telephone line The jack 1s an eight position jack with a special jumper between terminals 1 and 4 and 5 and 8 This jumper is in effect when the plug is removed from the jack Removing the plug re establishes connection to the premises telephones Inserting the plug opens the jumper and connects the 3 MODCOM which provides a series connection to the telephones Refer to the 3 MODCOM installation sheet for a diagram of the jack wiring Note Failure to use an RJ 31X jack violates FCC and NFPA regulations telephone connected directly to the incoming telephone line without the proper use of the RJ 31X jack will cause a telephone company trouble when used and possibly prevent the dialer from getting through to the CMS receiver in an emergency Configuration options 3 MODCOM and 3 can be configured
141. U and the actual hardware installation The most common cause for this error is typically due to the installation of a local rail module in the wrong rail position Another common cause is the installation of the wrong type module in the rail Misidentification of an entire cabinet can also cause this type of error A third source of download error can occur after the cabinets have been initially downloaded After the initial downloads all subsequent downloads can be done using the network data circuit The third type of error is primarily caused by communications problems between cabinets EST3 Installation and Service Manual Table 6 1 Download errors Error message Unable to perform operation Busy signal Password Invalid Size parameter trouble Storage media trouble Checksum error in packet Device type error Parcel Inaccessible panel Session in progress Write protect Erase program trouble Block number Version mismatch Power up and testing Possible cause General error Restart CPU System currently busy Wait then retry Incorrect or invalid password entered Check download connections and SDU settings then retry Problem with memory components Swap module and retry Check download connections and SDU settings then retry Conflict between SDU download setting and connected device type Check download connections and SDU settings then retry SDU program can not see the panel Check network wiring System is
142. Y514UH 994 60993 Shielded 218 14 1 1STP 1762 14 1 2J 9581 83752 231402 NY514SH 995 60992 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 16 1 00 mm Twisted Pair Unshielded 218 16 1 1STP 1761 16 1 2J 9572 341602 NY516UH 990 60991 Shielded 218 16 1 1STP 1762 16 1 2J 9575 241602 351602 NY516SH 991 60990 18 0 75 mm Twisted Pair Unshielded 218 18 1 1TP 1761 18 1 2J 9571 341802 NY518UH D9780 60980 Shielded 218 18 1 1STP 1762 18 1 2J 9574 241802 351802 NY518SH D975 60975 5 5 Installation UL 864 NAC signal synchronization Requirements Table 5 2 lists the installation requirements for systems that must meet UL 864 NAC signal synchronization requirements Table 5 2 Installation requirements for UL 864 signal synchronization Circuit 3 ASU audio riser 3 AADC 1 3 IDC8 4 3 SSDC 1 3 SDDC 1 5 6 Installation requirements The 3 ASU audio subsystem uses a single signal source so audible NACs on the 3 ASU network audio riser are synchronized network wide Signals are synchronized for a NAC when you use a riser selection module a Genesis Signal Master synchronization module and Genesis or Enhanced Integrity notification appliances Separate NACs on the loop are not synchronized Configure the audible notification appliances for temporal or steady output as desired Signals are synchronized for a NAC when you use a Genesis Signal Master synchronization module an
143. a riser B 2 B 3 notification appliance circuits B 11 Signature data circuits B 5 wiring branch speaker circuit 4 25 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Index card readers 3 27 circuit common 3 8 3 23 3 44 3 46 DC power supplies 3 44 ground fault detection 3 8 3 44 3 46 remote power supplies 3 44 SAC bus 3 3 transformers 3 41 wiring problems 8 77 25 Index Z 6 EST3 Installation and Service Manual
144. able in 1 2 and 3 rail cabinets PP33 PP34 PP35 6 7 PPO7 8 PPO9 PP10 Rail 2 Available in 2 and 3 rail cabinets PP39 PP40 PP41 PP42 PP12 PP13 PP14 15 PP16 17 Rail 3 Available only in 3 rail cabinets LRM ADDR 02 CDR PP43 PP44 45 PP46 PP47 PP48 PP49 Figure 3 LRM addresses for 3 CHAS7 3 ASU CHASA 3 CHAS7 configuration A 6 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System addresses PPO1 2 4 5 1 Available in 1 2 and 3 rail cabinets E Ou OU OU OO PP32 PP33 PP34 PP35 PPO6 PPO7 PPO8 PPO9 PP10 11 Rail 2 Available in 2 and 3 rail cabinets PP38 PP39 PP40 PP41 PP42 PP43 PP44 PP13 14 PP15 PP16 17 18 19 Rail 3 Awailable only in 3 rail cabinets LRM_ADDR_03 CDR PP45 PP46 PP47 PP48 PP49 PP50 51 Figure A 4 LRM addresses for 3 CHAS7 3 57 3 CHAS7 configuration EST3 Installation and Service Manual System addresses PPO1 2 PP04 PPO05 Rail 1 Available in 1 2 and 3 rail cabinets PP32 PP35 PP36 PP37 Figure
145. al instructions when installing a panel as part of an EST3 system Refer to the installation sheets that came with the product for specific instructions The EST3 Installation Sheets book contains copies of the installation sheets 1 Install the equipment enclosure backbox at the required location and pull all the required conductors through the conduit into the backbox Verify the field wiring Refer to Table 5 3 Install the chassis assemblies that go into the panel Install the primary and booster power supplies RS OBS Install all rail modules and control display modules in their required locations 6 Apply power to the panel Refer to the topic Cabinet power up procedure in Chapter 6 7 Download an initial startup version of the CPU database and clear panel troubles See the topic Creating an initial startup version of the project database later in this chapter 8 Connect field wiring and clear any field wiring problems 9 Download the final applications program Refer to Chapter 6 Power up and testing 10 Disconnect the SDU from the panel 11 Verify proper operation Refer to the topic Detector input module and output module testing in Chapter 6 12 Fill out a Certificate of Completion for the system Example forms are included in Chapter 5 5 18 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Preliminary field wiring testing Table 5 3 Field wiring tests Circuit ty
146. al is primarily intended for certified installations and is mandatory for all fire alarm installations The 3 MODCOM sends messages in order of their priority Messages may include device and user ID information regarding events such as openings closings alarms and tamper or trouble events The module waits for acknowledgement that each message sent has been received Where necessary the 3 MODCOM can be configured to begin dialing without waiting for a dial tone This option is used in areas where the telephone line has an absent or erratic dial tone Failover operation You can create dynamic failover operation for 3 MODCOMs By dynamic failover we mean that in the event of a communication failure or device trouble the system switches from accounts on one 3 MODCOM to matching accounts on another 3 MODCOM Failover operation results in a system that is resistant to trouble arising from telephone lines 3 MODCOMs or the CPU module The operation can be limited to a single panel or can span two or more panels anywhere in a network In systems with a single 3 MODCOM you can include a second 3 MODCOM that acts as a redundant unit In systems with two or more 3 MODCOMs you can program the system so that the units back up each other while still handling their normal traffic Failover operates by enabling and disabling various accounts defined for the project On detection of a fault or trouble project EST3 Installation and Servic
147. al station Grade A Standard UL 1610 Minimum hardware 3 RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch Central Processor Unit CPU 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply Main LCD Display LCD EST3 Installation and Service Manual Listing requirements KPDISP Keypad Display FireWorks 2000 e 3 SAC Security Access Module e Signature Controller Modules SIGA MD Motion Detector SIGA SEC2 Security Loop Module Additional requirements System must be connected to a FireWorks 2000 workstation Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds System must be programmed to transmit opening and closing messages to the central monitoring station System must be programmed to provide closing confirmation ring back at the arming station Central station Grade B Standard UL 1610 Minimum hardware 3 RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch Central Processor Unit CPU 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply e Main LCD Display LCD or KPDISP Keypad Display 3 MODCOM Modem Communication Module e 3 SAC Security Access Module Signature Controller Module Listed Grade A bell and bell housing Ademco model AB12M Grade A Bell in Box e 24DC12 12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell Interface e 3 IDC8 4 Traditional Zone I O Module S
148. al strips and TB2 are firmly seated Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards Verify that the correct date and time are displayed on the LCD module s display and the Power LED is on Activate the lamp test and verify all lamps operated as follows Select the Command Menus button to obtain the Main Menu Screen Select Test to obtain the Test Menu screen then select Lamp Test Initiate a fire alarm and verify the following the alarm LED flashes the Alarm relay transfers the correct device message appears at the top of the LCD window the active point counter increments the event sequence indicates a 1 the active Alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates A001 the event type indicates fire alarm and the local panel buzzer sounds Press the Alarm Silence switch and verify that the required notification appliances are silenced and the Alarm Silence LED lights Press the Panel Silence switch to verify that the panel buzzer silences and the Panel Silence LED lights Press the Alarm queue switch and verify that the Alarm LED lights steady Press the Details switch and verify that the alarm device s message if any is displayed If a printer is connected to the CPU verify that all specified information appears on the printer 6Initiate a second fire alarm and verify that it appears at the bottom of the LCD window the active point counter changes the eve
149. aled directly using access numbers and area code where necessary without operator interception of the call e Multparty service a party line exists Operator assistance 15 required to complete a telephone call and a foreign exchange cannot be introduced Connection is not established within 38 seconds following completion of dialing The 3 MODCOM dialer circuit is compatible with any switched telephone network that employs direct dialing local and Direct Distance Dialing DDD without operator interception of the call Operator interception occurs in some areas where message billing is not completely automatic Where operator interception is involved you must obtain a foreign exchange FX connection must from the central station exchange to the exchange serving the customer The FX provides a local number for calling the central station without toll billing A WATS or ground start line connection must not be used for this purpose because the line cannot be supervised The 3 MODCOM includes a feature that prevents jamming by an incoming telephone call The feature is based on a telephone service option referred to as called party disconnect This option lets the receiver of a call disconnect by hanging up the telephone EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation for a period of time even if the caller stays on the line The time required for disconnect varies in different areas but 1s usually between 18 and 90 sec
150. ality Other factors Next we ll cover the additional factors listed on the drawing Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation These factors are called out on each application diagram given in this chapter Power supply The KPDISP is designed to operate on 24 Vdc For this reason we recommend that you include power from the panel with the SAC bus cable You can use the panel 3 PPS M 3 BPS M or 3 BBC M power supplies Note that additional power supplies must be listed for the application Hardware configuration The KPDISP does not have any switch or jumper settings configuration is done with the SDU program SDU programming While the KDC program controls a small portion of the security database all other definition configuration and programming for the security system happens in the SDU The SIGA MD and SIGA SEC2 are both treated as modules on the Signature data circuit You configure each security module using the SDU The SDU controls the general configuration of the 3 SAC modules plus the configuration of all CRC or KPDISP devices on the SAC busses KPDISP modules can be configured to execute a specific predefined command list when a specific security or access EST3 Installation and Service Manual Security applications control event occurs You write the command lists in the SDU and assign them to KPDISP events when you configure the KPDISP module
151. ality codes are transferred to the new module The panel will return to normal when mapping is finished 1 The system displays a trouble with the detector s label or address when the detector is removed 2 When the new detector is installed the Signature controller module re maps the circuit replacing the S N of the old detector with the S N of the new detector All the old detector s sensitivity and verification settings when applicable are transferred to the new detector The new detector will be operational however the panel will be in trouble indicating a device type mismatch The System Definition Utility program must be used to re assign the device type to get the system out of trouble EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 35 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 26 SDC operation Condition Remove a module or pull station then re install a different type module or pull station in the same location 8 36 Operation 1 The system displays a trouble at the device s label or address when the device is removed When the new device is installed the Signature controller module re maps the circuit replacing the S N of the old device with the S N of the new device The new module is NOT operational The panel will be in trouble indicating a device type mismatch System Definition Utility program must be used to re assign the device type to get the panel out of trouble If a single address module is replace
152. ame Description Possible causes Compatibility Fault Incorrect brand of device SIGA GSX or XLS brand devices installed replace device intermixed on circuit Problem solving hints Addressing faults Most addressing faults are quickly located because the wrong address gives a clue as to the fault location For example module 164 is duplicated while module 174 is missing The device at location 174 probably has its tens digit addressing switch off by one position Duplicate device faults are harder to locate e g the carpenter put up a partition hiding sensor 53 then the electrician noticed it was missing and spliced in a new base and now there are two sensors at address 53 To identify devices with duplicate addresses remove one of the suspected duplicate sensors The duplicate fault should clear within 30 seconds if the sensor removed is a duplicate Disconnect half of the circuit Allow a minute or so for the circuit to stabilize and the faults to report Upload the Ready Communication diagnostics table only The remaining duplicate sensor 53 should still appear as if it is physically connected between the circuit controller and the wiring break Continue to add or remove segments of the circuit in gradual increments repeating the diagnostics upload until the physical location of the problem detector is located Intermittent communication and wiring faults EST3 counts of the number of communications and errors associated wi
153. ammed to transmit opening and closing messages to the central monitoring station System must be configured using two phone lines with line cut detection or 3 RCC7 a single line with 24 hour test System must be programmed to provide closing confirmation ring back at the arming station EST3 Installation and Service Manual Listing requirements Proprietary Grade A Standard UL 1076 Minimum hardware e 3 RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch e Central Processor Unit CPU 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply e Main LCD Display LCD e KPDISPKeypad Display 3 MODCOM Modem Communication Module or FireWorks 3 SAC Security Access Module e Signature Controller Modules SIGA MD Motion Detector SIGA SEC2 Security Loop Module Additional requirements Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm e Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds e Systems using a 3 MODCOM must be configured using two phone lines with line cut detection or a single line with 24 hour test System must be programmed to provide closing confirmation ring back at the arming station Proprietary Grade AA Standard UL 1076 Minimum hardware 3 CABS 3 CAB7 3 CAB14 3 CAB21 3 RCC7 3 RCC14 or 3 RCC21 with 3 CHAS7 3 TAMP 3 TAMPS or 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch e Central Processor Unit CPU 3 PPS M Primary Power
154. an active Supervisory condition and verify that the Supervisory LED flashes the correct active Supervisory device message appears in the top and bottom windows of the LCD the local panel buzzer sounds the Supervisory relay transfers the active point counter changes the event EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 9 Power up and testing 6 10 13 14 sequence indicates a 1 the active Supervisory events counter at the bottom of the display indicates S001 and the event type indicates Supervisory Press the Supervisory queue switch and verify that the Supervisory LED lights steady Press the Panel Silence switch to verify the panel buzzer silences and the Panel Silenced LED lights Initiate a second active Supervisory condition and verify that the first Supervisory message remains at the top of the LCD window that the second Supervisory event message appears at the bottom of the display the active point counter changes the event sequence indicates a 2 the active Supervisory events counter at the bottom of the display indicates S002 Initiate an active fire Alarm verify that alarm LED flashes the correct fire alarm message appears in the top and bottom windows of the LCD the active point counter changes the event sequence indicates a 1 the active fire alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates A001 and the event type indicates fire alarm Press the Alarm queue switch and verify that the Alarm
155. and 4 Circuit Fault open or short 3NETTS2 CDR Figure 8 4 Network data circuit fault Either an open or shorted circuit will interrupt communication between cabinets 3 and 4 The token ring network will reconfigure and operate as two independent sub networks one consisting of cabinets 1 2 and 3 the second consisting of cabinets 4 and 5 Due to the isolation between cabinets during a ground fault condition the number of potential circuits to be investigated is limited to those originating from a single cabinet Table 8 5 CPU troubleshooting Problem RX4 or TX1 off RX2 TX2 or RX3 TX3 off or both pairs off RS 232 port J5 inoperative Ancillary RS 232 port TB2 1 to 4 or TB2 5 to 8 inoperative 8 12 Possible cause CPU not firmly seated in rail connectors CPU failure and wires reversed Circuit not properly terminated Network A and Network B circuits crossed Improper wire installed Ground fault 3 RS485 card loose TX and RX wires reversed CPU and peripheral device baud rate mismatched PC improperly configured TX and RX wires reversed CPU and peripheral device baud rate mismatched M A FOTN Gee 560 ES IN c Peripheral device off line or improperly configured EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Table 8 5 CPU troubleshooting Problem RS 485 port TB2 17 to 20 inoperative Power LED off no characters on display swi
156. and a current monitor for detecting the loss of telephone line and telephone line usage during off hook conditions Optical coupler circuits are used for these monitors Two red LEDs DS1 and DS2 annunciate line ringing in use and fault conditions States and explanations for DS1 and DS2 are given in the Service and troubleshooting chapter Equipment 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator The 3 MODCOM connects the EST3 system to the switched telephone network The 3 MODCOM module is a single rail module with two eight position modular jacks for connecting two loop start lines The 3 MODCOM module provides control display layer and space for a future expansion insert card The 3 MODCOM can support 255 accounts It can communicate with 80 receivers in any of the following protocols Contact ID SIA DCS e SIA P2 3 1 Pulse Format e SIA P3 4 2 Pulse Format The 3 MODCOM is supplied with two seven foot cables P N 360137 These are eight conductor flat telephone cables with eight position modular plugs on both ends One end of the cable plugs into the 3 MODCOM The other end plugs into an RJ 31X jack You must obtain the RJ 31X jack locally and wire it to the telephone lines as indicated on the 3 MODCOM installation sheet EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation 3 MODCOMP Modem Communicator with Paging The 3 MODCOMP is identical to the 3 MODCOM except for the inclusion of the TAP paging protocol
157. ansmit format the 3 MODCOM transmits in the specified format all premises event data LED DS1 DS2 flashes rapidly to indicate data is being transmitted The 3 MODCOM waits for an acknowledgement and shutdown signal from the CMS receiver then puts the line on hook ending the call LED DS1 DS2 extinguishes EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Programming considerations Accounts and receivers In addition to the general operating characteristics of the 3 MODCOM you ll need to specify each account and receiver used by the system You may want to gather this information before you begin using the SDU A receiver is a destination for a 3 MODCOM call to a CMS Typically a CMS will have many receivers in operation each capable of receiving multiple calls The CMS will determine which receiver you should use for each account For configuration purposes here s what you ll need to specify about the receiver Label e Description Primary telephone number Secondary telephone number Protocol to use e Maximum number of dial attempts Wait time between dial attempts An account links a specific end user to a specific receiver Each message sent from the 3 MODCOM includes an account number assigned by the CMS This identifies the user site sending the message and the receiver to which the message is sent For each account you ll need to define e Label e Description Receiver to
158. applications This chapter also illustrates and describes several access control applications Each application is presented as a separate topic that includes a block diagram and description These give you an overview of the application and show the components required and their interconnection Refer to the EST3 Installation Sheets for specific component settings and terminal connections Security applications make use of the CRC Card Reader Controller Refer to the CRC and CRCXM Card Reader Controller Installation Sheet for specific installation information on this module Content Access control equipment 3 2 Anti passback 3 11 Central monitoring station 3 14 Common door access 3 16 Delayed egress 3 18 Elevator control 3 21 Emergency exit door 3 24 Handicap access door 3 26 Maglock peripherals 3 28 Multiple card readers 3 30 Muster 3 32 Power for continuous locks 3 35 Power for intermittent locks 3 37 Power from an AC source 3 39 Power from a remote source 3 42 Remote controls 3 45 Two person rule 3 47 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 1 Access control applications Access control equipment Introduction The equipment required for a basic networked access control system is shown in Figure 3 1 We ll discuss each item shown in the figure plus the other factors called out on the drawing Input circuit 1 Input circuit 2 Control panel 3 SAC Secur
159. as e One line dialer e Two line dialer Modem Modem and one line dialer Modem and two line dialer For UL listed or FM approved installations you must configure the 3 MODCOM as a two line dialer and both lines must have supervision line cut detection selected The 3 MODCOM operates in accordance with programmed instructions Details of items such as telephone numbers dialing EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 29 Installation 5 30 details activation of a dialer test signal etc are all a part of the information that is downloaded into the nonvolatile memory of the 3 by the SDU The 3 MODCOM electronically dials receivers in the central monitoring station CMS using either pulse or tone dialing as specified during configuration The module dials the stored CMS telephone number using the same digits that would be used if a person were dialing from the premises with an ordinary telephone Each time the 3 MODCOM sends test messages to the CMS it indicates whether the system is in a normal or abnormal state You can select which system states such as alarm trouble or monitor represent an abnormal condition This prevents the 3 MODCOM from reporting an abnormal condition when the system is in a state that occurs frequently as part of normal system operation There are provisions for programming a periodic test transmission to the CMS station on a one minute to 45 day basis A daily test sign
160. assification Problems with the system can generally be classified into two categories application programming problems and hardware including firmware problems Many times hardware problems are identified by the system itself Application programming problems are typically suspected when an incorrect response happens or when a response fails to happen or happens at the wrong time Handling static sensitive circuit modules Many of the circuit modules use components that are sensitive to static electricity To reduce the possibility of damaging these components take the following precautions when handling 1 Use only approved grounding straps that are equipped with a 1 resistive path to earth ground 2 Always keep circuit modules in their protective antistatic packaging Remove only for inspection or installation 3 Always hold circuit modules by the sides Avoid touching component leads and connector pins EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 3 Service and troubleshooting 8 4 Removing or replacing circuit modules When removing or replacing circuit modules always remember to 1 First disconnect the battery then remove AC power Removing or replacing circuit modules when power is applied will damage the equipment 2 Avoid applying excessive force to the snap rivet fasteners that lock the plug in modules in place If needed use the extraction tool provided in the hardware kat Recommended spares list
161. ast one muster CRC per 3 SAC module The system cannot exchange muster information between 3 SAC modules so each must be handled separately for muster purposes A CRC used for a muster station requires the specified dummy load on the lock terminals to maintain supervision Refer to the CRC installation sheet for correct resistor values The card reader used for the muster station must be wired as an outside reader SDU programming Each CRC used in a muster application requires specific configuration settings These are made in the SDU program on the CRC Configuration tab If the CRC is used in a partition that has muster control check the Muster Support box For the CRC designated as the muster station check the Muster Station box but leave the Muster Support box clear In the SDU you can also assign a predefined command list to the Access Granted Muster event EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Power for continuous locks Description of the application By continuous locks we mean locks that operate on average more than 30 seconds in every minute Normally power for the lock is taken from the CRC battery However for continuous locks there is not enough recharge time for the CRC battery to keep up with the drain Consequently the CRC must be configured so that an external power supply operates the lock The CRC can be powered by the 3 PPS M by a CRCXF CRC Transformer or by a
162. ate whether it is OK to continue EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 23 System calculations 3 Continue by adding the actual alarm load and the distance from the previous device for each device on the SAC bus 4 Ifyou successfully enter all devices with no error messages no further calculations are required The panel supply will be adequate and each device will receive sufficient voltage 5 Ifan error message occurs you have the following options Repeat the process using 14 AWG in step 1 Run a second power supply line Divide the SAC bus and add a remote power supply SAC bus wire length tables Table B 9 SAC bus wire length for number of doors vs current loads using 16 AWG wire Load mA Doors 70 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 1 4000 4000 2650 2000 1600 1300 1140 1000 885 800 720 665 616 2 3800 2660 1776 1300 1060 880 760 666 594 532 484 444 410 3 2850 1950 1320 990 780 660 570 498 444 399 363 333 306 4 2240 1600 1040 800 624 520 452 400 355 320 288 266 244 5 1875 1350 885 650 525 435 375 333 296 266 242 222 205 6 1620 1140 756 558 450 378 324 286 254 228 207 190 X 7 1400 980 665 497 392 329 285 250 222 199 X X X 8 1240 880 584 440 352 288 253 222 197 X X X X 9 1125 810 522 396 315 261 228 200 X X X 10 1030 730 480 360 290 240 207 X X X X X 11 946 660 440 330 264 220 X X X X X X X 12 876 600 408 300 240 X X X X X X X X 13 806 559 377
163. ates amplifier status Messages General While there 1s no standardization on message content messages must tell the occupant what is happening why it is happening and what actions they should take As a rule each message should be repeated three times If there is more than one language spoken in the area the messages should be provided in each language A male voice has been demonstrated to be more authoritative than a female voice and should be used where urgency is required A female voice has been shown to initially gain the public s attention quicker than a male voice Alarm message format The basic alarm message format consists of an alarm tone followed by an evacuation message repeated three times The suggested alarm tone can take the form of a 1000 Hz tone modulated by the standard 3 3 3 evacuation pattern a slow whoop an electronic bell a constant tone or a constant tone modulated at a 120 pulse per minute rate Please refer to the Authority Having Jurisdiction for specific requirements Typical Alarm Message text Female Voice May I have your attention please May I have your attention Please Male Voice There has been a fire reported in the building Proceed to the nearest stairwell and exit the building Do not use the elevators Repeat do not use the elevators EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 39 System overview 1 40 Note The EST3 amplifiers operate in a stand a
164. ation and Service Manual Installation 5 12 Figure 5 4 shows a single SIGA CCI switching an NAC on or off The GIM module provides signal synchronization for the temporal horn strobe appliances As in earlier examples this circuit allows for independent silencing of the audible appliances This operation is provided by the SIGA CR module which opens or closes the circuit between S and H on the GIM module In this case however you must program the operation of the SIGA CR The project settings for signal silence operation will not determine the operation of the audible appliances in this NAC Note also that this application could be implemented with a SIGA CCIS module The SIGA CCIS provides signal synchronization compatible with the operation of the GIM module The advantage to using SIGA CCIS module is that NAC would then be synchronized with other NACS on the Signature data circuit EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Jesu Jo snolAeid jxeu Jesu XNY XNY snoad ejeg eouelis OYN 2102 Aq 9 joejuoo ed A eoi eg Yd JePOIN OWN euoz 10 Jes G AyjeuosJeg 9IdISIA ed eoi eg ePOI
165. ation is not supported for Chinese and Korean Windows code page Languages supported 1250 Eastern Europe English Polish Slovak 1251 Cyrillic English Russian 1252 Western Europe Dutch English French Italian Portuguese Spanish 1254 Turkish English Turkish 1255 Hebrew English Hebrew EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Example Bilingual operation between Polish and Slovak is supported code page 1250 Bilingual operation between Polish and Russian is not supported as no code page has both Display device language support LCD language support Marketplace c c Language 5 4 Chinese traditional Taiwan X Chinese simplified PRC X Dutch X English UK X English US X X xn X X French Canadian X X Hebrew X X X Italian X X X Korean Extended Wansung X Polish X Portuguese Brazil X X Russian X X X Slovak X Spanish South America X X Turkish X X 1 For testing and support purposes only 3 FTCU language support Marketplace c c G AERE 2 5 c o 5 n Language 2 4 o z Chinese traditional Taiwan 1 Chinese simplified PRC 1 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 23 System overview 3 FTCU language support Marketplace Language 5 4 Dutch X English UK X English US X X X X X French Canadian X X Hebrew X 1 1 Italian X X X Korean Extended Wansung 1 Portuguese Brazil X X Spanish South America X X Turkish
166. ations staff badge in and out using the inside and outside readers Note that muster reporting will only work if all employees badge in and out During an evacuation everyone exits the building immediately and goes to one of the predetermined muster stations At the muster station personnel badge in using a reader that is attached to a CRC designated as a muster station After everyone has badged in at the muster station security staff use the ACDB program to create a muster report The report lists staff who badged into the building but did not badge out at a muster station Figure 3 11 shows a typical muster application CRCs 2 3 5 and 6 are normal access control CRCs CRCs 1 and 4 are muster station CRCs The ACDB computer must be located in a safe area so security staff can create the muster report after the evacuation This computer can connect to the access control system either via telephone lines and a 3 MODCOM or by direct connection to the EST3 control panel Note Links between the ACDB computer and the control panel should be tested regularly to ensure correct operation Staff must be made aware of the importance of badging in and out at all times Failure to do so can result in a false muster report indicating that someone is still in the building This in turn can result in rescue personnel risking danger to search for someone who is not actually in the building EST3 Installation and Service Manual Muster stati
167. ay to close only on loss of AC power other booster troubles are signaled through the sense circuits Note In Figure 32 the booster supply is configured so that Sense controls all four NACs For DIP switch settings for this and other booster supply configurations refer to the booster supply s technical reference manual Signature modules Configure the Signature modules as described below Module Properties SIGA CC1 Model CC1 Device Type CommonAlarmOutput Personality 5 Riser Selector Text 1 REMOTE SUPPLY Text 2 SENSE 1 SIGA CT1 Model CT1 Device Type ACFail Personality 3 Active B Text 1 REMOTE SUPPLY Text 2 AC FAILURE 5 44 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation 5 45 doo eunjeuBiS _b 38335 2 L AlddNS ALOWSY Jojoejeg Jesi G AyujeuosJed d JepoIN jeuBis ejBurs 1 103 Jequinu ped sn c Xn 002 eu esiJedns oj peuinbeJ Auo Jo Wivd 2 pejou esiwjeuyo ssejun Jamod pue si 434 LHM ve AO 2 L WWd u geq 4 ejeg d
168. be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations EST3 Installation and Service Manual V Content Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Note The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop that is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirements that the sum of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 UL 864 9th edition requirements
169. binet Overview The Amplifier Terminal Panel ATP the 3 ATPINT Interface RKU series enclosures and Dukane 125 W or 250 W audio power amplifiers are the basic components of the Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet ATPC Appropriately sized standby batteries and in some situations an external battery charger round out the equipment required in the ATPC The ATPC can be located up to 3 000 ft 914 m from the 3 ZAxx amplifiers supplying the audio signals Equipment racks RKU Series Equipment Racks are designed to support standard 19 in 48 26 cm wide rack mount components These UL listed enclosures are constructed of 16 gauge steel and finished in either white or black enamel Interior facing louvers on the two side panels and the back door provide ventilation for installed equipment while maintaining a flush outside surface for side by side stacking of multiple racks Six conduit knockouts for 1 2 in or 3 4 in conduit are available on the top end panel three on top three on the flange and six on the bottom end panel three on the bottom and three on the flange Three 2 875 in 7 3 cm diameter cable access holes are located on the bottom end panel for routing wiring to cabinet components The equipment mounting rails on the front of the rack are recessed 0 625 in 1 59 cm The louvered back door attaches to the cabinet with spring hinges allowing easy field access and door removal A key lock is provided on the door for added
170. ble cause 1 No power to panel 2 Ribbon cable between display and host module loose or defective Display defective Host module defective EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Table 8 7 Control display module troubleshooting Problem Possible cause All module LEDs and switches 1 Ribbon cable between display and host module loose or inoperative AND host module defective Display not configured in SDU Display defective LEDs respond incorrectly Display not defined in SDU database LED misidentified in SDU database Rule governing LED operation not correctly written Switch activation does not perform the required function Display not defined in SDU database Switch misidentified in SDU database p prc NX ser NS Rule governing switch operation not correctly written Audio amplifier modules Table 8 8 3 ZAxx Zoned Audio Amplifier module troubleshooting Problem Possible cause Audio output level too low 1 Jumpers set for 25 Vrms when connected to a 70 Vrms circuit 2 Gain adjusted too low 3 Inputlevel to ASU too low No or extremely low audio 1 Fuse blown pur 2 Gain set too low Audio level too high 1 Jumper set for 70 Vrms when connected to 25 Vrms circuit 2 Gain adjusted too high 3 Input level to ASU too high Amplifier current limiting 1 Audio circuit overloaded 2 Input level to ASU too high Incorrect amplifier version 1 Jumpers installed incorrectly
171. bstitution and replacement rules Rule 1 Modules must be replaced with modules of the same model number Rule 2 LED Switch Displays must be replaced with LED Switch Displays of the same model number Rule 3 Substitute modules must have an identical LED Switch Display installed as the module it replaces Rule 4 Substitute modules should be installed in the same rail location as the module it is replacing Adding hardware When hardware is added to a cabinet a portion of the network configuration database must also be changed The extent of the changes depends on the rule relationships between the added component and the balance of the network Revised copies of the database must then be downloaded using the SDU Downloading problems If you are experiencing frequent downloading problems low signal level from the download computer may be the cause The Buffered RS 232 Communication Cable Catalog No SDU CBL may be used to correct signal level problems Note Do not use the buffered RS 232 communication cable with a CPU EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Modules Rail signals The figure below shows the signals normally present on a pair of chassis rails Note The panel controller and the power supply monitor module must be installed in order to measure the voltages indicated Top Rail Top Rail J8 AIN J9 BIN gt Function O2 6 25 VDC NUS Lr emus 5
172. capacitance rating of the selected cable For example say you wanted to determine maximum length of a data network using 18 AWG cable that 15 rated at 25 pF per foot The network will communicate at 38 4 Kbaud The maximum length equals the maximum cumulative capacitance divided by the capacitance per foot In equation form ML MCC Where ML Maximum length MCC Maximum cumulative capacitance CPF Capacitance per foot In our example ML 1 4 pF 25 ML 56 000 ft EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 3 System calculations B 4 Calculating maximum wire capacitance per foot The capacitive property of twisted pair cable varies and the cost of cable generally increases as the capacitance per foot decreases Following is a sample calculation for determining the maximum capacitance per foot that a cable can have for a given network length The maximum capacitance per foot equals the maximum cumulative capacitance divided by the total network length In equation form MCPF TNL Where MCC Maximum cumulative capacitance from the table given in this topic TNL Total network length the sum of the lengths of individual copper runs in the network Here s an example The total copper distance of a network is 26 000 feet Calculate the maximum capacitance per foot that can be used for 18 AWG twisted pair cable at 38 4K baud MCPF MCC TNL MCPF 1 4 uF 26 000 ft MCPF 53 8 p
173. ce provider to ensure they accept the TAP protocol and determine any message limitations Transmission process The 3 MODCOM includes features that provide an appreciable level of transmission integrity Multiple telephone lines and multiple telephone numbers help to ensure that a call to the receiver gets through The 3 MODCOM module sequences through the following basic steps to contact the central monitoring station receiver 1 The 3 MODCOM seizes one of the telephone lines and puts the line on hook for a minimum of three seconds This cuts off any ongoing call and disconnects the line from any telephone or dialing devices that are connected downstream Note The module tries to select an unused line for its first two attempts 2 The 3 MODCOM takes the line off hook and waits for a dial tone LED DS1 DS2 lights steadily If a dial tone is not received by the configured time the module goes on hook increments the attempt counter and continues to alternate lines and numbers until a dial tone is acquired If the 3 MODCOM is configured with two telephone numbers and only one telephone line it will make four attempts using the first telephone number then four attempts using the second telephone number This alternation of telephone numbers continues as needed until a connection is made or the configured number of dial attempts have been made EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 33 Installation 5 34 Note I
174. cessing Each CRC stores a database and is capable of granting or denying entry without external communication If entry is granted the CRC applies or removes power to the strike or maglock to unlock the door The CRC is also capable of unlocking a door by activating a manual push button Each CRC stores an access database of users and events for the door it controls The CRCXM model features enhanced storage capacity Refer to the product installation sheets for quantities Each CRC has terminals that support Two card readers typically one inside and one outside the door e One lock device either strike or maglock type e Two input circuits for devices such as request to exit detectors door contacts or motion detectors e One output circuit with N O and N C contacts for auxiliary devices such as door openers With the addition of an internal battery the CRC can continue processing access events even if there is a loss of communication or power CRC options CRCSND CRC Sounder The CRC Sounder is a small horn that mounts inside the card reader controller module The sounder operates if an emergency exit door is opened without an exit request and can also indicate that a door has been left open The CRC Sounder can be programmed using rules written in the SDU Further the ACDB program can control several operating parameters of the sounder CRCRL CRC Accessory Relay The CRCRL is an accessory relay for the CRC o
175. chassis 5 22 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation ATCK Attack Kit for cabinets EST3 supports several UL1635 certification installations Each of these requires that an ATCK Attack Kit be attached to an RCCTR series control panel cabinet The kit provides a two minute attack delay time The ATCK kit lets you replace the standard hinged outer door with a box cover that has no window The cover attaches to the backbox sides using sheet metal screws and four locks The kit also includes special knockout locks that secure the unused knockout holes Follow the instructions shipped with the kit In general you ll need to 1 Discard the standard door included with the cabinet 2 For older cabinets use the ATCK cover as a template to mark and drill screw holes New cabinets include the correct screw holes 3 Remove any unused knockouts and insert knockout locks 4 Use the screws provided to attach the new cover EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 23 Installation Local rail module installation 5 24 Please refer to the installation sheet that came with the product for installation instructions Equipment locations within a chassis are referred to as rail slots Figure 5 7 indicates the rail slot numbers for the various cabinet sizes available in the EST3 product line The CPU module must always occupy rail slots 1 and 2 The primary power supply monitor module should occupy rail slot 3 5 MODU
176. circuit control modules inoperative or programmed incorrectly Input wiring incorrect or missing Low or no audio input 70 Vrms speakers with 25 Vrms jumper setting Too many SIGA CC1s or SIGA CC2s installed causing amplifier to shut down Gain R116 setting too low EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 23 Service and troubleshooting Pseudo point descriptions Table 8 18 System pseudo points Address 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 8 24 Label Startup Response First Alarm Response First Supervisory Response First Trouble Response First Monitor Response Evacuation Response Drill Response AllCall Response Alarm Silence Response Two Stage Timer Expiration Reset Active Reset Phase 1 Reset Phase 2 Source CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Functional description Changes to the active state when the panel is energized or an operator initiates a Restart from the LCD module Changes to the active state when the first point on a panel or any panel in the same network routing group changes to the alarm state Changes to the active state when the first point on a panel or any panel in the same network routing group changes to the supervisory state Changes to the active state when the first point on a panel or any panel in the same network routing group changes to the
177. compatible 2 wire smoke detectors 2 Excessive wiring resistance or capacitance 8 16 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting 3 LDSM Display Support module Table 8 11 3 LDSM Display Support module troubleshooting Problem Module LEDs and switches inoperative and host module working correctly Possible cause 1 Ribbon cable between display and 3 LDSM module loose or defective 2 Module not configured in SDU 3 Display not configured in SDU 4 Display defective 3 MODCON P Modem Communicator module Diagnostic aids Two LEDs DS1 and DS2 provide diagnostic information The activity of DS1 and DS2 during dialing and data transmission outlined in the following table Table 8 12 3 MODCOM LED states and meanings LED state Off On Slow flash Slow flash both Fast flash 051 meaning DS2 meaning No activity No activity Line 1 has been seized Line 2 has been seized Dialer or modem data is Dialer data is being passed on being passed on Line 1 line 2 Modem data is passed only on line 1 Slow flash on both LEDs indicates an ongoing download of application code or configuration code from CPU or SDU Reflects ringing on Line 1 N A line 2 does not have ring Flashing follows pattern detection detected A Radio Shack Mini Audio Amplifier catalog number 277 1008 facilitates listening to the distinctive sounds associated with dialing receiving handshakes tran
178. contain information and instructions that should only be used for a specific alarm location Should a second alarm from another location be received the evacuation message playing as a result of the first alarm may not be appropriate for the second alarm Note In the event of conflicting messaging instructions caused by multiple alarm events the system will play the default evacuation message whenever two or more different messages are requested at the same time on the evacuation channel Automatic message processing is illustrated in Figure 1 9 By reverting back to the generic default evacuation message in multiple alarm location scenarios no one can be misdirected by the wrong message Default messages also play during alarms when no location specific message has been requested EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview N w 80th floor west wing evacuation message A fire has been reported on the west wing of the 80th floor Generic default message An emergency has been reported in the building Remain where you are and await further instructions Location specific messages UJ w N W 30th floor north wing evacuation message A fire has been reported on the north wing of the 30th floor Generic default evacuation message The generic default evacuation message plays when multiple location specific messages have been requested by the s
179. ctors Next we ll cover the additional factors listed on the drawing Power supply e Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation These factors are called out on each application diagram given in this chapter Power supply The CRC is designed to operate on 24 Vdc For this reason we recommend that you include power from the panel with the SAC bus cable You can use the panel 3 PPS M or 3 BPS M power supplies When using CRCXF CRC Transformer you must provide a circuit common path between all devices using the 24 terminals If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications must have ground fault detection disabled and must have a circuit ground circuit common that is isolated from earth ground Hardware configuration The CRC has two jumpers that configure the power source and usage for the module See the CRC installation sheet for details on the jumper settings No other configuration settings are made at the device itself All other configuration is done via SDU or ACDB programming The SDU determines site level configuration and parameters The ACDB program controls end user settings SDU programming While the ACDB program defines the access control database all other definition configuration and programming for the access control system happens in the SDU The SDU controls the general configuration o
180. cuit Each NAC is controlled by a SIGA CCIS module one for audible appliances and one for visible appliances As in Figure 5 1 this configuration allows the audible appliances to be silenced independently of the visible appliances This operation is optional and may or may not be required for your project The SIGA CCIS modules provide signal synchronization for both NACs EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation X104 Jesu Jo jxeu 0 Jesu XNY oL jnoejeq 9107 eqe yndjno ou s GZ 9 dISIA ed eoi eg 81 90 gt geq XV snoad UJOJ 91027 jndino ou s GZ e qipny adA S199 ajnpow jeuBis ejBuis eqous annoy annoy ajnpow 3ndu auis Figure 5 3 Typical SIGA CC1S wiring 5 11 EST3 Install
181. cuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Table 5 3 Field wiring tests Circuit type Test RS 232 Communication With both ends of the circuit disconnected Circuits 1 Verify the continuity of each conductor Each conductor should measure between 0 and 25 Q 2 Measure the resistance between conductors The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite 3 Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite Earth Ground 1 Measure the resistance between the earth ground terminal and a convenient water pipe or electrical conduit The circuit resistance should be less than 0 10 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 21 Installation Chassis installation in EIA 19 inch racks Each 3 CHAS7 chassis or 3 ASU FT Audio Source Unit requires 12 inches 30 48 cm of vertical rack space 3 4 inch 1 9 cm blank plates are required at the top of the upper chassis and the bottom of the lower chassis A 1 1 2 inch 3 81 cm blank plate 1s required between each chassis 3 4 In 1 9 BLANK PLATE Chassis 1 1048 cm 1 1 2 In 3 81 cm BLANK PLATE X Chassis 2 yr cm 1 1 2 In 3 81 cm BLANK PLATE X U 9 1421n Chassis 3 30 48 cm 3 4 In 1 9 cm BLANK PLATE j RACKSPAC CDR Figure 5 6 Rack mounted
182. cur at the address of the suspect device as the result of a map fault because the known good device s parameters differ from those of the suspect device that was removed from the circuit You must accept the parameters which may be changed later of the known good device to remove the map fault EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 45 Service and troubleshooting Signature series devices require a solid connection at their terminals If a wire can be wiggled it will be subject to contact resistance variations due to temperature changes resulting in an intermittent connection which will affect communication between the Signature devices and the control module Use the proper size screwdriver and tighten all connections securely Tighten terminal screws securely ABASESCR CDR 8 46 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Signature controller modules Substituting Signature controller modules When substituting a known good Signature controller module in place of a suspect rail module you must download the system configuration and Signature data circuit information into the CPU module This operation requires a PC and the SDU Program The Signature controller module actually has two separate memories The first memory contains the firmware that makes the module operate If there is a problem with the firmware or if an upgrade has been issued the new firmware is
183. d Display Configuration program Software that lets end users create and maintain a security database The program communicates with the system via 3 MODCOM Keypad Display A unique identifier for an object A printed version of all system configuration data contained in the panel Features which operate only within the local cabinet A system which operates according to the provisions of NFPA 72 Chapter 3 AND and OR statements A monitor device or zone A 50 duty cycle 120 beats per minute signal pattern A correlation sheet that indicates the relationship between the activation of an input and the effect it will have upon all system outputs Short for modulator demodulator A communications device that enables a computer to transmit information over a standard telephone line Sophisticated modems are also capable of such functions as automatic dialing answering and redialing in addition to transmitting and receiving The 3 MODCOM includes a modem EST3 Installation and Service Manual Y 3 Glossary NAC nonsilenceable object output output priority personality code power limited proprietary system pseudo point PSNI RAM reset response restore retard riser RS 232 Y 4 Notification appliance circuit A circuit connected directly to notification appliances The electrical integrity of the circuit is monitored by the fire alarm system A notification appliance circuit that remains activ
184. d Genesis or Enhanced Integrity notification appliances Separate NACs on the module are not synchronized To silence audible appliances separately use two NAC channels from the 3 IDC8 4 to provide separate audible and visible power to the NAC In this configuration the signal silence function operates as defined in your project See Figure 5 1 for typical wiring Configure the audible notification appliances for temporal or steady output as desired Signals are synchronized for all NACs on the Signature data circuit when you use SIGA CC1S or SIGA MCC1S modules and Genesis or Enhanced Integrity notification appliances See Figure 5 3 The system does not synchronize Signature data circuits on separate 3 SSDC 1 modules in one panel or between panels Signals are synchronized for a NAC on the Signature data circuit when you use SIGA CC1 and SIGA MCC1 addressable modules a Genesis Signal Master synchronization module and Genesis or Enhanced Integrity notification appliances 1 Separate NACs on the Signature data circuit are not synchronized See Figure 5 4 Configure the audible notification appliances for temporal or steady output as desired Synchronization is not supported between two daughter cards on the same 3 SDDC 1 module 5 on the individual daughter cards are synchronized as described above for the 3 SSDC 1 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Table 5 2 Installation requirements for UL
185. d of being faulty try substituting a known good one that has been properly programmed EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 19 Service and troubleshooting Audio components 3 ASU Audio Source Unit Table 8 13 3 ASU Audio Source Unit Troubleshooting Problem Unit does not respond No network RX or TX LED activity No Call page audio output from network amplifiers and low level page output terminals No Call page audio output from network amplifiers output available at low level page output terminals Page audio distorted Auxiliary Input volume level too low Auxiliary Input volume level too high Recorded messages not working properly Wrong messages going to wrong floors Telephone Page inoperative 8 20 Possible cause 1 Power or data connectors loose or connected wrong on Rail Chassis Interface Card Ribbon cable between Rail Chassis Interface Card and 3 ASU and 3 FTCU if installed loose or defective 3 Ribbon cable between 3 ASU main board and cover loose or N ROD defective Defective microphone Page inhibit timer set too long Defective 3 ASU Ribbon cable between 3 ASU main board and cover loose or defective Defective amplifier Network audio data riser open shorted or incorrectly wired Network data riser open shorted or incorrectly wired TB2 on the CPU loose or incorrectly wired 3
186. d with a dual address module or vice versa a map fault will be generated by the address count mismatch EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Basic Signature data circuit troubleshooting Isolating circuit and device problems The process of isolating a problem on a Signature data circuit 15 similar to that used on a conventional fire alarm Initiating Device Circuit IDC An accurate and complete wiring diagram of the data circuit installation is the best troubleshooting aid available When used in conjunction with the information provided by the control panel you should be able to easily isolate open conditions or defective devices The data circuit shown in Figure 8 5 will be used to illustrate basic troubleshooting techniques When troubleshooting Class A circuits disconnect the circuit from the return SIGA A terminals and temporarily jumper both SIGA A terminals to the respective SIGA B terminals Then troubleshoot the circuit as a Class B circuit Signature ontrollei Figure 8 5 Normal circuit topology Open circuit conditions On a circuit with an open fault the Signature modules will be communicating with devices up to the break The LCD module will indicate a trouble condition on all devices beyond the break This is illustrated in Figure 8 6 where devices 1 through 7 continue to operate while devices 8 through 15 report device troubles Signature ontrolle These dev
187. data lines in a cable composed of two twisted pair wires In this case the power from the 3 PPS M is connected to the CRC terminals but internally bypassed The 16 5 Vac transformer should be plugged into a continuously energized AC socket not one controlled by a switch SDU programming When programming the system for this application you ll need to configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the SDU This can be either a strike or maglock EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 41 Access control applications Power from a remote source 3 42 Description of the application By remote power we mean that the CRC provides the power to operate the electronic door strike or maglock by using a remote DC power supply This additional power can provide continuous power to the door strike or maglock A typical CRC using remote power is shown in Figure 3 16 The additional power is needed because the CRC battery can not keep up with the power needs of maglocks or strikes with an active duty cycle greater than 30 seconds in a minute In these conditions the battery does not have enough time to charge and keep up with the drain The figure shows power coming from the additional remote power supply to power the CRC and maglock The supply is supervised by the Signature data circuit derived from the 3 SSDC 1 module The 3 SAC connects to the CRC through the SAC bus EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control
188. data that identifies the specific device or circuit and event status as reported by the CPU This capability is known as point transmission because each and every device or circuit that goes into alarm or trouble or is restored can be reported by order of occurrence and priority Receiving user data In addition to transmitting device data the 3 MODCOM module can receive user data from remote computers In this mode the module receives access control or security database information from one or more end users This data establishes the operating characteristics of the user s security and access control system as well as the various access options and PIN numbers downloaded data is received over the telephone lines EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 27 Installation 5 28 The remote programs ACDB and KDC use passwords defined during 3 SDU programming to gain access to the 3 At the start of the downloading process a connection is established between the modem portion of the 3 MODCOM module and the ACDB or KDC program Connection 15 over the telephone network The 3 MODCOM module receives data and transfers it to the CPU The data is then routed via the 3 SAC to the CRC and KPDISP modules on the SAC bus The data is stored in the nonvolatile flash memory chips of these devices Monitoring and diagnostics Each line has a voltage monitor for detecting loss of telephone line during on hook condition
189. ded to restart mapping Please wait for the automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing EST3 Installation and Service Manual Table 8 35 Mapping error messages Message Assignment of a short address to a device failed This could lead to duplicate short addresses and mapping failures Mapping has been disabled While mapping a chain from a device back to the Signature controller module the chain appears to have 2 devices at the same location in the chain More than 125 End of Line devices have been found on the SDC While mapping a chain from a device back to the Signature controller module the chain was found to have a device present past the end of the chain This indicates that at least one device is responding improperly to the mapping commands Mapping has detected a difference between the device at the end of line and the devices in its chain Service and troubleshooting Suggested corrective action 1 View the Chain and Device Response Lists to see a list of the devices that are present in the chain being processed and identify the failed device Replace the device Persistent problem is indicative of a wiring fault 1 Enable mapping 1 Indicative of faulty wiring on the circuit or a faulty device 2 Review the Chain and Device Response lists to identify the conflict 1 Correct the wiring 2 Re map the circuit 1 Click the Device Chains tab to see a list of the dev
190. der reader outside inside Handicap Handicap card reader card reader outside inside Figure 3 8 Handicap access door EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Note Refer to the appropriate ADA codes and the local AHJ to determine the requirements for handicap access door applications Hardware configuration A CRC used for a handicap access door may require the following additional hardware e Automatic door opener Additional card readers The automatic door opener is installed directly to the access door The CRC controls the opening of the door with its internal relay Caution The CRC relay is for low voltage only Do not exceed the relay limits stated on the installation sheet The additional card readers are wired to the standard card readers in parallel SDU programming In the SDU you ll need to define the CRC relay device type as Access Door Control This will activate the door opener for the time specified by the ACDB ACDB operation The relay open time needs to be defined in the ACDB This is the number of seconds 0 through 255 that the CRC will activate the relay that automatically opens the door The default is 30 seconds The handicap unlock time also needs to be defined in the ACDB This is the number of seconds 0 through 255 that the lock will stay unlocked The default is 20 seconds The door will relock when the unlock time has expired and the door has c
191. device type and clear the map fault Notes Do not replace factory programmed devices such as pull stations and MMI modules with a SIGA CTI For mapping purposes give all manual pull stations the device type pull regardless of their model numbers If a dual address module replaces a single address module the panel will attempt to re map all devices however the circuit will not be successfully re mapped A map fault will be generated because the actual device differs from the expected device and the dual address module will not operate The data entry program must be used to accept the new device type and clear the map fault If a dual address module is replaced with a single address module the panel will never attempt to re map all devices because the panel does not see enough devices one address less to automatically re map the circuit The panel remains in the map pending mode and will not re map If the panel could be forced to re map all devices the circuit would still not be successfully re mapped because the actual device count differs from the expected device count The panel will be in trouble with a map fault The SDU program must be used to accept the new device type and clear the map fault Device type replacement If a different Signature device model is substituted for the suspect device when the device count is correct the Signature controller module will automatically re map the circuit A trouble will oc
192. dialer and modem in a single module The module has two eight position modular jacks for connecting to telephone lines It includes two red LEDs DS1 and DS2 to annunciate line ringing and data exchange The module accepts a control display layer and has provision for a future expansion module A nonvolatile flash memory chip stores customization data that includes account information user identifiers telephone numbers and other dialing details The 3 MODCOMP is identical to the 3 MODCOM but supports remote paging using the Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol TAP The 3 MODCOMP remote paging feature is supplemental and is not supervised Both versions of the module are equipped with a modem that is Bell 103 and V 32bis compliant The modem includes support for these protocols Contact ID SIA DCS SIA P2 3 1 pulse format SIA P3 4 2 pulse format 3 MODCOMP only Several 3 MODCOMs up to ten can be installed in a network for increased reliability These can be configured to provide dynamic failover operation You can program the 3 MODCOM any of the following configurations One line dialer Two line dialer Modem e Modem and one line dialer Modem and two line dialer The dialer circuit is compatible with pulse dialing or touch tone DTMF dialing The module can be configured to detect and answer any of these ring types Any ring e Normal ring Distnct ring 2 type
193. differ for Class A and Class B networks EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 19 System overview Download connection from SDU computer B1 CAB1 B1 CAB2 B1 CAB3 B1 CABA ra m Eam gt CPU 5 CPU CPU TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2 NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO NETWORK AUDIO OUT IN AIN OUT IN AIN OUT IN AIN OUT IN AIN A B B A A B A B A l l l l 1 1 oooooQodQ Figure 1 13 Impact of disabling Network A terminal connection on Class B networks during a download Figure 1 13 shows how connecting the SDU computer to the modular phone jack affects downloading data over a Class B network Connecting the SDU computer to the modular phone jack on the CPU module installed in panel CAB3 disables that CPU module s Network A port Downloading data to panels CAB2 and B1 from panel CAB3 is no longer possible but downloading to still is Since the microprocessor disables only the Network A port the CPU module that doesn t have a Network A port connection should be used as the service panel It is the only panel that is capable of downloading to every panel on the network using the modular phone jack Note Connecting the SDU computer
194. downloaded into the module When upgrading the module firmware code you do not need to download the Bootstrap data unless specifically instructed to do so The SDC configuration information is stored in the module s second memory If you suspect that the module itself is bad you must download the configuration information for the circuit that will be connected to the substitute module The database must be converted before it can be downloaded into the Signature controller Table 8 29 Signature controller module troubleshooting Problem Possible cause Signature Data Circuit Open Circuit incorrectly wired or connector loose Defective detector or isolator base Broken conductor 1 2 3 4 Device not installed on circuit 5 Device not entered into SDU databases 1 Signature Data Circuit Shorted 1 Circuit incorrectly wired often crossed wires on a device base Defective detector detector base or module Nicked insulation between conductors Signature Data Circuit Ground Pinched wire between device and electrical box Fault pores Nicked wire insulation Mapping errors Table 8 30 provides basic information on mapping errors For detailed information on identifying and locating mapping errors refer to the SSDC Diagnostic and Status sections found later in this chapter EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 47 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 30 Mapping errors Fault Mapping Error
195. dule 8 9 3 FIBMB fiber optic interface 8 13 Signature Controller modules 8 14 Control display modules 8 14 Audio amplifier modules 8 15 3 OPS Off Premises Signal module 8 16 3 IDC8 4 Initiating Device Circuit module 8 16 3 LDSM Display Support module 8 17 3 MODCOM P Modem Communicator module 8 17 Common causes of problems 8 18 Audio components 8 20 3 ASU Audio Source Unit 8 20 3 FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit 8 21 SIGA audio amplifiers 8 21 Pseudo point descriptions 8 24 Signature data circuit SDC operation 8 35 Basic Signature data circuit troubleshooting 8 37 Isolating circuit and device problems 8 37 Open circuit conditions 8 37 Short circuit conditions 8 38 Ground fault conditions 8 39 Substituting known good Signature series devices 8 41 Signature controller modules 8 47 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 1 Service and troubleshooting 8 2 Substituting Signature controller modules 8 47 Mapping errors 8 47 Device troubleshooting 8 49 Signature diagnostic tools 8 51 Using Signature diagnostics 8 51 Signature diagnostic sequence 8 52 Displaying mapping errors 8 52 Displaying device chain errors 8 55 Using the chain lists 8 57 Displaying message counters 8 57 Displaying device trouble 8 59 Displaying trouble tables 8 62 DSDC status 8 65 Introduction 8 65 Setting up the System De
196. dule and at each analog addressable device If the voltage difference is greater than 2 the resistance in the wire run is excessive Too much resistance in the Addressable Analog wire run is typically caused by small wire size or a bad connection If the wire size is too small for the run length the only remedies are to replace the wire with a larger size or install additional Addressable Analog modules dividing the circuit into acceptable lengths Breaks or bad connections in the Addressable Analog circuit wiring can be identified by comparing the calculated circuit resistance value described earlier with the measured circuit resistance value The measured wiring circuit resistance should not be different from the calculated circuit resistance by much more than a few ohms Excessive wiring capacitance The second cause of erratic Addressable Analog circuit operation is too much capacitance in the Addressable Analog circuit wiring Capacitance distorts the digital signal As wiring capacitance increases the square edges of the digital waveform start to curve Excessive wiring capacitance causes the waveform to curve beyond the point where a device can recognize the waveform and respond when polled Wiring capacitance also effects the turn on current spike If the turn on current spike is not present in the digital sequence there is a high probability the analog addressable device s communication will not be understood by the Addr
197. dules total per network EST3 Installation and Service Manual Security applications Multiple site security and access Description of the application Figure 2 5 shows how a company with multiple sites can centralize security and access control functions for all sites This means an employee only needs to carry a single access card to gain appropriate access to any company site The figure shows a company with three plants designated sites A B and C Site C is chosen as the company headquarters for security and access control purposes Each site is a separate SDU project At each site the Resource Profile Manager RPM tool is used to create a profile for that site This includes site C the headquarters plant the profiles are sent to the security office at site C for import into the Keypad Display Configuration KDC or Access Control Database ACDB program This means that the programs will present all resources at all sites in a single hierarchy as shown by the tree diagram The security personnel at site C can create global access groups This means that they can assign an employee the correct security and access privileges for all sites from one central location The employee can carry a single access card that will grant him the correct security and access privileges at each site EST3 Installation and Service Manual 2 13 Security applications Site B profile Site C profile Other factors Total re
198. e Local trouble Local trouble Local trouble Nonsupervised output Nonsupervised output Description KPDISP processor failed KPDISP executable program corrupt KPDISP database corrupt KPDISP lost communication with 3 SAC Changes to the active state when a task fails to execute properly Database download from the SDU is in progress or was incomplete N A KPDISP lost communication with 3 SAC displayed on KPDISP only KPDISP lost communication with panel displayed on KPDISP only Activates for configured time to allow the partition to be disarmed before going into alarm Activates for configured time to allow the person arming a partition to exit before signaling any alarm events SS represents the KPDISP device number as configured in the SDU EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 33 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 25 Local relay pseudo points Address Label 0002 Amplifier Backup 0003 Channel 1 Relay _ Confirmation 0004 Channel 2 Relay Confirmation 0005 Channel 3 Relay Confirmation 0006 Channel 4 Relay Confirmation 0007 Channel 5 Relay Confirmation 0008 Channel 6 Relay Confirmation 0009 Channel 7 Relay _ Confirmation 0010 Channel 8 Relay Confirmation 0011 Page Select 8 34 Source 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXX Description Changes to the active state when the amplifiers inp
199. e Manual Installation rules disable accounts on the failed 3 MODCOM and enable matching accounts on the backup 3 MODCOM When 3 MODCOM acts as a backup it still provides line supervision Only the backup accounts are disabled Further backup units should conduct their own dialer tests using unique accounts that identify the 3 MODCOM Even when not in use a backup unit should generate a trouble event if it cannot contact the assigned receiver Because of the way rules are processed when the primary 3 MODCOM comes out of trouble the accounts are automatically switched back to their normal state Messages already queued for transmission in the backup unit will still be sent even after backup accounts are disabled Only new messages will be routed differently This means that device activation and restoral messages sent to the CMS will still be properly paired Failover operation is created by specific configuration and programming steps These are outlined below Configuration requirements For each primary 3 MODCOM or select a backup 3 MODCOM the same panel or in a different panel according to the scope of failover operation you need Configure the primary and backup 3 MODCOMs identically except for their labels and the labels of the accounts Label the accounts so that it s easy to recognize the 3 MODCOM in which they are used Make sure each 3 MODCOM uses a unique account for dialer tests Pro
200. e after initiating independent of the panel s alarm silence features Nonsilenceable NACs are typically used for visual devices Inputs outputs and controls which are used as the basis for creating system rules A signal generated by the system based upon responses defined in the system database and sent to external field devices Outputs are LEDs and modules A system of hierarchy that allows or prevents setting or resetting outputs Output priorities range from low to high A number code used to set the configuration and operation of a SIGA module A personality code is either factory installed or must be downloaded into SIGA modules for proper operation Wiring and equipment that conforms with and is installed to the National Electrical Code Article 760 power limited provisions A system which operates according to the provisions of NFPA 72 Chapter 4 4 An input or output point that is not a physical device Example ground fault and communication fault notification Positive successive non interfering code Random access memory Volatile memory containing the system online or active status An active condition or command used to force an output to its OFF condition An output s OFF state may be in the restored condition normal condition not under the influence of a response or the reset condition An output reset state contains a priority level A list of outputs or functions that occur as a result of the cha
201. e application 3 49 common door access application 3 16 communication fault 8 64 compiler errors 6 4 configuring 3 8 continuous locks 3 35 continuous locks application 3 35 CPU memory calculations B 26 CRC battery 3 5 description 3 4 input circuits 3 5 jumpers 3 8 lock output 3 7 options 3 4 output circuits 3 6 power supply from cabinet 3 8 resetting 3 18 3 19 3 20 CRCRL 3 4 CRCSND delayed egress application 3 18 description 3 4 emergency exit door application 3 24 installation 3 4 CRCXF 3 5 data network specifications B 2 DC power supply application 3 42 delayed egress application 3 18 delayed egress time 3 18 3 19 design considerations audio applications 1 33 design considerations firefighter telephone 1 42 2 2 detector cleaning 7 6 device sharing 3 17 device trouble 8 59 device type PIR in maglock peripherals 3 29 device type fault 8 63 diagnostic tools addressable analog 8 70 Signature 8 51 direct connect to panel 3 7 3 32 door sounder 3 4 door contact CRC input circuit 3 5 delayed egress application 3 19 3 20 emergency exit door application 3 24 3 25 door holders 3 6 door open timer 3 9 downloading problems 8 6 dual LEDs 3 6 3 31 3 48 dummy loads 3 23 3 34 E elevator control application 3 21 emergency exit door application 3
202. e configuration 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch ATCK Attack Kit BE SDU programming LE ACDB KDC operation Figure 2 4 Grade A local certificate The bell must be positioned where it can be heard from every arming station in the system You can use multiple bells if required EST3 Installation and Service Manual 2 11 Security applications Multiple 3 MODCOM modules 2 12 You can install more than one 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator module in a system Two or more 3 MODCOM modules can be installed in the same cabinet Two or more cabinets can contain 3 MODCOM modules There are several reasons for using multiple 3 MODCOMs e Redundant communication to a CMS e Backup of critical communication links Dedicated security transmission hardware In a redundant communication system both 3 MODCOMs are programmed to transmit the same message to different receivers at the CMS or at different CMS installations One 3 MODCOM can be programmed to back up another This guarantees CMS communication or TAP paging should one panel in the system become disabled In a multiple tenant application there may be a high volume of ACDB KDC program traffic You can design such systems with a second 3 MODCOM dedicating the first module to ACDB KDC traffic and the second module to CMS transmissions This prevents contention for communication channels Overall limits for the number of 3 MODCOM modules are 10 modules per node 10 mo
203. e inside the ATCK Attack Kit protected cabinet Police station connected Grade A with basic line security Standard UL 365 Minimum hardware 3 RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch EST3 Installation and Service Manual C 3 Listing requirements 4 Central Processor Unit CPU 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply Main LCD Display LCD or KPDISP Keypad Display 3 MODCOM Modem Communication Module or FireWorks 3 SAC Security Access Module Signature Controller Modules Listed Grade A bell and bell housing Ademco model AB12M Grade A Bell in Box 24DC12 12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell Interface 3 IDC8 4 Traditional Zone I O Module SIGA MD Motion Detector SIGA SEC2 Security Loop Module Additional requirements Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds System must be programmed for a minimum of 15 minutes bell ring on alarm System must be programmed to indicate bell timeout with an LED System power supply bell power supply 24DC12 and bell monitoring module IDC8 4 must all be inside the ATCK Attack Kit protected cabinet Systems using a 3 MODCOM must be configured using two phone lines with line cut detection or a single line with 24 hour test System must be programmed to provide closing confirmation ring back at the arming station Centr
204. e installed location meets proper engineering practices 2 Thelocation annunciated by the system agrees with the physical location of the device 3 That the activated device initiates the correct system response Duct detectors should be tested to verify that both minimum and maximum airflow requirements are met Signature Series detectors and bases on a 3 SSDC 1 module circuit 1 Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards 2 Individually activate each detector Verify that the appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the LCD module Verify that the detector initiates the appropriate system responses If the detector is installed in a relay base verify that the base s relay function operates correctly If the detector is installed in an isolator base verify that the base isolates the required circuit segments Caution Do not use magnets to test Signature series detectors Doing so may damage the detector electronics Instead use an approved testing agent e g canned smoke 3 Duct mounted detectors should be tested using an air velocity test kit 6263 6263 SG to verify that minimum maximum airflow requirements are met 4 Remove the detector from its base Verify that the appropriate Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module 6 18 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 Power up and testing After all detectors have been individually inspected
205. e message and error counts are confused because of the length of time the circuit has been running restarting the panel will cause a restart of the circuit and the zero the counters You may need to monitor the circuit for twenty minutes or more before a trend in messages becomes apparent Locating intermittent faults may require extended operating periods EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 73 Service and troubleshooting 3 AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller Substituting 3 AADC1 local rail modules When substituting a known good 3 AADC1 rail module in place of a suspect rail module you must download the system configuration and Addressable Analog circuit data circuit information into the CPU module This operation requires a PC and the SDU Program The 3 AADC1 actually has two separate memories The first memory contains the firmware that makes the module operate If there is a problem with the firmware or if an upgrade has been issued the new firmware is downloaded into the module using the 3 AADCI Code tab which is found in the Version Control Code function of the Tools Download menu When upgrading the module firmware code you do NOT need to download the Bootstrap data unless specifically instructed to do so The SDC configuration information is stored in the module s second memory If you suspect that the module itself is bad you must download the configuration information for the circuit that will be co
206. e messages Trouble message Open data Circuit Shorted data Circuit Possible cause See Table 8 32 See Table 8 32 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Possible solution Check the device wiring or replace the device Replace Relay Base Replace Base 1 Replace Relay Base 2 Remove or Shield Noise Source Replace Base Replace Detector Clean Detector Clean Detector Replace Detector Replace Base Replace Base Replace Detector Replace Detector Replace Detector Replace Detector Replace Detector 1 Clean Detector 2 Eliminate light source Clean Detector Clean Detector Replace Base Possible solution See Table 8 32 See Table 8 32 8 61 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 38 Signature module trouble messages Trouble message Relay switched Data circuit ground fault Vector Current Too Large Vector Current Too Small EEPROM Not Initialized EEPROM Write Time out A D Time out EEPROM Write Verify Fault Line Monitor Trouble Class A Trouble 3rd Wire Trouble 3rd Wire Trouble RAM Not Programmed 8 62 Possible cause Relay toggled from actual state See Table 8 32 Devices on the Signature data circuit are drawing too much current during the mapping procedure Devices on the Signature data circuit are not drawing enough current during the mapping procedure EEPROM not properly programmed Bad EEPROM Defective A D converter Defective
207. e page or EVAC audio channels will receive the page The alert auxiliary and general channels are connected to their respective signal sources as in the normal mode The Page to Alert mode is used to send a page to the areas automatically receiving the alert signal Activating the Alert switch causes the Audio Source Unit to enter the page to alert mode In this mode the zoned audio amplifiers connected to the alert channel do not transfer to the page channel Rather the Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal source to the alert channel Figure 1 8 shows the page to alert mode page source to alert channel connections The page and alert audio channels both receive the page signal Any amplifier connected to either the page or alert audio channels will receive the page Any amplifiers that were previously idle will power up and receive the page The EVAC auxiliary and general channels are connected to their respective signal sources as in the normal mode The Call Minus mode is used to send a page to all areas NOT automatically receiving the EVAC or alert signals In high rise applications all call minus is an effective way to quickly select stairwells Activating the Call Minus switch causes the Audio Source Unit to enter the all call minus mode In this mode the zoned audio amplifiers connected to the auxiliary and general channels do not transfer to the page channel Rather the Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal
208. e size AWG At 38 4 Kbaud At 19 2 Kbaud 18 1 4 2 8 16 1 8 3 6 14 2 1 4 2 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System calculations Cable properties Data and audio networks in an EST3 system do not require the use of shielded cable and networks designed with twisted pair can be about twice as long as those designed with shielded cable The maximum length of a data network varies with the properties of the wire used Wire manufacturers typically provide specifications for wire resistance and capacitance Resistance is generally specified in ohms per 1 000 feet and must be doubled for 1 000 feet of a twisted pair cable Capacitance is specified in picofarads per foot pF ft The capacitance between conductors of a twisted pair 15 commonly referred too as conductor conductor or mutual capacitance Shielded cable has an additional capacitance between each conductor and the shield The capacitance of either conductor to shield 15 typically twice the value of mutual capacitance and the highest value of capacitance must be used when calculating the maximum length of a data network The overall length of data networks designed with twisted pair cable is about twice as long as data networks designed with shielded cable due to the additional capacitance resulting from the shield Calculating a maximum length The maximum length of a data network can be calculated by dividing the maximum cumulative capacitance allowed by the highest
209. e wellness of facility occupants Typically used in senior citizen housing A circuit connected directly to initiating devices that signals a trouble condition upon an open condition on the circuit All devices wired on the circuit to continue to operate in the event of a single open Similar to Style D amp E integrity monitoring A circuit connected directly to notification appliances that signals a trouble condition upon an open or shorted condition on the circuit All appliances wired on the circuit to continue to operate in the event of a single open Similar to Style Z integrity monitoring EST3 Installation and Service Manual Glossary Class B IDC Class B NAC CMS coder command list compile CRC DACT database device device address dialer disable download EEPROM emergency enable EPROM Y 2 A circuit connected directly to initiating devices that signals a trouble condition upon an open condition on the circuit All devices wired on the circuit to continue to operate up to the location of a break Similar to Styles A B C amp D integrity monitoring A circuit connected directly to notification appliances that signals a trouble condition upon an open or shorted condition on the circuit All appliances wired on the circuit to continue to operate up to the location of a break Similar to Styles W X amp Y integrity monitoring Central monitoring station A device that p
210. ed pair wires SDU programming When configuring the system for this application you ll need to configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the SDU For this application set the Lock Type to Strike ACDB operation Note that a CRC configured and programmed for intermittent lock use cannot support an open schedule a period when the lock is kept open Such a schedule would quickly drain the CRC battery and the lock would close You should document the CRC configuration and include this in your project plans Make a copy of this documentation available to the site security staff who will use the ADCB to create and assign schedules EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Power from an AC source Description of the application By AC power we mean that the CRC provides the power to operate the electric door strike or maglock by using a 16 5 Vac transformer model CRCXF This supply can provide continuous power to the door strike or maglock and also power the CRC Using an AC source Limits power drawn from the control panel Supports continuous duty locks e Supports schedules with unlock periods Note Be sure to check the installation sheet for the CRC and CRCXM Card Reader Controller Installation Sheet P N 387625 for a list of applications that prohibit the use of the CRCXF A typical CRC using AC power is shown in Figure 3 14 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 39
211. emergency reported in the building The building manager has directed the elevators to the lobby Please exit the building when you reach the lobby Stairwell message text Female Voice Please continue down the stairs to your assigned re entry floor or the lobby Do not attempt to use the elevators Do Not Enter message text Male Voice Do not enter this area This is not an exit An emergency has been reported in this section of the building Please exit the building using a marked fire exit EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Message and tone storage The prerecorded messages and tone sequences are stored in a digital format in the 3 ASU Audio Source Unit internal memory When the message and tone library exceeds two minutes in total length a 3 ASUMX 32 Expansion Memory card must be installed in the 3 ASU The 3 ASUXM 32 provides additional storage space for up to 32 minutes of messages Messages and tone sequences are created and downloaded directly into the Audio Source Unit using the SDU and a computer equipped with a compatible sound card EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 41 System overview Firefighter phone system 1 42 Five phone off hook limit The circuitry on the 3 FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit can support up to five telephones off hook in addition to the master handset at the 3 FTCU at any one time The flexibility of the E
212. en up the circuit Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module Bells and horns 1 2 Visual Inspection Activate the circuit Verify all indicating appliances operating properly Open up the circuit Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 23 Power up and testing Record of completion When the system has been tested and found to operate satisfactorily make a copy and fill out the Record of Completion on the following pages and mount it near the fire alarm panel or give it to the building representative 6 24 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Power up and testing Record of Completion Protected Property Name Authority Having Jurisdiction Address Address Representative Phone Record of System Installation This system has been installed in accordance with the NFPA standards listed below was inspected by on and includes the devices listed below and has been in service since NFPA 72 Year 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 circle all that apply maa NFPA 70 National Electrical Code Article 760 Manufacturer s Instructions Other specify Record of System Operation All operational features and functions of this system were tested by and found to be operating properly and in accordance with the requirements of
213. er bar code card and uses the bar code reader Proximity Bar code Proximity Bar code card card card card reader reader reader reader Outside card readers Inside card readers Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 10 Multiple card readers EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Card reader This application works best with card readers that support dual LED control The CRC uses the second LED or LED state to signal the visitor that the escort must badge in before access 15 granted Hardware configuration The proximity card reader and barcode card reader are connected to the same terminals of the CRC SDU programming When an escorted visitor tries to enter a controlled area without an employee the CRC generates an access denied escort event You can select a predefined command list that the CPU executes in response to this event ACDB operation Like employees visitors must be assigned an access level using the ACDB The site security officer can elect to assign the same access level to all visitor cards or assign different access levels to ranges of visitor cards EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 31 Access control applications Muster 3 32 Description of the application The muster application can be used to determine who has exited the building in the event of an evacuation During normal oper
214. es as defined in UL 864 Notification zone area covered by notification appliances that are activated simultaneously Figure 5 1 shows a typical application of the 3 IDC8 4 module to support two notification zones In this example power is being supplied from the EST3 rail and the jumpers JP1 through JP4 are set accordingly It is also possible to create a similar application that uses external power supplied to NAC 1 2 IN and NAC 5 6 IN Refer to the 3 IDC8 4 installation sheet for wiring details and the required jumper settings In Figure 5 1 both zones are configured with separate NAC circuits for audible and visible appliances NAC 1 and NAC 5 are programmed as visible device types and NAC 2 and NAC 6 as audible device types This means that the signal silence function can be configured to silence only the horns Separating the visible and audible devices 1s optional and may not be required for your project Refer to the Genesis Signal Master installation sheet for additional configurations and wiring details EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation NAC 1 Device type Visible Label Zone 1 Strobes NAC 2 DO D DE Device type Audible E LI pe iret fpem Label Zone 1 Horns LJ LJ
215. es called the network audio riser The figure shows the system in the normal page mode with the zoned audio amplifiers processing EVAC signals on the 1st and 3rd levels a page signal on the 2nd level and the alert signal on the 4th level EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 11 System overview Eight multiplexed audio channels on a two wire circuit 25 70 VRMS supervised e audio circuit dH O 9 n e e EOLR T e Local tone T e generator ALERT e 25 70 VRMS supervised audio circuit H e EOLR L t e Local tone e generator 2 EVAC 5 5 25 70 VRMS supervised 5 e audio circuit t 2 i e EOLR Local tone P all ADM e generator PAGE e 25 70 VRMS supervised i audio circuit n e IT 5 i EOLR e e Local tone e generator EVAC Network audio signals 5 2 Alert B Audio source unit Auxiliary audio signal to audio General1 b General channel connection gt General3 0 General4 lt gt Normal mode Audio signal distribution during special paging modes Page BERBER Page m E a Evac Alert a Alert Alert a Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary General1 General1 a General1 a General General2 General2 a General2 a General2 General3 Ge
216. es that can be transmitted from the 3 MODCOM Give this report to the appropriate CMS Testing transmission After the CMS has programmed the central monitoring database perform transmission tests as required by the AHJ and CMS Note Transmission failures are latched at the panel This means that you must reset the panel in order to clear them EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 39 Installation 3 SAC Security Access Control module Product description The 3 SAC is a high speed RS 485 module used to support Card Reader Controller modules and Keypad Display modules Events are passed to the 3 SAC module then passed to the CPU for alarm processing The 3 SAC has two sets of circuit terminals and is capable of Class A or Class B configuration Each Class B circuit can handle 31 devices for a total of 62 devices per module Class A circuits can handle 30 devices total SAC bus The 3 SAC Security Access Control module supports the SAC bus an RS 485 communication line When properly constructed the SAC bus runs over longer distances supports more drops and 15 more immune to noise than RS 232 line The SAC bus consists of two lines SAC bus e SAC bus Recommended cabling Since our security and access control devices require 24 Vdc we suggest that you always use a four wire cable for the SAC bus and a 24 Vdc power supply For the data wires we suggest unshielded twisted pair with greater than 6 t
217. ese conditions the battery would not have enough time to charge and keep up with the drain For heavy or continuous duty applications refer to the topic Power for continuous locks presented in this chapter A typical application using CRC battery power is shown in Figure 3 13 below Control panel Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration Card x reader Strike x prog 9 ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 13 CRC controlling an intermittent strike EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 37 Access control applications 3 38 The figure shows the charging power coming from the 3 PPS M in the control panel The access control system requires a 24 Vdc power supply to power the CRC and to charge its battery The 3 SAC connects to the CRC through the SAC bus When an authorized card is read at a card reader the CRC provides power from its internal battery to the door strike and unlocks the door Power supply Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the CRC Refer to the installation sheet for correct jumper settings Configure the input power as DC Configure the output power as intermittent Hardware configuration The control panel must contain the following rail modules e 3 SAC Security Access Control module e 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply module The 3 SAC module supports the SAC bus Power for the CRC is taken from the 3 PPS M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twist
218. esource profile is imported into the KDC program during installation KDC Keypad Display Configuration program The Keypad Display Configuration KDC program lets the system user define and maintain a database of information about KPDISPs users and access levels This is part of the overall security database The KDC program runs on the user s PC Additions or updates to the security database can be transmitted to the KPDISP units in two ways The first method is via modem and dial up telephone line to the3 MODCOM The information is then routed to the CPU through the correct 3 SACS and finally to the affected KPDISP units The second method is by connecting the user s PC directly to the CPU using an RS 232 cable The connection is made between the PC s COMI port and any of the RS 232 terminals on the CPU As in the first method after reaching the CPU additions and changes are routed through the correct 3 SACS to the affected KPDISPs EST3 Installation and Service Manual 2 5 Security applications 2 6 Note Fire and security functionality cannot be programmed into a control panel from a remote location You must perform all panel programming on site Changes to the security database have no impact on the parameters or operations of listed fire system equipment When the site includes an access control system the Access Control Database ACDB program is used in place of the KDC The ACDB includes the required KDC function
219. ess events the command list should include commands that turn off the devices EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Two person rule Description of the application A two person rule ensures that no staff member can be ina controlled area alone A CRC operating under two person rule prevents the entrance of a single person into the controlled area When two people are present in the area one cannot exit without the other The controlled area can have a single entrance or multiple entrances The network coordinates user information between the CRCS that serve a common area A typical two person rule application is shown in Figure 3 19 below EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 47 Access control applications Control panel 3 SAC 3 PPS M SAC bus Entrance 1 CR outside CR inside Controlled room CR outside Entrance 2 Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC programming Figure 3 19 Two person rule Card reader This application works best with card readers that support dual LED control The CRC uses the second LED or LED state to signal the cardholder that a second person must badge in or out of the controlled area Hardware configuration The control panel must contain the following rail modules e 3 SAC Security Access Control module e 3 Primary Power Supply module 3 48 EST3 Installation and
220. essable Analog communication module EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 77 Service and troubleshooting 8 78 Addressable Analog circuit capacitance problems are typically caused by long wire runs ground faults on the Addressable Analog circuit improper T taps or improper shielding If shielded wire is used the shield must be treated as a third conductor It must be free of all ground faults and have continuity throughout If the wire capacitance is too large for the run length the only remedies are to replace the wire with a cable having a lower capacitance per foot or install additional Addressable Analog modules dividing the circuit into acceptable lengths Ground faults Eliminating ground faults on the Addressable Analog circuit reduces the amount of capacitance on the Addressable Analog wiring Verify the Addressable Analog circuit is free of ground faults Correcting addressable analog circuit wiring problems If the Addressable Analog circuit 15 wired with improper T taps Or excessive capacitance corrective measures include Designing the Addressable Analog circuit properly and re pulling the wire e Balancing the circuit Balancing the circuit can help in some cases but is not a substitute for proper wiring practice If circuit balancing is required call Technical Services for additional information EST3 Installation and Service Manual Appendix A System addresses Summary This appendix provide
221. etwork and audio communications Application and firmware downloading over the network or from a single point e Network wide control routing Form C alarm supervisory and trouble relay contacts Refer to the release notes for the latest information regarding specifications and capabilities Minimum system requirements NFPA 72 system classification Required control equipment Protected Premises Cabinet with a CPU Central Processor Local module one LCD Main LCD Display module one 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply and Monitor appropriate batteries plus appropriate initiating device circuits and notification appliance circuits Auxiliary Add a 3 OPS Off Premises Signal or module or a correctly configured and Remote Station programmed 3 MODCOM Modem or Communicator module to the protected Proprietary Protected premises system Premises System construction The EST3 system is assembled in layers as shown in Figure 1 1 The cabinet 1 houses all the system components A variety of cabinets are available for as few as 5 and as many as 21 modules A 3 RCC14 cabinet is illustrated in Figure 1 1 Mounted directly to the cabinets are the rail chassis assemblies 2 of which there are three types rail audio and audio with telephone The most common chassis is the rail chassis which provides mounting and electrical connections for the local rail modules LRMs 4 Mounted on the rear of the chassis are the cabi
222. evice s chain position and the cursor will move over that device entry in the main list Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics Click Here to Select SDC Circuit Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card Click Here to Select Cabinet DSDC Diagnostics LPC Card BLDG1_LEVEL3 siG CIRCUIT 1 5 Message Counters Device Trouble Trouble Tables Device Chains Click Here to Enter Current Chain List Chain Response List Device Reponse List Communicating a Specific Device Current Chain List Chain Response List Device Response List Communicating List Device Chains Tab Column Totals Total Total S el e cted Position uj ji Position Device s Position TSCRN2 CDR Figure 8 18 Device chains dialog box Current chain list The Current Chain List displays the sequence of Signature devices in the chain or sub chain that was being created when the mapping failure occurred Chain response list The Chain Response List displays the sequence of Signature devices in the main chain when the mapping failure occurred Device response list The Device Response List displays the sequence of Signature devices in a sub chain that was being created when the mapping failure occurred 8 56 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Communicating list The Communicating List displays a list of all Signature devices seen by the Signature controller module
223. f the 3 SAC modules plus the configuration of all CRC devices on the SAC busses CRC modules can be configured to execute a specific predefined command list when a specific access control event occurs You write the command lists in the SDU and assign them to CRC events when you configure the CRC module EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Partitions are fundamental groups used with access control systems To use such access control features as two man rule muster or anti passback CRCs must belong to the same partition All partitions are created and defined in the SDU and each CRC can be assigned to a partition For the 3 MODCOM module the SDU determines the dialer and modem parameters defines the receivers and accounts and assigns each account to the correct receiver These settings control CMS reporting and ACDB download operation Finally the SDU includes the RPM tool described earlier in this topic ACDB operation The ACDB program lets you create and revise your access control database Parameters stored in the database identify cardholders schedules and holidays and assign access privileges The SDU includes a tool called the Resource Profile Manager RPM The RPM lets you create a resource profile for each company using the system for access control purposes During setup of the ACDB program you import the resource profile created by the RPM This defines the system devices for
224. finition Utility program 8 65 Using DSDC status 8 65 Displaying the current SDC status 8 65 Displaying a log of current SDC status events 8 67 Displaying the SDC in process progress chart 8 68 Addressable analog diagnostic tools 8 70 System definition utility 8 70 Problem solving hints 8 72 3 AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller 8 74 Substituting 3 AADC1 local rail modules 8 74 Addressable analog device troubleshooting 8 75 Wiring problems 8 77 Correcting addressable analog circuit wiring problems 8 78 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Overview Service and troubleshooting Maintenance philosophy The EST3 life safety system consists of modular assemblies utilizing surface mount technology SMT for easy installation and maintenance SMT provides high reliability but prohibits component level field repairs For these and other reasons the maintenance philosophy consists of fault isolating to the circuit card assembly removing the defective circuit card and then replacing it with a spare Service and repair of EST3 system components centers around the following assumptions 1 Qualified technicians possessing a complete understanding of the system hardware and functions will perform maintenance 2 Only certified maintenance technicians will service the equipment 3 Maintenance technicians will have a ready available supply of replacement parts Problem cl
225. g the EVAC or Alert signals i e the stairwells In the fourth column of Figure 1 17 the stairwells receive the Page signal when the All Call Minus command is used and do not automatically receive either the EVAC or Alert signals EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview The Call command directs the page signal to all areas of the building as illustrated in the last column of Figure 1 17 Any combination of floors and stairwells could be selected to receive the page by manually selecting the audio zones on the audio zone select control display module Notice that at no time does any area receiving a signal have its signal interrupted by any page command function Evacuation EVAC channel The EVAC channel always carries a signal designed to notify the occupants they must leave the facility The evacuation signal may take the form of a textual message a variety of audio tones or an audio tone modulated by the standard 3 3 3 evacuation pattern or any combination of these signals The EVAC channel is preprogrammed and activated by the system in response to an alarm The EVAC signal is automatically sent to the areas that are in danger and require immediate evacuation The EVAC channel has priority over all channels signals except for the Page channel The alarm silence function automatically silences the EVAC channel when an operator presses the Alarm Silence switch Alert channel The Alert channel always ca
226. gramming requirements Create message rules that send identical messages to both accounts e Onsystem startup disable the accounts on the backup 3 MODCOM On activation of a panel comm fault line fault or LRM comm fault disable the primary accounts and enable the backup accounts ACDB requirements Additional steps are required when the project includes reporting to a CMS that requires translation from a Cardholder ID to a cardholder name In this situation the ACDB user must enter a User ID name for both CMS Accounts the primary and backup accounts EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 31 Installation 5 32 These entries are made on the System tab of the Cardholder tab The ACDB user should enter a User ID for each CMS Account Compatibility EST3 versions The 3 MODCOM Module will operate with EST3 Version 3 0 or above Do not use this communication module with earlier versions Receiver compatibility Refer to the EST3 ULI ULC Compatibility Lists P N 3100427 for a list of compatible receivers Transmission protocols The 3 MODCOM is capable of transmitting messages in five formats or protocols Contact ID SIA DCS SIA P2 3 1 Pulse Format e SIA P3 4 2 Pulse Format 3 MODCOMP only formats consist of short predefined messages Most contain several parameters some of which are optional Check with your dialer receiver and central monitoring station software
227. h conductor Measure the resistance between conductors The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are connected to the circuit The circuit resistance between conductors should be approximately 4 7 when devices are installed Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite Verify the continuity of each conductor Each conductor should measure between 0 and 25 0 Measure the resistance between conductors The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are installed on the circuit The circuit resistance between conductors should be approximately 15 kO with SIGA CC1 Single Input Signal Modules and the end of line resistor correctly installed Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite EST3 uses RS485 circuits for the Network data riser Network audio riser SAC bus Verify the continuity of each conductor Each conductor should measure between 0 and 50 Measure the resistance between conductors The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are connected to the circuit The circuit resistance between conductors should be approximately 50 O when devices are installed Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground The cir
228. han 500 000 then enter the job in 3 SDU to determine the exact size requirement size of CABxx bin file If result on line Z is still greater than 500 000 reduce the number of points on the panel for example by splitting the panel into two panels EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 27 System calculations Fiber optic cable worksheet The fiber optic cable worksheet should be used to verify that the light attenuation factors do not exceed the fiber optic budget for any fiber optic cable segment Notes The contractor installing the fiber optic cable provides items A B and D Fiber optic budget must be greater than the total link loss F Table B 12 Fiber Optic Cable Worksheet Link Name A B Cable loss Distance per unit Feet distance Km dB Ft Miles dB Km dB Mi B 28 D E F Number of Contingency Total Link Loss Splices Splices dB C 2 D E EST3 Installation and Service Manual Appendix C Listing requirements Summary This appendix describes the requirements your EST3 system must meet in order to conform to UL or ULC listings Content standards C 2 Minimum requirements for UL security applications C 3 Local mercantile Grade A premises C 3 Police station connected Grade A with basic line security C 3 Central station Grade A C 4 Central station Grade B C 5 Central station Grade C C 6 Proprietary Grade A C 7 Proprietary Grade AA C 7 Access co
229. he nature of the trouble will appear in the Latching Troubles By Device Address window Clicking on the device will reveal a list of the trouble conditions affecting that device Click the device a second time to remove the trouble listing EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 59 Service and troubleshooting Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics Click Here to Select SDC Circuit Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card Click Here to Select Cabinet DSDC Diagnostics BLDG1_LEVEL3 siG ciRCUIT 1 Device Trouble Tab Mapping Errors Device Chains Device Trouble Trouble Tables j Latching Troubles By Device Address Device Trouble Message TSCRN4 CDR Figure 8 20 Device trouble dialog box Table 8 37 below lists the Signature Detector trouble messages and possible causes and solutions Table 8 38 lists the Signature Module trouble messages and possible causes and solutions Table 8 37 Signature detector trouble messages Trouble message Possible cause Possible solution External Device Line Short Defective Detector Replace Detector External Device Line Open Defective Detector Replace Detector Error XMIT Light Detector Dirty Clean detector Device switched to short after Short on Signature data Locate and remove cause of isolator relay operated circuit short ESK Value Too Low 1 Dirty Detector 1 Clean Detector 2 Bad lon Chamber 2 Replace Detector ESK Slope Too High 1 Dirty Detector 1
230. he wire segments installed in the data circuit Signature Controller Module WIRECALC3 CDR The total length of all the cable installed in the Signature data circuit can not exceed the values listed below Wire Size Wire type 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG Twisted pair 13 157 ft 13 888 ft 20 000 ft 4 010 m 4 233 m 6 096 m Twisted shielded 5 952 ft 6 098 ft 8 621 ft pair 1 814 m 1 859 m 2 628 m Non twisted 20 000 ft 20 000 ft 20 000 ft non shielded pair 6 096 m 6 096 m 6 096 m If the cable manufacturer s data indicates the capacitance per foot of the cable the following method may be used to determine the maximum total loop length Note In no case may the total loop length of a Signature data circuit exceed 20 000 feet 6 098 meters Lmax 500 000 Cpf where Lmax maximum total cable length in feet e Cpf Cable capacitance in picofarads per foot Note A short circuit on a Signature data circuit can disable the entire circuit In order to limit the effect of a single short circuit on the SDC SIGA IB Isolator Bases or SIGA IM Isolator modules can be installed at strategic points in the circuit EST3 Installation and Service Manual System calculations Notification appliance circuit calculations Introduction This topic shows you how to determine the maximum cable length of a notification appliance circuit NAC for a given number of appliances Two methods are presented worksheet and e
231. hen re install a different type detector in the same base The advanced features of the Signature controller module perform a number of advanced operations These operations are not always apparent from the panel controller Table 8 26 lists a number of SDC conditions and describes the circuit s operation Operation 1 The system displays a trouble with the detector s label or address when the detector is removed 2 The system restores completely when the detector is re installed in its original base 1 The system displays a trouble with the module s label or address when the device is disconnected 2 The panel restores completely when the device is re installed in its original location 1 The system displays a trouble with the detector s label or address when the detector is removed 2 When the new detector is installed the Signature controller module re maps the circuit replacing the S N of the old detector with the S N of the new detector All the old detector s sensitivity and verification settings are transferred to the new detector The system will return to normal when mapping is finished 1 The system displays a trouble with the device s label or address when the device is disconnected 2 When the new device is installed the Signature controller module re maps the circuit replacing the S N of the old device with the S N of the new device If the devices are modules not pull stations the old module s person
232. her door In an emergency customers must press the REX switch to unlock the door When the REX switch is activated the CRC sounds the CRCSND horn and sends a security alarm event to the panel It does not unlock the door immediately thus allowing site staff time to investigate The CRC waits for a specific interval of time before unlocking the door The typical delay time is 15 seconds however you may be able to use a delay of up to 30 seconds with the approval of the AHJ The horn continues to sound for a specific period of time or until the CRC is reset After the delay time passes the CRC unlocks the door and latches it in the unlocked state The CRC must be reset in order to relock the door and silence the horn To reset the CRC site staff must use a valid badge at the card reader The CRC also activates the CRCSND horn if the door is opened without badging For example if the door is forced open from the outside the CRCSND activates even though the REX switch has not been pressed Many codes require that delayed egress doors unlock during a fire alarm or when the panel is in trouble This requirement allows occupants to evacuate the site immediately when a fire is detected or when the panel loses its ability to detect a fire or sound the alarm Figure 3 5 shows a delayed egress door with inside and outside card readers and a request to exit switch The CRC uses a door contact switch to determine the position of the door
233. hing function When the page command ends amplifiers automatically switch back to the source channel that was active 1f any prior to the page command Five types of page commands are available on the network The first four page commands are available simply by pressing a single switch on the front of the 3 ASU These are the paging functions most commonly used in an emergency situation 1 The Call command temporarily transfers all amplifiers to the Page channel while the page is active Call distributes the page signal to every amplifier in the system 2 The Page to EVAC command temporarily transfers the Page signal to all amplifiers actively connected to the EVAC channel All EVAC amplifiers then receive and distribute the Page signal 3 The Page to Alert command temporarily transfers the Page signal to all amplifiers actively connected to the Alert channel Alert amplifiers then receive and distribute the page signal 4 The All Call Minus command temporarily transfers the page signal to all amplifiers except those connected to the EVAC and Alert channels 5 Selective Page temporarily transfers the selected amplifiers to the Page channel while the page is activate distributing the page signal only to selected audio zones EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 35 System overview 1 36 amplifiers Audio zones are selected manually by the operator using the LED Switch displays An example of how
234. ice initiates the appropriate system responses Open up the circuit Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module Waterflow switches l Visual inspection EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 21 Power up and testing 2 Activate sprinkler test valve Refer to Sprinkler system test procedure 3 Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location message 15 displayed on the LCD module Verify the device initiates the appropriate system responses 4 Open up the circuit Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module 6 22 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Power up and testing Notification appliance testing The procedures listed in the following sections should be performed on the notification appliances connected to the system in conjunction with the procedures in Detector input module and output module initial and reacceptance testing These procedures are designed to test the notification appliances and the network applications programming Visual devices 1 Visual Inspection 2 Activate the circuit Verify all indicating appliances operating properly 3 Open up the circuit Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module Speakers 1 Visual Inspection 2 Activate the circuit Verify all indicating appliances operating properly 3 Op
235. ices operate normally These devices are in trouble Figure 8 6 Break in circuit between devices 6 and 8 Referring again to Figure 8 6 a wire break or intermittent connection between devices 6 and 8 is the most probable cause EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 37 Service and troubleshooting 8 38 of the failure Other possible but unlikely causes with the same symptoms include device failure of only devices 9 15 and devices 9 15 not loaded in the Signature module s database or not properly configured using the Signature portion of the data entry program Short circuit conditions Short circuit conditions require selective isolation of portions of the data circuit to systematically narrow down the fault s location A shorted circuit will typically show a trouble condition on all devices as illustrated in Figure 8 7 Signature ontrolle All devices in trouble Figure 8 7 Wiring Short On device 13 Wiring Short To isolate the short open the circuit at a location that will disconnect approximately 50 of the installed devices as shown in Figure 8 8 Signature ontrolle 7 Opening circuit puc d Devices return to operation Devices remain in trouble Figure 8 8 Isolating circuit short If some of the devices restore in Figure 8 8 the short is located on the portion of the circuit that has been disconnected If no devices restore when the circuit 15 opened the short has been isolated to
236. ices per module Class A circuits can include 30 devices total In Figure 3 1 we show a Class B bus with a CRC Card Reader Controller module 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator module The 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator module has both modem and dialer functions It can transmit and receive information The 3 MODCOM can transmit alarm supervisory or trouble messages to a remote central monitoring station using one or two telephone lines A variation of the module 3 MODCOMP can transmit pager messages to a paging company using the TAP protocol The module can also receive information sent over telephone lines by the Access Control Database ACDB program SAC bus Since our security and access control devices require 24 Vdc we suggest that you always use a four wire cable for the SAC bus and a 24 Vdc power supply For the data wires use unshielded twisted pair with greater than 6 twists per foot in 14 to 22 AWG 1 50 to 0 25 sq mm For the power wires use 14 or 16 AWG You can use a four conductor cable with an overall jacket containing solid 2 19 AWG and 2 16 AWG for the SAC bus EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 3 Access control applications 3 4 The maximum run from a CRC to the 3 SAC is 4 000 ft 1 220 m at 25 pF ft The maximum total capacitance of the run is 0 1 and the maximum total resistance is 52 CRC Card Reader Controller The Card Reader Controller CRC module performs all access decision pro
237. ices that are present in the chain being processed 2 Compare the serial numbers or short addresses with the actual wiring to identify the problem This indicates that devices not communicating properly 1 Click the Communication List tab to see a list of the devices that are communicating 2 Compare the serial numbers or short addresses with the actual wiring in order to identify the conflict Displaying device chain errors A chain is a list of devices connected between the Signature controller module and a device being interrogated during circuit mapping The chains and sub chains created during the mapping process evolve into the circuit map Should a circuit fail to map properly further insight into the problem may be gained by investigating the devices making up individual chains and sub chains EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 55 Service and troubleshooting To display a chain generated during the failed mapping process click the Device Chains tab Four categories of device chains are listed Each list displays the short address or serial number of the devices in the chain The total number of entries in each list 1s indicated at the bottom of the list To determine the position of a specific Signature device in the chain click the small data entry box at the top of each column and enter the device s short address or serial number The position field at the bottom of the column will indicate the selected d
238. ignature diagnostic sequence Table 8 34 lists the suggested sequence when using the Signature Diagnostic tools to isolate problems on a Signature Data Circuit and problems with individual Signature devices Table 8 34 Signature troubleshooting tool sequence SDC circuit faults Signature device faults 1 Mapping Errors 1 Device Tables 2 Device Chains 2 Trouble Tables 3 Message Counters Displaying mapping errors Mapping errors prevent the system from generating a successful Signature Data Circuit map To display errors generated during the mapping process click the Mapping Errors tab The Mapping EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Errors text box lists the eight 8 most recent mapping errors The Total Errors field lists the total number of mapping errors that have been identified Clicking on an error in the list highlights the error and displays the appropriate troubleshooting tip in the lower Troubleshooting Tips text box Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics Click Here to Select SDC Circuit Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card Click Here to Select Cabinet DSDC Diagnostics Mapping Errors Tab Mapping Error Total Errors 0 Mapping Error Window Trouble Shooting Tips Troubleshooting Tips Window Total Errors Field TSCRN1 CDR Figure 8 17 Mapping errors dialog box Table 8 35 Mapping error messages Message Suggested corrective action The mapping
239. ilure of GE Security products beyond the cost of repair or replacement of any defective products GE Security reserves the right to make product improvements and change product specifications at any time While every precaution has been taken during the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents GE Security assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions FCC warning This equipment can generate and radiate radio frequency energy If this equipment is not installed in accordance with this manual it may cause interference to radio communications This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits for Class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules These rules are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when this equipment is operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Industry Canada information Note The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to
240. in Note Timed anti passback cannot be used with a muster application since the system automatically logs cardholders out of the partition defeating muster accounting To implement anti passback a separate CRC is required at each doorway in the controlled partition Each doorway requires an outside card reader Strict and logged anti passback applications also require an inside reader at every doorway Timed anti passback does not require the use of an inside card reader A typical anti passback application is shown in Figure 3 2 below The figure shows a building with a perimeter fence It would be easy for an employee to pass his access card to an unauthorized individual through the fence thereby allowing access Configuring the access control system for anti passback operation can help prevent this from happening EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 11 Access control applications Entrance turnstile Outside reader Inside reader Perimeter fence Reader circuit Lock circuit SITE Building entrance SAC bus Main building Control panel Emergency exit Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 2 Anti passback Hardware configuration The control panel must contain a 3 SAC Security Access Control module The 3 SAC module supports the SAC bus Power for the CRC can be taken from the 3 PPS M and routed with the data lines
241. in a cable composed of two twisted pair wires the SAC bus 3 12 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications SDU programming If the CRC is to be used for anti passback this must be configured using the SDU The CRC configuration dialogs let you select the type of anti passback you want to use e None Logged Timed e Strict You can also assign a predefined command list to various access granted or access denied events including the anti passback events Access granted anti passback Access denied anti passback The CPU runs the command list you specify when either of these events occurs ACDB programming With timed anti passback the cardholder is automatically marked out after a specified period of time This period is defined by the ACDB The period can be set from 0 through 255 minutes 4 hours and 15 minutes EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 13 Access control applications Central monitoring station 3 14 Description of the application An access control system can transmit different kinds of event information to a central monitoring station CMS The basics for such a system are shown in Figure 3 3 Card reader Control panel 3 SAC 3 MODCOM Access denied event Programmed rules for transmission Formatted CMS message Telephone line Other factors n Power supply Hardware configuration Central monitoring s
242. inal primary and booster power supply voltages Test Point Voltage Rail Power 25 26 4 Vdc w AC power on Auxiliary Power 25 26 4 Vdc w AC power on Battery 27 3 V battery under charge 25 Table 8 2 Primary Power Supply module troubleshooting Problem Possible cause Supply will not operate from 1 AC line fuse F2 3 15A slow blow open AG line 2 Rectified DC fuse F3 3 15A slow blow open RX or TX LED OFF Defective or poor connection on ribbon cable between No communication between 3 PSMON and 3 PPS and op 3 PSMON Defective 3 PPS Defective Auxiliary and Rail voltage low Excessive load causing supply to fold back Power Cable between 3 PSMON and 3 PPS loose or defective oem S Booster Supply failure causing primary supply to fold back Batteries will not charge System in alarm mode Fuse F1 8A on 3 PPS open 30 to 60 Ah battery installed 10 to 29 Ah battery specified in SDU Battery shorted oN Battery not wired to power supplies correctly only wired to BPS M System will not operate on 1 Battery voltage below 18 Vdc system automatically turns off batteries when batteries too low to properly operate system Fuse F1 8A on 3 PPS open Batteries connected before AC power energized Battery temperature too high a A N Defective batteries 8 8 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting 3 BPS M Booster Power Supply module The transm
243. ingle audio zone typically a floor of a high rise building Using the appropriate Signature modules the amplifier s output can be divided into several zones The output circuit can be configured for either Class A or Class B wiring Output wattage The output rating of an amplifier is determined by the speaker load it is required to drive and any expansion or safety factor required The speaker load is determined by adding up the value of all the wattage taps selected on each speaker connected to the amplifier For a conservative approach use the highest wattage tap available on each speaker This insures there is enough head room to adjust speaker taps to compensate for any installation variables such as sound absorbing furniture etc Output voltage Zoned amplifiers are available with either a 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms output The 25 Vrms output amplifiers are primarily used in retrofit applications that previously had 25 Vrms speakers installed 70 Vrms output amplifiers are recommended for new installations The output circuits of a 70 Vrms amplifier can be run eight times farther than a 25 Vrms amplifier given the same load Note If all the system wiring is required to be power limited you may use any 20 40 or 95 watt amplifier with either a 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms output Wiring considerations Refer to Appendix B of this manual for wire distance calculations and other wiring considerations EST3 Installation and Service Manual
244. interface requirements Depending on the installed equipment the largest backbox available can have 19 module displays installed Will this provide enough capacity for the required control display module functions Distance between cabinets Does the wiring length between any three cabinets exceed 5 000 ft 1 524 m System capacity of 64 cabinets per network Does the proposed system require more than 64 cabinets Cost of installation labor and materials Is it cheaper to install a smaller cabinet and service the floor above and below the floor EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 29 System overview of installation or install a larger cabinet with more equipment and wire two floors above and two floors below the cabinet floor Feature function domain The EST3 life safety system utilizes peer to peer networking technology No single cabinet is in control of the network Peer to peer networking permits multiple control locations within a single network The feature function domain is defined as the group of cabinets that are affected when the feature or function 15 activated A network cabinet may be part of one more groups Multiple control locations are permitted for any group Three types of domains are available Local The feature function affects only the cabinet on which the LCD module is installed Group The feature function affects a predefined group of cabinets on the network Global The feature func
245. ion and Service Manual 4 9 Centralized audio applications URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module The Universal Riser Supervisory Module URSM provides open and short circuit and amplifier supervision of two risers audio 25 or 70 Vrms and or firefighter telephone riser A form C dry relay contact is provided for each riser circuit s trouble annunciation Ground fault detection is also provided for the risers using a GFD Ground Fault Detector EST IN V PIN 14012 TEN REVA me mum me o mm l 526 0800 47 56 0D 0 38 97 30 13 LEEEEEEEEELLTI LA CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 1 TROUBLE TROUBLE TELEPHONE TELEPHONE y 25V AUDIO 25V AUDIO 70V AUDIO s AUDIO 4 E CHANNEL2 CHANNEL 1 CURSMB CDR Figure 4 5 URSM Application The URSM is required on 70 Vrms audio system risers and 25 Vrms audio systems The URSM should be located in an equipment cabinet convenient to the end of the risers which has 24 Vdc power available URSM trouble contacts should be monitored with a SIGA CT2 module to signal riser trouble information back to the network The URSM riser inputs should be connected to a GFD which provides ground fault monitoring The GFD should be monitored with a SIGA CT1 module to signal riser ground fault conditions back to the network The and SIGA CT1 must be installed in the same enclosure and sho
246. ions Review off normal points Bypass or disable points Execute fire alarm panel commands Each KPDISP stores its portion of the security database You can create a security system that is operated via the LCD module alone or in combination with any Control LED display module See the topic Secure access EST3 Installation and Service Manual Security applications 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator module The 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator module has both modem and dialer functions It can transmit and receive information The 3 MODCOM can transmit alarm supervisory or trouble messages to a remote central monitoring station using one or two telephone lines A variation of the module 3 MODCOMP can transmit pager messages to a paging company using the TAP protocol The 3 MODCOMP remote paging feature is supplemental and is not supervised The module can also receive information sent over telephone lines by the Keypad Display Configuration program RPM Resource Profile Manager tool The Resource Profile Manager RPM tool is part of the SDU It uses the project database to let you create a separate resource profile for each company that will be using the security system The resource profile defines the security system for the KDC program It includes such information as The KPDISPs in the system e The routing required to access each KPDISP for downloads e Which KPDISPs can execute fire alarm system commands The r
247. ist Personality Fault List Unexpected Fault List Click Here to Reveal Additional Fault Lists Total Column Fault Count DSDC Diagnostics TSCRN5 CDR Figure 8 21 Trouble Tables dialog box Internal fault The Internal Fault List indicates an internal problem with a Signature Device or Module Refer to the Displaying Device Trouble section to determine the specific cause Device type fault The Device Type Fault List indicates that the device type entered in the SDU does not agree with the device type installed on the SDC Personality fault and sensitivity fault The Personality Fault List indicates that the personality code p code of a Signature module entered in the SDU does not agree with the p code of the module actually installed on the circuit The Sensitivity Fault List indicates that the sensitivity of a Signature detector entered in the SDU does not agree with the sensitivity of the detector actually installed on the circuit Personality and sensitivity faults should be corrected by the system and these faults should clear automatically Unexpected fault The Unexpected Fault List displays the serial number of devices which appear on the actual circuit but which were not listed in the SDU program EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 63 Service and troubleshooting 8 64 Communication fault The Communication Fault List indicates those Signature devices that are not
248. it TX and receive RX LEDs on the Booster Power Supply Monitor Module should flicker indicating normal two way communication activity with the CPU PSMONLED CDR The booster power supply voltages are indicated in Table 8 1 Table 8 3 lists common problems with the booster power supply and booster monitor module Table 8 3 Booster Power Supply module troubleshooting Problem Possible cause Supply will not operate from 1 AC line fuse F2 3 15A slow blow open Dee 2 Rectified DC fuse 3 15A slow blow open RX or TX LED OFF 1 Defective or poor connection on ribbon cable between No communication between 3 BPSMON and 3 BPS eo BPSMON and CRU 3 BPSMON defective 2 3 3 BPS defective Auxiliary and Rail voltage low 1 Excessive load causing supply to fold back 2 Power Cable between 3 BPSMON and 3 BPS loose or defective oO Booster Supply failure causing primary supply to fold back System will not operate on Battery voltage below 18 Vdc system automatically turns off batteries when batteries too low to properly operate system Fuse F1 8A on 3 BPS open Batteries connected before AC power energized Battery temperature too high a A N Defective batteries CPU Central Processor module The CPU controls all the communication and processing of information for modules located in its cabinet Token ring EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 9 Service and troubleshooting 8 10
249. it door is a door that is unlocked from the inside either by badging out or by opening the door If the door is opened without badging out it causes an immediate alarm Badging out bypasses the door for a specific period of time so no alarm event occurs A typical CRC application for emergency exit door is shown in Figure 3 7 below CRC Card Card reader reader outside inside Figure 3 7 Emergency exit door Note Refer to NFPA 101 and the local AHJ to determine the requirements for emergency exit applications Hardware configuration A CRC used for an emergency exit door requires the following additional hardware e CRCSND CRC Sounder Door contact The CRCSND is installed inside the CRC The sounder provides a local sound alarm Opening the door without badging out activates the CRCSND EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications The door contact is connected to the CRC via the input circuit SDU programming In the SDU you ll need to define the input circuit for the door contact as follows Device type Security P Monitor Delays None e Application Door Contact Personality Basic ACDB operation Two time periods are defined in the ACDB Emergency Exit Sounder Time and Bypass Time Emergency Exit Sounder Time is the number of seconds 0 through 255 the CRC Sounder sounds when an emergency exit door is opened without badging out When set to zer
250. itance 0 5uF Pre oer S Max Res 36 wIRZB 500 w o RZB additional Addressable Analog 2 Circuit 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Mex Ckt Capacitance 202uF d Traditional 2 Wire IDC 1 1 4 2 1 2 1 205 2 o 1 1 Ckt Res 500 restrictions a WARIS CDR RS 232 Peripheral Data Circuit 2 2 lt 2 220 2 2 Max length 50 Ft 15 2 M without modem 45252 T 18 AWG Twisted Shielded Telephone 3 135 353 9 3 N 4 000 Ft 1 220 M Max AC Mains not power limited o o eo N 230V 20A Max Fiber Optic Cable M 1 2 1 2 1 2 o 1 1 Jacket material must be rated for application Recommended cable manufacturers Atlas Wire and Cable Corp 133 S Van Norman Road Montebello CA 90640 213 723 2401 West Penn Wire Corp 2833 West Chestnut Street Box 762 Washington PA 15301 412 222 7060 Belden Wire and Cable Corp P O Box 1980 Richmond IN 47375 317 983 5200 BSCC 233 Florence Street Leominster MA 01453 Telephone 508 537 9138 Fax 508 537 8392 Remee Products Inc 186 North Main Street Florida NY 10921 5 4 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Table 5 1 Recommended cable manufacturer s part numbers Installation MFG ATLAS BELDEN BSCC REMEE WEST PENN Type FPL FPLP FPL FPLP FPL FPLP FPLP FPL FPLP 14 1 50 mm Twisted Pair Unshielded 218 14 1 1TP 9580 341402 N
251. itoring Station Burglar Alarm Systems CAN ULC S302 Standard for Installation and Classification of Burglar Alarm Systems for Financial and Commercial Premises Safes and Vaults CAN ULC S303 Standard for Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems CAN ULC S304 Standard for Central and Monitoring Station Burglar Alarm Units PLUS Requirements of state and local building codes and the local authority having jurisdiction EST3 Installation and Service Manual xiii Content xiv EST3 Installation and Service Manual Chapter 1 System overview Summary This chapter provides a descriptive overview of the components and subsystems that comprise a system Content System description 1 2 System features 1 3 Minimum system requirements 1 4 System construction 1 4 Audio subsystem description 1 6 Network audio riser wiring 1 6 Amplifiers 1 7 Backup amplifiers 1 8 3 ASU Audio Source Unit 1 9 Firefighter phone 1 15 Digital network subsystem 1 16 Network data riser wiring 1 16 Class B network data risers 1 16 Class A network data risers 1 17 Download connections 1 18 Downloading database files over the network 1 19 Foreign language support 1 22 Printer use with foreign languages 1 22 Bilingual language support 1 22 Display device language support 1 23 Signature series devices 1 26 Network applications 1 29 Network layout 1 29 Feature function domain 1
252. ity Access Control Module 3 MODCOM Modem Communication Module Telephone Distributor Resource profile Figure 3 1 Equipment required for a ACDB program CRC Card Reader Controller Output circuit Card reader lines Central monitoring station Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation basic access control system Equipment Here is a list of the equipment used in a basic networked access control system 3 2 3 Security Access Control module 3 MODCOM Modem Communication module SAC bus CRC Card Reader Controller EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Input circuit 1 e Input circuit 2 e Output circuit Card reader Lock e RPM Resource Profile Manager tool ACDB Access Control Database program 3 SAC Security Access Control module The 3 SAC Security Access Control rail module controls a high speed RS 485 circuit called the Security Access Control SAC bus The SAC bus supports fire security and access control devices The 3 SAC handles message traffic for these devices interfacing them with the CPU as required Events are passed from the devices to the 3 SAC module then to the CPU for alarm processing The 3 SAC has two sets of circuit terminals and is capable of Class A or Class B configuration Each Class B circuit can include 31 devices for a total of 62 dev
253. ive maintenance General 7 2 Before commencing testing notify all areas where the alarm sounds and off premises locations that receive alarm and trouble transmissions that testing is in progress Records of all testing and maintenance shall be kept on the protected premises for a period of at least five 5 years Required Tools e Slotted Screwdriver Insulated Digital multimeter e 1 1 KQ 1 W resistor 12 inch 30 5 cm jumper lead with alligator clips Panel Door Key In addition make sure you have the required system passwords If the system includes access control applications you ll need a construction card or other valid access card A complete check of installed field wiring and devices should be made at regular intervals in accordance with NFPA 72 and ULC 524 requirements This includes testing all alarm and supervisory alarm initiating devices and circuits and any off premise connections Panel operation should be verified in the alarm supervisory and trouble modes To ensure that the panel can be powered when primary power is lost the batteries should be periodically inspected tested and replaced as a minimum every 4 years EST3 Installation and Service Manual Preventive maintenance Preventive maintenance schedule Preventive maintenance schedule Testing Component Interval Test Procedure Manual Semiannually 1 Visual inspection ston 2 Put zone in Test mode 3 Activate mechanism
254. k data riser is to connect the isolated Network B port on one CPU module to the non isolated Network A port on another Any remote CPU modules connected to a local CPU module s Network B port is considered to be downstream from the local CPU module Any remote CPU modules connected to a local CPU module s Network A port is considered upstream from the local CPU module Additionally next and previous refer to the order in which remote CPU modules are electrically connected to a local CPU module Previous refers to the remote CPU module whose isolated Network B port connects to the local CPU module s non isolated Network A port Next refers to the remote CPU module whose non isolated Network A port connects to the local CPU module s isolated Network B port Note Since the data traveling the network data riser is bi directional out and in references are used to direct wire connections Class B network data risers In a Class B network a break or short in the network data riser wiring divides the network into separate independent networks Panels on the same side of the line fault will communicate with each other but not with panels across the line fault Figure 1 10 shows the wiring for a Class B network EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview B1 CAB1 B1 CAB2 B1 CAB3 B1 4 lle Mo d CPU 2 CPU
255. k mounting 5 22 racks equipment 4 3 reader terminal dummy loads 3 34 recommended spares list 8 4 record of completion 6 24 remote controls application 3 45 remote power source application 3 42 remote power supply wiring diagram 3 44 request to exit buttons 3 5 3 18 3 20 requirements for UL security applications C 3 resetting the 3 18 3 25 resistance of SAC bus 3 3 resource allocation 3 17 resource profiles 3 7 3 17 response lists 8 56 RPM 3 7 3 17 S SAC bus 3 SAC module 3 3 description 3 3 elevator control application wiring 3 23 EOL resistor 3 34 wiring 3 3 SAC bus power calculations B 21 SDU configuring 3 8 CRCSND programming 3 4 role in a security system 3 8 second card reader 3 26 security devices 3 5 selecting a page destination 1 35 selective page 1 35 sensitivity fault 8 63 sharing devices 3 17 short fault 8 64 SIGA AAxx 8 21 Signature detector troubleshooting 8 60 diagnostic tools 8 51 module troubleshooting 8 49 8 61 real time status 8 65 trouble tables 8 62 24 Signature controller module 3 46 Signature data circuit basic troubleshooting 8 37 branch length B 5 determining total length B 10 ground faults 8 39 operation 8 35 wire length B 5 Signature relays elevator control application 3 21 remote controls application 3 46 smart cards
256. l port that is shared with a PT 1S printer you must connect both devices using an as shown in the wiring diagram in this topic What you will need An initial startup version of the project database that contains a switch programmed to turn the amplifiers onto the Auxiliary channel See Creating an initial startup version of the project database An RMS voltmeter Fluke 83 or equivalent Adjusting the gain on the 3 ASU auxiliary input The 3 ASU auxiliary input gain adjustment is critical to the operation of this application Before adjusting the 3 ASU set each zoned amplifier module in the cabinet for their configured RMS output level See Adjusting amplifier output levels To adjust the gain on the 3 ASU auxiliary input 1 Connect the coded tone output on the CDR 3 directly to the 3 ASU auxiliary input by bypassing the duration relay 2 Setthe 3 ASU auxiliary input gain pot to the mid range position 3 Determine which zoned amplifier module requires the highest gain adjustment the module whose gain adjustment pot is turned the most counter clockwise Use this amplifier as the worst case amplifier 4 Disconnect the field wiring from all the amplifiers in the cabinet except for the worst case amplifier This is to prevent the CDR 3 s supervisory tone from being broadcast throughout the premises 5 Place an RMS meter across the worst case amplifier s TB2 and NAC B terminals 6 Press the
257. l testing Coordinate test with receiving location Verify receipt of all transmitted signals Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing EST3 Installation and Service Manual Preventive maintenance Signature device routine maintenance tips Detectors When removing one detector at a time wait 1 minute after replacing the first detector before removing the next detector This gives the system time to recognize and re map the first detector before generating a trouble condition caused by removing the second detector Modules Signature modules should be visually inspected to insure the physical installation is secure Functional testing of the module should be done regularly as required by the AHJ EST3 Installation and Service Manual 7 5 Preventive maintenance Signature detector cleaning procedure Signature detectors may be cleaned using a conventional vacuum cleaner with the detector cleaning tool P N SIGA ST installed on the end of the suction hose nominal 1 5 in 3 8 cm ID extension tubes The tool creates a high velocity vortex scrubbing action around the detector removing loose dust and debris which is subsequently drawn into the vacuum Note In order to avoid false alarms disable the detector being cleaned before using the detector cleaning tool l 2 Place cleaning tool Disable the detector to prevent false alarms Use the conventional vacuum cleaner brush attachment to remove any visible c
258. lamps operated as follows Select the Command Menus button to obtain the Main Menu Screen EST3 Installation and Service Manual Power up and testing Select Test to obtain the Test Menu screen then select Lamp Test 2 Perform a functional switch test Amplifier transfer panel ATP 1 Disconnect power amplifier output Verify amplifier riser trouble annunciated on panel Restore connection 2 Initiate an All Call page Verify that audio is available on all power amplifier outputs 3 Ifback up amplifiers provided create an amplifier failure and verify backup amp operates properly 4 Disconnect power from amplifier rack Initiate an Call page Verify that audio is available on all power amplifier outputs EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 17 Power up and testing Detector input module and output module testing The procedures listed in this section should be performed on the detectors input modules output modules and related accessories connected to each cabinet These procedures are designed to test the devices and the network applications programming Note The network configuration Signature Control module information must be downloaded into the network and Audio Source Unit using the System Definition Utility SDU program before starting testing Every circuit connected to the EST3 system should be visited and manually activated during the installation process to verify that 1 Th
259. larm Systems UL 611 or the Standard for Central Stations for Watchman Fire Alarm and Supervisory Services UL 827 The residential monitoring station shall comply with UL 611 UL 827 or both b Two or more private stations in places of business constantly open during the day located within 500 feet 152 m of the protected premises and commanding all public approaches to the premises EST3 Installation and Service Manual C 9 Listing requirements UL and ULC requirements UL ULC X X X X X X X X X X C 10 The following table describes the requirements your system must meet in order to conform to UL or ULC Requirement Partitioned security systems with central monitoring station reporting A partition that contains an EST3 panel equipped with a 3 MODCOM and local bell must be armed 24 hours a day and have limited high level access When FireWorks is used as the central monitoring station the EST3 panel to which it connects must be in a partition that is armed 24 hours a day and has limited high level access Closing confirmation ring back must be provided at all arming stations Use of multiple sounders or bells is acceptable Partitioned security systems using local Grade A bells A local Grade A bell must be positioned where it can be heard at each arming station Use of multiple bells is acceptable The system must be programmed to sound the bell for a minimum of 15 minutes on alarm If the bell stops sou
260. led in CPU 6 10 3 RS485 card installed in CPU Class B configuration 6 10 3 RS485 card installed in CPU Class A configuration 6 11 3 IDC8 4 Initiating Device Circuit module 6 11 3 SSDC 1 Signature Driver Controller module 6 11 3 AADC 1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller module 6 12 3 OPS Off premises Signaling module 6 12 3 ASU Audio Source Unit 6 14 3 FTCU Firefighter Telephone Unit 6 14 3 ZAxx Audio Amplifiers 6 16 Control display modules 6 16 Amplifier transfer panel ATP 6 17 Detector input module and output module testing 6 18 Signature Series detectors and bases on a 3 SSDC 1 module circuit 6 18 Addressable analog detectors on a 3 AADC 1 Module circuit 6 19 Traditional 2 wire smoke detectors connected to 3 IDC8 4 modules 6 19 Conventional 2 wire smoke detectors connected to SIGA UM modules 6 19 Signature series input modules 6 20 Signature series output modules 6 20 Initiating device testing 6 21 Manual stations 6 21 Nonrestorable heat detectors 6 21 Restorable heat detectors 6 21 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 1 Power up and testing Waterflow switches 6 21 Notification appliance testing 6 23 Visual devices 6 23 Speakers 6 23 Bells and horns 6 23 Record of completion 6 24 6 2 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Power up and testing Cabinet power up procedure Initial power up 1 8 9
261. liances System calculations Use this worksheet only if all the appliances are regulated That is they must have a minimum operating voltage of 16 V Worksheet 1 NAC cable length Total operating current 1 Load factor Load voltage drop Rated voltage Load voltage drop Minimum voltage Regulated appliance voltage Voltage drop 2 Total operating current Maximum resistance Wire resistance O ft 3 Maximum wire length Maximum cable length NAC1 0 37 20 4 16 0 2 99 4 0 37 20 4 16 0 V A ft ft 1 Total of the maximum operating currents for all appliances as specified for DC power See the appliance installation sheets for operating currents 2 This voltage drop is valid for regulated notification appliances only For unregulated appliances see Equation method later in this topic 3 Use the manufacturer s published wire resistance expressed in ohms per foot For typical values see Table 4 later in this topic EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 13 System calculations B 14 Equation method Appliance operating voltage and current Regulated notification appliances have an operating range from 16 V to 33 V Use 16 V as the minimum appliance voltage when using regulated notification appliances When using unregulated notification appliances refer to
262. lications power to the amplifiers has failed and the EST3 audio is active during an alarm condition Battery backup To charge the batteries you will use either the ATP s integral battery charger or an external LaMarche model A33 10 24 battery charger The internal battery charger is capable of charging 40 Ah batteries Caution Do not connect the battery chargers of multiple ATPs in parallel to increase charger current When multiple ATPs share a common battery or when the amplifier backup is to be supplied from a single battery source a LaMarche model A33 10 24 external battery charger must be used The Amplifier Terminal Panel switches battery power to the amplifiers When calculating the battery size required to support the amplifiers the alarm current must be known Each 250 W amplifier connected to the system draws 20 amperes at 24 Vdc at full load 125 W amplifiers draw 10 amperes at 24 Vdc at full load The amplifiers draw no current in the standby mode NFPA 72 specifies that designing the system to provide 15 minutes of the evacuation alarm at full load is the equivalent of 2 hours of emergency operation The local authority having jurisdiction or local codes can modify the amount of time for which standby power must be provided EST3 Installation and Service Manual 4 7 Centralized audio applications Audio amplifiers 4 8 Two Dukane amplifiers are available Model 1B3125 is rated at 125 watts output Model 1
263. line disconnect the line pair and connect the lines to a test meter If the line is equipped for loop start the meter should read 48 to 52 between the lines If the line is equipped for ground start the meter will read 0 Vdc between the lines 48 to 52 Vdc between one line and ground and 0 Vdc between the other line and ground Note AT amp T Horizon PBX systems and some Type 75 systems are of the loop start type AT amp T Dimension PBX systems and other Type 75 systems are equipped for ground start If this installation is for a certified fire alarm system or a burglar alarm system in compliance with NFPA 72 the telephone company line must be of the called party disconnect type also called timed release disconnect This feature permits the communication module to seize the line and dial out even when the telephone company line is in use To determine the whether the telephone line supports called party disconnect 1 Have someone telephone the premises from the outside 2 Hang up the telephone that received the call but have the individual who placed the call remain on the line 3 After 40 seconds pick up the called telephone again e If you are no longer connected to the caller If the caller is still on the line Loading configuration data After installing the 3 MODCOM use the SDU network downloading process to load the configuration data for the 3 MODCOM The SDU provides a report that lists all CMS cod
264. lled in wrong location or improperly addressed Detector not entered into system database Incorrect device response in database Detector missing or incorrectly wired on circuit ID error Detector not loaded into 3 AADC1 module database Ground Fault on circuit Internal detector fault Detector extremely dirty lonization detector Installed in area of extremely high airflow Detector installed in area of high ambient smoke Defective detector For detailed information on identifying and locating device problems refer to topic Addressable analog diagnostic tools earlier in this chapter EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Wiring problems There are three basic causes of wire related erratic Addressable Analog circuit operation Excessive wiring resistance Rarely 15 excessive wiring resistance the sole cause of Addressable Analog circuit problems For any length of cable the amount of resistance and capacitance per foot doesn t change and the Addressable Analog circuit capacitance limits are usually reached before the resistance limits The digital signal operates between 0 and 24 Vdc Excessive circuit resistance causes the signal to shrink from a maximum of 23 Vdc to a lower voltage for example 20 Vdc The 3 volt drop in the wiring is due to wire resistance To measure Addressable Analog circuit voltage drop use an oscilloscope to measure the peak voltage at the Addressable Analog mo
265. loads elevator control application 3 23 muster station 3 34 lock types intermittent locks 3 38 locks CRC output 3 7 CRCRL and external power supply 3 4 logged anti passback 3 11 maglock peripherals application 3 28 maglocks code requirements 3 28 CRC output 3 7 delayed egress application 3 19 magnetic stripe access cards 3 6 maintenance philosophy 8 3 manual audio zone selection 1 38 mapping errors 8 47 8 52 message counters Signature 8 57 messages 1 39 alarm format 1 39 alert format 1 40 automatic 1 14 default 1 14 modem transmission 3 7 motion detectors 3 5 multiple card readers application 3 30 multiple tenants 3 16 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Index muster 3 RS232 card 3 34 partitions 3 34 report 3 32 timed anti passback 3 11 muster application 3 32 muster station requirements 3 32 3 34 N N C contacts 3 6 N O contacts 3 6 circuit calculations B 11 synchronization 5 6 network applications and design considerations 1 29 layout 1 29 network data riser cable properties B 3 length B 3 limits B 2 specifications B 2 wire capacitance B 4 101 delayed egress 3 18 emergency exit door 3 24 standards C 2 notification zones 5 8 open fault 8 64 output circuits 3 6 P page channel 1 35 page to ale
266. lone mode should they lose communication with the Audio Source Unit The alarm tone used in the alarm message should be the same tone used by the amplifier for stand alone alarm signaling Alert message format The basic alert message consists of an alert tone followed by an advisory message The suggested alert tone should be easily differentiated from the alarm tone and can take the form of a constant tone or a constant tone modulated at a 20 pulse per minute rate Please refer to the Authority Having Jurisdiction for specific requirements Typical Alert message text Female Voice I have your attention please May I have your attention Please Male Voice There has been an emergency reported in the building Your area is in no immediate danger People from other areas of the building may be entering your area Be prepared to leave the building if you hear the evacuation signal Repeat you are in no immediate danger Informative messages Informative messages are those special purpose signals to areas of the facility which may have special concerns during an emergency situation Typically these areas include elevator cabs stairwells and areas in less peril than those areas receiving the Alert signal Some sample informative messages appear below Elevator message text Female Voice May I have your attention please May I have your attention Please Male Voice There has been an
267. losed Both of these times can be set to allow a longer access time for a handicapped person EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 27 Access control applications Maglock peripherals 3 28 Description of the application Maglocks require maglock peripherals due to NFPA codes In general these devices are intended to ensure that an egress door secured with a maglock can always be opened in an emergency Figure 3 9 shows the CRC using a maglock and required peripherals Maglock application requires a passive infrared motion detector PIR to be mounted above the door Also required is a request to exit REX switch to be mounted within five feet of the door and 40 to 48 inches above the ground The PIR is connected on the input circuit of the CRC The REX is connected directly to the maglock so that when activated it unlocks the door independently of the CRC The CRC is designed so that on detection of a fault on the input circuit of the PIR the door will unlock The PIR detects an approaching body and unlocks the door Similarly the REX switch unlocks the door when it is pressed The REX switch must unlock the door for a minimum of 30 seconds Passive infrared Maglock detector Other factors Request to Power supply exit switch Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 9 Maglock and peripherals EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Hardware c
268. m and system components EST3 Smoke Management Application Manual P N 270913 Provides information for designing programming and testing an EST3 smoke control system EST3 ULI ULC Compatibility Lists P N 3100427 Lists the appliances devices and accessories that are compatible with EST3 Other documents In addition to documents in the EST3 library you may find the following documents useful Signature Series Intelligent Smoke and Heat Detectors Applications Bulletin P N 270145 Provides additional applications information on the Signature series smoke and heat detector applications Signature Series Component Installation Manual P N 270497 Contains detailed mounting and wiring information for all Signature series devices Speaker Application Guide P N 85000 0033 Provides information on the placement and layout of speakers for fire alarm signaling and emergency voice communications Strobe Applications Guide P N 85000 0049 Provides information on the placement and layout of strobes for fire alarm signaling EST3 Installation and Service Manual xi Content Related documentation National Fire Protection Association 1 Batterymarch Park P O Box 9101 Quincy MA 02269 9101 Underwriters Laboratories Inc 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook IL 60062 2096 xii NFPA 70 National Electric Code NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 11 Low Expansion Foam Systems NFPA 11A Medium and High Expansion Foam S
269. m branch length with 1 to 5 SIGA UMs configured for 2 wire smokes Signature Signature Maximum allowable wire distance using non twisted non shielded wire pairs detector module addresses addresses 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG ft m ft m ft m 1 25 0 6778 2066 10768 3282 17126 5220 26 50 0 6131 1869 9741 2969 15492 4722 51 75 0 5501 1677 8739 2664 13899 4236 76 100 0 4885 1489 7760 2365 12342 3762 101 125 0 4282 1305 6802 2073 10819 3298 0 1 25 5353 1632 8504 2592 13525 4122 1 25 1 25 4720 1439 7498 2286 11926 3635 26 50 1 25 4100 1250 6513 1985 10359 3157 51 75 1 25 3491 1064 5546 1691 8821 2689 76 100 1 25 2893 882 4597 1401 7311 2228 101 125 1 25 2306 703 3663 1116 5826 1776 0 26 50 3776 1151 5999 1829 9542 2908 1 25 26 50 3153 961 5009 1527 7966 2428 26 50 26 50 2539 774 4034 1230 6416 1956 51 75 26 50 1935 590 3075 937 4890 1491 76 100 26 50 1340 409 2130 649 3387 1032 101 125 26 50 754 230 1197 365 1905 581 0 51 75 2491 759 3957 1206 6293 1918 1 25 51 75 1868 569 2967 904 4720 1439 26 50 51 75 1254 382 1992 607 3168 966 51 75 51 75 648 198 1030 314 1638 499 76 100 51 75 50 15 80 24 126 39 101 125 51 75 0 76 100 1386 422 2201 671 3501 1067 1 25 76 100 760 232 1208 368 1921 586 26 50 76 100 143 44 227 69 361 110 51 75 76 100 76 100 76 100 101 125 76 100 0 101 125 1 25 101 125 26 50 101 125 51 75 101 125 76 100 101 125 101 125 101 125 B 8 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System calculations Table B 3 Maximum b
270. m device type 8 Pull device type Fire device type 8 Call point device type Heat device type Verified smoke device type 9 Water flow device type to 10 10 1 Allowed only when the supervising station supervises the telephone line and annunciates fault conditions within 200 seconds 2 Allowed only on control panels that transmit trouble event signals off premises 3 Allowed only with monitor device types and switches 4 Allowed only if user route includes the control panel 5 Allowed only on nonrequired remote annunciators 6 Allowed only when setting does not prevent the activation or transmission of alarm or supervisory signals within 10 seconds or trouble signals within 200 seconds 7 When priorities are used alarm events must have a higher priority than supervisory and trouble events 8 Allowed in alarm zone groups AND groups and matrix groups that are used to initiate the release of extinguishing agents or water except when the addressable smoke detector s alarm verification is used 9 Allowed only in alarm zone groups AND groups and matrix groups that are not used to initiate the release of extinguishing agents or water 10 A minimum device activation count of 2 is required if the AND group or matrix group is used to initiate the release of extinguishing agents or water 11 Personality code 18 is typically used when a short condition must be distinguished from an alarm condition This ty
271. matrix indicates which circuit types may occupy the same conduit or be bundled together where permitted by code EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 3 Installation CIRCUIT COMPATIBILITY 1N tricti 2 Power Limited Circuit ES 77 3 Twisted Shielded Do Not 607 X 18 109 Top notes refers D A Bottom notes refers to this circuit 7 o y to this circuit v 8 0 10 y 056 WL S V y V S7 Circuit Wiring Specifications 24 VDC power limited 11 1 2 12 11 o 12 1 1 Size conductors per acceptable voltage drop ET SS M Max Ckt Res 709 T T Network Audio digitized 21 22 2 220 22 2 CKE Capacitance 0 0716 i NS X Max Ckt Res 900 NO T Te Circuits Network Com 85 485 2112212222022 3021 Mox Ci permitted by 25 Audio power limited 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 M 2 1 size conductors per acceptable voltage drop manufactu rer to 25 V4 Audio not power limited DOO 02 1 1 size conductors per acceptable voltage drop the 70 Vays Audio power limited N 2 2 2 2 2 o 2 2 o a Size conductors per acceptable voltage drop eu E 70 Vows Audio not power limited 22 1 1 Size conductors per acceptable voltage drop eck loca 15 25 21 Res 760 codes Tor Signature Data Circuit 134 2 124 2 12 o 4 Max Capac
272. maximum NAC cable length 1 Calculate the total current Itot as the sum of the maximum operating currents for all the appliances Itot Xa Where Ia appliance maximum current See the appliance installation sheets for Ia Remember to use the maximum operating current specified for DC power 2 Calculate the minimum voltage Vm Vr Itot x Where Vr rated voltage Itot total current from above K load factor For the power supply Vr is 20 4 V and 15 0 37 V A 3 Calculate the allowable voltage drop Vd between the power supply and the appliances Vm Va Where Vm minimum voltage from above appliance minimum voltage For regulated notification appliances Va is 16 V For unregulated notification appliances Va is the lowest operating voltage specified on the appliance installation sheet 4 Calculate the maximum resistance Rmax the wire can have Rmax Vd Itot Where Vd voltage drop Itot total current 5 Calculate the maximum length of the cable Lc based on the maximum resistance allowed the resistance of the wire and the number of wires in the cable two Lc Rmax Rw 2 Where Rmax maximum resistance wire resistance factor EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 15 System calculations Example You re using regulated notification appliances Assume that the maximum operating current for each appliance is 100 mA for DC p
273. modular telephone jacks are on the top 4 Ifa control display module is needed remove the blank front plate and attach the ribbon cable to the front of the 3 MODCOM board 5 Referto the SDU cabinet report to determine the proper location for the module then plug the module into the rail Be careful to align the module and rail sockets so that the pins are in the proper holes and that seat the module firmly 6 Fasten the module in place with the push pins 7 Restore power to the panel Install wiring to module as described on the 3 MODCOM installation sheet Connecting the 3 MODCOM to a telephone line Plug one end of the supplied telephone connecting cord P N 3601370 into the telephone company line jack on the 3 MODCOM Do not plug the other end into the RJ 31X jack until you are ready to test the system This prevents unnecessary interference with other equipment connect to the line downstream When you are ready for final connections and testing use the telephone company line jacks as follows Line 1 jack Line 2 jack Single line dialer Second line of 2 line dialer Incoming modem line For the installation of a fire alarm system in compliance with NFPA 72 the 3 MODCOM must be connected to loop start EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation telephone lines If the site has ground start lines two separate loop start lines must be installed for the dialer To determine the type of telephone company
274. more system inputs activate these inputs and verify the output function operates appropriately EST3 Installation and Service Manual Initiating device testing Power up and testing The procedures listed in the following sections should be performed on the initiating devices connected to the system in conjunction with the procedures in the topic Detector input module and output module initial and reacceptance testing These procedures are designed to test the initiating devices and the network applications programming Manual stations 1 2 3 Visual inspection Activate mechanism Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location message 15 displayed on the LCD module Verify the device initiates the appropriate system responses Open up the circuit Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module Nonrestorable heat detectors Visual inspection Test mechanically and or electrically Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location message 15 displayed on the LCD module Verify the device initiates the appropriate system responses Open up the circuit Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the LCD module Restorable heat detectors 1 2 3 Visual inspection Activate detector Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location message 15 displayed on the LCD module Verify the dev
275. mote LED The Relay Base provides a detector activated pilot duty dry contact relay used to control external appliances The Sounder Base incorporates a sounder horn that can be controlled by the detector by a special Signature module by the control panel or by programmed rules The Isolator Base protects the Signature Data Circuit from wiring shorts Signature modules interface and support the operation of initiating devices conventional 2 wire smoke and heat detectors manual pull stations strobes bells etc The actual functions of each Signature module is determined by a personality code downloaded to the module through the System Definition Utility SDU program Signature series manual pull stations 1 stage and 2 stage feature an integral Signature module that monitors the station One stage stations are monitored by a single input module that sends an alarm signal to the loop controller when the station is activated Two stage stations are monitored by a dual input module which sends two independent alarm events to the control panel one when the pull switch is activated and the second when the key switch is activated Alarm sensitivity setting Alarm sensitivity refers to the primary threshold expressed in percent smoke obscuration at which the smoke detector will go into alarm The alarm sensitivity setting for smoke detectors can be set to one of five sensitivity levels When smoke detectors having both ioniza
276. mote power source 3 42 remote power source application 3 42 two person rule 3 47 audio channels 1 34 signal priority 1 10 synchronization 5 6 zoning 1 33 audio amplifiers 8 21 audio source unit 1 9 automatic door openers 3 6 3 26 B badging in 3 32 bar code card 3 30 batteries compatibility list 3 5 option 3 5 description 3 5 limitations of CRC battery 3 41 battery calculations B 20 booster power supply 8 9 bypass time delayed egress application 3 20 emergency exit door application 3 25 Z 1 Index cabinet coverage 1 29 cable properties B 3 cables SAC bus 3 3 calculating maximum wire capacitance per foot B 4 capacitance of SAC bus 3 3 card access equipment 3 2 card readers additional 3 27 anti passback application 3 11 definition 3 6 dual LED control 3 31 3 48 handicap access door application 3 26 two person rule application 3 48 central monitoring station application 3 14 central monitoring stations 3 3 Central station Grade A C 4 Central station Grade B C 5 Central station Grade C C 6 chain errors 8 55 chassis 19 inch rack installation 5 22 circuit common 3 8 3 23 3 44 3 46 circuit modules removing or replacing 8 4 command lists events with 3 15 multiple card readers application 3 31 muster application 3 34 remote controls application 3 46 two person rul
277. munications Audio networks are not affected by cumulative capacitance due to the method of retransmitting data The audio network retransmits data byte by byte so the individual bit times of a byte are restored at each node in the network The data network retransmits data bit by bit This method of retransmitting data restores the amplitude of a bit at each node but any distortions in bit timing are passed through to the next node Data network communication faults begin to occur at about 23 distortion of bit timing Cumulative data network capacitance induces bit timing distortion A fiber link in a data network electrically isolates two nodes but distortions in bit timing are not restored by the fiber segment Distortions in bit timing are passed through the fiber to the next node The bit transition time of model 3 FIB fiber cards is fast enough to be neglected in determining the maximum wire length that can be used in the data network Data network specifications Here are the maximum allowed values between any three nodes of a network e Resistance 90 ohms Capacitance 0 3 microfarads uF Distance 5 000 feet The following table lists the maximum cumulative capacitance for the entire data network given various wire sizes and transmission rates Maximum cumulative capacitance is the total capacitance of all installed copper wire used in the data network Maximum cumulative capacitance in microfarads Wir
278. n use the services of a separate CMS Refer to Appendix C Listing requirements for additional information EST3 Installation and Service Manual Security applications NAS EH x x jddns 190g RI 5101321 19910 dsidd joejuoo Jooq cO3S V9IS exXous 5 9 Auedwoy aN Y9IS gt uoneis 02 91 OO joejuoo Jooq cO3S V9IS uoneis dSIGd o 7 wols 841 15 os an vols uonmneg Auedwog ewes y OM jou yng siy duuis 0 uwous sde Jejs LON led Kjnoes uoneis nd dsidd 026 7915 Jooq Ajynoes cO3S V9IS E E SdlV9IS c UOC y Auedwosy Ip doo vois Jeued uono uono aNW Y9 IS 20M aN Y9IS Figure 2 6 Multiple tenant security in a strip mall 2 17 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Security applications 2 18 Hardware configuration The control panel contains the following rail modules Signatu
279. n areas where the telephone system has no dial tone or where the dial tone is erratic you can set the 3 MODCOM to dial without waiting for a dial tone This is called blind call dialing The 3 MODCOM dials the CMS using the programmed dialing mode and telephone number The 3 MODCOM waits for a handshake message from the CMS indicating that a connection has been established If a handshake is not received within 40 seconds the module puts the telephone line on hook and waits for the configured period After the wait steps 2 through 4 are repeated If the module is still unable to contact the receiver it seizes the other telephone line The module repeats two attempts on the other telephone line If still unable to contact the receiver it switches back to the first telephone line and attempts to contact the receiver using the secondary telephone number If still unable to contact the receiver the module continues to alternate lines and numbers until the configured maximum number of attempts have been reached If the maximum number of attempts is reached the module sends a trouble message to the CPU The 3 MODCOM retries the full number of attempts if another event 15 activated or make one attempt if a configured period Wait Time Between Attempts expires When the call is completed ringing is detected by the CMS dialer receiver DACR The DACR goes off hook and transmits a handshake If the handshake matches the desired tr
280. n door access 3 17 delayed egress 3 20 emergency exit door 3 25 handicap access door 3 27 intermittent locks 3 38 multiple card readers 3 31 power for intermittent locks 3 38 adding hardware 8 6 additional card readers 3 27 additional power supplies 3 4 3 8 Addressable analog module troubleshooting 8 75 alarm sensitivity 1 26 alert channel 1 37 all call 1 35 all call minus 1 35 alternate alarm sensitivity 1 27 alternate alarm verification 1 27 alternate prealarm setting 1 28 amplifier backup 1 8 EST3 Installation and Service Manual amplifier 1 7 audio 4 8 backup 1 34 output voltage 1 33 output wattage 1 33 wiring considerations 1 34 amplifier selection 1 33 Amplifier Terminal Panel 4 3 4 6 installation 4 13 anti passback muster application 3 11 anti passback application 3 11 application descriptions AC power source 3 39 anti passback 3 11 central monitoring station 3 14 common door access 3 16 continuous locks 3 35 DC power supply 3 42 delayed egress 3 18 elevator control 3 21 emergency exit door 3 24 handicap access door 3 26 intermittent locks 3 37 maglock peripherals 3 28 multiple card readers 3 30 muster 3 32 power for continuous locks 3 35 power for intermittent locks 3 37 power from a remote source 3 42 power from an AC source 3 39 remote controls 3 45 re
281. n integrated systems First it supports devices and modules belonging to the fire alarm system Second it supports security devices that are part of the security system Figure 2 1 shows a Signature Controller module with a Class B Signature data circuit Shown on this circuit are Signature fire alarm devices plus two security devices the SIGA MD and the SIGA SEC2 Several Signature Controller models are available and can be used with integrated systems Note Security devices can also be installed on the SAC bus via CRCs or on an analog device loop SIGA MD Motion Detector module The SIGA MD is a passive infrared motion detector that connects to the Signature loop The detector has alarm and tamper output monitoring capability A contact closure causes an alarm but does not latch at the module The SIGA MD provides six separate curtain coverage patterns with a 34 foot range The detector can be mounted in flat corners or on walls up to a height of ten feet SIGA SEC2 Security Loop module The SIGA SEC2 Security Loop Module is an intelligent analog addressable device that connects one or two security loops to a Signature data circuit In Figure 2 1 this is indicated by the conventional security devices connected to the SIGA SEC2 The operation of the SIGA SEC2 is determined by its device type and personality code These are assigned during system design and configuration EST3 Installation and Service Manual 2 3 Security
282. nd a command list request to the CPU via the 3 SAC The command list operates the Signature relay modules attached to the Signature Controller module The relays are connected to the elevator controller and turn on or off access to the correct floors according to the cardholder s access level privileges The command list includes timing so the cardholder has a limited window of opportunity during which he can press the desired floor button After the time has lapsed he must present his card again Note This application must be used only for floor access and not for elevator control EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 21 Access control applications Elevator room Elevator controller SIGA CR Floor enabling circuits SIGA CR SIGA CR Elevator traveller cable CT I Signature data circuit Electrical room SAC bus using two Elevator line spare twisted pairs Control panel Signature Controller 3 SAC Elevator cab Operator panel CRC Other factors Power supply Card CRCXF reader Transformer Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 6 Access control and elevators 3 22 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Power supply The figure shows an independent power source for the CRC This is suggested due to the length of cable from the cab to the electrical room Two pairs of wires are used
283. nding after 15 minutes timeout the system must be programmed to light an LED to indicate bell timeout When using a 24DC12 module to power the bell that module must be installed in an EST3 cabinet that has 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch and ATCK Attack Kit Partitioned security systems for certification partitions in a certificated partitioned access control or security system must be under the control of a single company In a certificated system each separately owned business must have its own security system Security systems All security systems must specify a master arming station which receives all security event messages Alternately the system may be configured so that all messages are routed to all keypads All cabinets in a system that includes security functionality must include tamper Switches On activation all security points must generate an appropriate output device response The SDU cannot guarantee correlation between security input devices and output devices The system programmer must ensure that all points are accounted for When the system includes a Grade A bell you should create a general rule to sound the bell on activation of any security device Panel programming Fire and security functionality cannot be programmed into a control panel from a remote location You must perform all panel programming on site EST3 Installation and Service Manual Glossary A device or zone ACDB
284. ner e Jfacontrol display module is required by your application place the display in the recess on the front of the module Secure the display with the four supplied plastic rivets Install the display ribbon cable P N 250186 between the display s connector and the module s display connector If no display is required insert the blank plate supplied with the module Locate the required rail slot positions on the rail chassis Remember the module location must match the location entered in the System Definition Utility program e M Position the module so that any option card s rests in the card guides slot Push the module toward the rails sliding the daughter card into the slot When the four alignment pins match up with the guide holes in the module push the module in to firmly seat the module on the rail connectors e Push in the snap rivets to lock the module on to the rail Plug in terminal strips can be removed from LRMs to facilitate field wiring Close the module display door Latch the door by sliding the upper latch down and the lower latch up Note If there are empty rail spaces in a cabinet you should consider installing 3 LRMF blank modules to fill up the spaces EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 25 Installation 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator module Features The 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator is a local rail module that supports telephone line communication It combines the functions of a
285. neral3 a General3 a General3 General4 General4 General4 General4 ALL CALL mode Page to EVAC mode Page to ALERT mode ALL CALL MINUS mode Figure 1 8 Audio Source Unit Special Page Mode Signal Flow EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview The Call mode is used to send a page to the entire facility When the Call switch 15 activated the Audio Source Unit 15 put into the all call mode In this mode the zoned audio amplifiers do not all transfer to the page channel Rather the Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal source to all the audio channels Figure 1 8 shows the all call page source to audio channel connections in the lower left corner Note that all channels receive the same signal Any amplifier on the system regardless of the audio channel selected will receive the page Any amplifiers that were previously idle will power up and receive the page The Page to EVAC mode is used to send a page to the areas automatically receiving the evacuation signal Activating the EVAC switch causes the Audio Source Unit to enter the page to EVAC mode In this mode the zoned audio amplifiers connected to the EVAC channel do not transfer to the page channel Rather the Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal source to the EVAC channel Figure 1 8 shows the page to EVAC mode page source to EVAC channel connections The page and EVAC audio channels both receive the page signal Any amplifier connected to either th
286. net power supplies 3 The local rail modules 4 are the specialized cards that provide an interface between the CPU and the field wiring The front of any rail module can support a control display module 5 providing customized operator controls and annunciators EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Completing the EST3 series cabinet assembly are the inner 6 and outer 7 doors The RCC cabinets use a single outer door KAS A KAS Sr Figure 1 1 Exploded CAB series cabinet equipment installation EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 5 System overview Audio subsystem description The audio subsystem consists of a variety of signal sources integral amplifiers and sophisticated control software The 3 ASU Audio Source Unit is available with the optional 3 FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit as the model 3 ASU FT The ASU FT is the only audio equipment required at the fire command control center Zoned audio amplifiers are distributed throughout the system and provide the de multiplexing switching amplification and circuit supervision Network audio riser wiring A digital network audio riser consisting of a single pair Class B or two pairs Class A of wires connect all amplifiers together Since the digital signals are multiplexed any of 8 independent audio sources can be directed to any amplifier connected to the network All command and contr
287. new SIGA device start up The SDC is in the stand alone mode The module has detected an alarm while in the stand alone mode The SDC wiring has low resistance continuity to ground A SIGA module IDC NAC has low resistance continuity to ground Module in reset phase No changes reported by Signature controller module Displaying a log of current SDC status events Click the Status Log Tab at the bottom of the window to display a chronological list of the events that occurred on the SDC after the Start Status Button was activated EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 67 Service and troubleshooting Select COM port here Select baud rate here Select data circuit from list displayed here Select controller from list displayed here 22 DSDC Status Cabinet DSDC Card Loop Select cabinet from ETAM list displayed here Status Log A listing of status messages displayed here Current Status Status Log Progress fl Close Start Status Waiting to Establish C amp mmunications Reinitialize 8 Disable Mapping Click here to start receiving status information LPCSTAT2 CDR Click here to reinitialize the selected controller card Click here to disable mapping on the selected controller card Select display refresh rate here Click here to enable mapping on the selected controller card Figure 8 23 DSDC status event log Displa
288. ng techniques described in the basic Signature troubleshooting section should be tried before using these tools Using Signature diagnostics To access the Signature diagnostic tools Click Tools on the main menu bar then click Signature Series diagnostics Signature device circuit selection The Signature diagnostic tools affect only the SDC circuit that is specified in the drop down list boxes at the top of the DSDC Diagnostics window as shown in Figure 8 16 Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics Click Here to Select SDC Circuit Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card Click Here to Select Cabinet 0506 Diagnostics Cabinet LPC Card Loop ws Levels Options Tab Trouble Tables Mapping Errors Device Chains Click Check Boxes to Select Download Tables r Request Diagnostic Tables ps Lists 1 Mapping Error _ Display as Short Addresse 83 Current Chain 7 C Display as Serial Numbers X Chain Response List B Device Response List Comm Port Baud Rate X Message Counters com s600 8 IX Trouble Tables Upload DSDC Tables Uk Ready Communication Load Tables from Disk Click Here to Display Devices by Short Address Click Here to Display Devices by Serial Number Click Here to Set Comm Port Click Here to used 3 DSDC Module Signature Tables Stored in the SDU Click Here to Download 3 DSDC Module Signature Tables into SDU Click Here to Set Baud Rate Figure 8 16
289. nge of state of an input Refers to a condition of an input where the input is not active It also refers to the condition of an output where the output is not in its SET or RESET condition and does not have a priority value associated with it The delay of water flow signals to prevent false alarms due to fluctuations in water pressure An electrical path that contains power or signal that is used by multiple outputs zones or circuits A serial communications format normally used for serial peripheral devices i e printers from a computer RS 232 cables have a maximum length of 50 ft 15 2M EST3 Installation and Service Manual RS 485 rule S device or zone SDU sensitivity sequence service group SIGA Signature data circuit silenceable SPM start action start sequence supervisory circuit supervisory open trouble supervisory short System Definition Utility TAP protocol telco temporal pattern time control Glossary A serial differential communications format used to communicate between the panel and some remote annunciators A logical relationship between objects defined in the network s object list Rule format rule label input state input device type input label Output command output device type priority output label comments Supervisory device or zone EST3 System Definition Utility program Software that lets programmers configure and prog
290. nnected to the substitute module using the 3 AADC1 Database tab which is found in the Version Control Database function of the Tools Download menu Connect the PC to the CPU RS 232 connector 5 Table 8 41 3 AADC1 Local Rail Module troubleshooting Problem Possible cause Analog Circuit Open Circuit incorrectly wired or connector loose Defective detector or isolator base Broken conductor Device not installed on circuit Device not entered into SDU databases Analog Circuit Shorted Circuit incorrectly wired Defective detector detector base or module Nicked insulation between conductors Analog Circuit Ground Fault Pinched wire between device and electrical box N N A Nicked wire insulation 8 74 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Addressable analog device troubleshooting Each addressable analog device has an integral Red LED The function of this LED is indicated in Table 8 42 The LED is useful when trying to determine the communication and alarm or active status of a device Table 8 42 Addressable analog device LEDs LED Device status Flashing Red Polling device Steady Red Alarm or Active Table 8 43 lists common troubles and possible causes for addressable analog modules For detailed information on identifying and locating these errors use the SDU program s Addressable Analog Diagnostic Tools Information about these tools appears later in
291. nnection Each topic has a block diagram and general description of the application Other factors as called out on the drawings are discussed under separate headings in each topic EST3 Installation and Service Manual 2 7 Security applications Certificate installations 2 8 Description of the applications An installation company can be listed to install burglar alarm systems that are covered by UL under its Follow Up Service The listed company issues a certificate of the appropriate class grade and type This topic does not detail the steps required for certificate installations You must follow UL 681 to determine the exact requirements for a given installation Here we simply list special EST3 equipment that can be used in the following applications e Central Station Grade B Alarm Certificate e Grade A Police Station Connect Certificate e Central Station Grade C Alarm Certificate Local Mercantile Grade A Alarm Certificate Refer to Appendix C Listing requirements for additional information Special equipment Certificate installations require the use of specialized attack and tamper equipment Here are brief descriptions of the special parts The diagrams for each application show which parts are required ATCK Attack Kit a replacement cover kit for the 3 RCC7 cabinet The kit provides a two minute attack delay time It includes a red overlapping box cover for the cabinet The cover attaches to the backb
292. ns 2 8 Multiple 3 MODCOM modules 2 12 Multiple site security and access 2 13 Multiple tenant security 2 16 Secure access 2 20 Access control applications 3 1 Access control equipment 3 2 Anti passback 3 11 Central monitoring station 3 14 Common door access 3 16 Delayed egress 3 18 Elevator control 3 21 Emergency exit door 3 24 Handicap access door 3 26 Maglock peripherals 3 28 Multiple card readers 3 30 Muster 3 32 Power for continuous locks 3 35 Power for intermittent locks 3 37 Power from an AC source 3 39 Power from a remote source 3 42 Remote controls 3 45 Two person rule 3 47 Centralized audio applications 4 1 Equipment required 4 2 ATPC Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet 4 3 ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel 4 6 Audio amplifiers 4 8 URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module 4 10 EST3 Installation and Service Manual i Content Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 ATP external battery charger 4 20 Amplifier backup 4 22 Branch speaker wiring 4 25 Troubleshooting 4 27 Installation 5 1 Installation overview 5 3 UL 864 signal synchronization 5 6 Creating an initial startup version of the project database 5 16 System installation sequence 5 18 Preliminary field wiring testing 5 19 Chassis installation in EIA 19 inch racks 5 22 ATCK Attack Kit for cabinets 5 23
293. ns for the basic network modules Network layout The first task for the system designer is locating the equipment cabinets throughout the project The objective when locating cabinets is to maximize the per cabinet coverage of the facility while minimizing hardware cost The following general information should be used as a guide to designing the system The per cabinet coverage is in some part based upon the type of project being designed In a high rise building installation that requires an audio emergency voice communication system the problem becomes how many floors can be served by a single cabinet In a campus style installation there may be one or more cabinets per building depending on building size Cabinet coverage The following factors govern how much area a single cabinet can cover Cabinet capacity Depending on the installed equipment the largest backbox available can have 21 module spaces and 3 chassis spaces Is this enough cabinet capacity to house the equipment required to cover the proposed area Available current per cabinet Does the proposed number of large current components audio amplifiers and 24 Vdc notification appliance circuits in addition to the required module currents exceed the available 28 amps per cabinet or 60 Ah battery capacity Notification Appliance Circuit voltage drop Does the distance from the cabinet to the last strobe horn speaker etc exceed the acceptable limits User
294. nt sequence indicates a 2 the active Alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates A002 the event type indicates fire alarm the Alarm LED flashes again the local panel buzzer resounds and the first Alarm message remains at the top of the LCD window Press the Alarm queue switch and verify that the Alarm LED lights steady Initiate a third fire alarm and verify that its message appears at the bottom of the LCD window the active point counter EST3 Installation and Service Manual Power up and testing changes the event sequence indicates a 3 the active Alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates A003 the event type indicates fire alarm and the local panel buzzer resounds and the first alarm message remains at the top of the LCD window Press the Alarm queue switch and verify that the Alarm LED lights steady 8 Use the previous and next message switches to verify that you can scroll through all three messages in the alarm queue as indicated by the event sequence window 9 Press the Reset switch Verify that all initiating devices reset and that all panel indicators clear except the power LED 10 Initiate an active Monitor condition and verify that the Monitor LED flashes the correct active Monitor device message appears in the top and bottom windows of the LCD the active point counter changes the event sequence indicates a 1 the active Monitor events counter at the bottom
295. nterconnection Each topic includes a block diagram and general description of the application Other factors as called out on the drawings are discussed under separate headings in the topic EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Anti passback Description of the application Anti passback is a feature of the access control system that prevents successive use of one card to pass through any door in the same direction Anti passback prevents a card from being passed back to another person for the purpose of gaining unauthorized access The CRC supports three forms of anti passback Strict Logged Timed Strict anti passback 1s the most restrictive form of anti passback It requires all personnel to badge in and out denying them access to an area when they fail to do so Logged anti passback is less restrictive than strict anti passback It still requires personnel to badge in and out but does not deny access when anti passback rules are violated Rather such access is logged as an access granted anti passback event With logged anti passback security staff can work to correct violations but personnel are not locked out Timed anti passback prevents reuse of a card for a specific period but does not require personnel to badge timed anti passback system automatically badges a cardholder out of the controlled partition after a specified time period allowing the card to be used aga
296. ntrol C 8 Holdup alarm C 8 UL and ULC requirements C 10 EST3 Installation and Service Manual C 1 Listing requirements NFPA standards EST3 meets the requirements of NFPA 72 for Local Auxiliary Remote Station Proprietary and Emergency Voice Alarm fire systems C 2 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Listing requirements Minimum requirements for UL security applications Local mercantile Grade A premises Standard UL 609 Minimum hardware 3 RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch Central Processor Unit CPU 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply Main LCD Display LCD Er KPDISP Keypad Display 3 SAC Security Access Module Signature Controller Module Listed Grade A bell and bell housing Ademco model 2 Grade A Bell in Box 24DC12 12 Voltage Regulator with Security Bell Interface 3 IDC8 4 Traditional Zone I O Module SIGA MD Motion Detector SIGA SEC2 Security Loop Module Additional requirements Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds Bell test must be included in system programming if not a built in feature of the software System must be programmed for a minimum of 15 minutes bell ring on alarm System must be programmed to indicate bell timeout with an LED System power supply bell power supply 24DC12 and bell monitoring module IDC8 4 must all b
297. ntrol display power supply and communication functions Each cabinet has the following capacities 10 addressable device circuits Signature and addressable analog combined 120 traditional input output zones 4 Class B 2 Class A security access control communication SAC busses 10 modem dialer cards each with two telephone lines 2 RS 232 external peripheral device ports 456 LED annunciation points 342 input switches In addition the EST3 system has these global features Firefighter telephone Custom programmability and user friendly front panel Class B Style B initiating device circuits IDC Event reporting by alarm trouble supervisory or monitor mode and message display routing Dead front construction Supports networking up to 64 nodes may be connected in a regenerative Class A or Class B token ring Fast response time less than three seconds from initial alarm to device activation on a fully loaded system over the network Flash memory on controller modules to facilitate quick firmware upgrades Supports 255 security partitions Multiplexed eight channel digital audio system Transient protected field wiring Class B Style Y or Class A notification appliance circuits Ground fault detection by panel Signature data circuit and Signature modules Switch mode power supply EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 3 System overview 1 4 Copper or fiber n
298. o the sounder is disabled When set to 255 the sounder sounds until manually reset The sounder is reset when a cardholder badges in at the door In all cases badging in on the affected CRC can silence the sounder Bypass Time is the number of seconds 0 through 255 that the door is bypassed after a cardholder badges out EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 25 Access control applications Handicap access door 3 26 Description of application A handicap access door is a door that helps a handicapped person enter and exit a door by allowing extra access time and providing an automatic door opener See Figure 3 8 below The door can function for both normal access and handicap access A person without handicap privileges would operate the door just as any other door When a person with handicap privileges badges in the CRC recognizes that the person has handicap privileges and provides two extra benefits The first is giving the handicap person extra time to enter or exit the doorway before relocking the door The second is an automatic door opener A second card reader can be installed in parallel to the entry or exit card reader to make it easier for a handicapped person to reach The second card reader should be placed at a lower level and farther away from the door The distance from the door should allow the automatic door to open fully without a person needing to move backwards Door opener Card Card rea
299. obwebs etc from the immediate area of the detector Connect the detector cleaning tool to the suction hose Place the detector cleaning tool over the detector head for approximately 10 seconds After the detector has been cleaned Restore it to proper operation Check the detector s sensitivity to verify the effectiveness of the cleaning over detector Detector Cleaning Tool Connect to vacuum cleaner hose ACLEAN1 CDR Figure 7 1 Detector Cleaning Tool 7 6 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Preventive maintenance System trouble and maintenance log Date mme ems EST3 Installation and Service Manual 7 7 Preventive maintenance 7 8 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Chapter 8 Service and troubleshooting Summary This chapter provides a comprehensive set of procedures and tables to aid certified technical personnel in servicing and troubleshooting the system Content Overview 8 3 Maintenance philosophy 8 3 Problem classification 8 3 Handling static sensitive circuit modules 8 3 Removing or replacing circuit modules 8 4 Recommended spares list 8 4 Hardware problems 8 5 Identification 8 5 Isolation 8 5 Substituting hardware 8 5 Adding hardware 8 6 Downloading problems 8 6 Modules 8 7 Rail signals 8 7 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply module 8 7 3 BPS M Booster Power Supply module 8 9 CPU Central Processor mo
300. of the display indicates M001 and the event type indicates Monitor Press the Monitor queue switch and verify that the Monitor LED lights steady Initiate a second active Monitor condition and verify that the first Monitor message remains at the top of the LCD window that the second Monitor event message appears at the bottom of the display the active point counter changes the event sequence indicates a 2 the active Monitor events counter at the bottom of the display indicates M002 11 Initiate an active Trouble condition and verify that the Trouble LED flashes the correct active Trouble device message appears in the top and bottom windows of the LCD the local panel buzzer sounds the Trouble relay transfers the active point counter changes the event sequence indicates a 1 the active Trouble events counter at the bottom of the display indicates T001 and the event type indicates Trouble Press the Trouble queue switch and verify that the Trouble LED lights steady Press the Panel Silence switch to verify the panel buzzer silences and the Panel Silenced LED lights Initiate a second active Trouble condition and verify that the first Trouble message remains at the top of the LCD window that the second Trouble event message appears at the bottom of the display the active point counter changes the event sequence indicates a 2 the active Trouble events counter at the bottom of the display indicates T002 12 Initiate
301. ol signals for the audio system are distributed over the network data riser CPU CPU CPU CPU TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2 AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AIN AOUT BIN BOUT AIN AOUT BIN BOUT AIN AOUT BIN BOUT AIN AOUT BIN BOUT EDITAE BEA Beuu mnen rnrn LUN m URN m UR m URN m URN URN URN ooooocoooc joocoooooo ooooococooc oooooooo From AUDIO DATA PRIMARY on 3 ASU Figure 1 2 Class B network audio riser wiring 1 6 EST3 Installation and Service Manual ul Tu pO ee EET adiu cO ee System overview adi CP AIN AOUT BIN AIN AOUT BIN CPU CPU CPU CPU TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2 AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO B OUT B OUT AOUT BIN BOUT AIN AOUT BIN BOUT AIN 000000020 00000000 From AUDIO DATA PRIMARY connections on 3 ASU Figure 1 3 Class A network audio riser wiring Amplifiers Amplifiers are designed to feed a single audio zone and p
302. on Entrance CR outside CRC 1 Control panel 3 SAC 3 PPS M MODCOM CR outside Emergency exit Telephone line Muster report Other factors station Power supply Hardware configuration ACDB SDU programming ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 11 Muster application EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Entrance CR outside CRC 4 CR outside Emergency exit Muster station 3 33 Access control applications 3 34 Hardware configuration The control panel must contain the following rail modules e 3 SAC Security Access Control module e 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply module e 3 MODCOM Modem Communication module 3 RS232 Card option installed in the CPU The 3 SAC module supports the SAC bus Power for the CRC is normally taken from the 3 PPS M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted pair wires The 3 MODCOM module supports modem communication between the control panel and the ACDB program via telephone lines Alternately the 3 RS232 Card supports RS 232 communications on a cable connected directly to the CPU CRCs controlled by a muster station must be on the same 3 SAC card as the muster station Badging out at a muster station badges the person out of all partitions for that 3 SAC card Therefore a single muster station can serve multiple partitions provided that they are on the same 3 SAC card The system must have at le
303. on found later in this chapter Table 8 32 Signature module troubleshooting matrix Module not responding correctly C C 1 X NOO C R C R R X C T 1 X C T 2 X M U W M M T 1 M X X X x X x x X Module in trouble on Signature controller module EST3 Installation and Service Manual Possible Causes Module installed in wrong location or improperly addressed Module not entered into Signature database Incorrect personality code loaded into module Personality code for unused portion of module not set at 0 P codes 1 2 3 4 8 13 14 16 and 18 Jumper JP1 set incorrectly P code 8 24 for smoke power low or missing P codes 3 14 18 20 and 21 Inputs 1 and 2 swapped P codes 1 2 3 and 4 Signal sources 1 and 2 swapped P code 7 Ground Fault on data circuit or side of input output circuit 8 49 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 32 Signature module troubleshooting matrix X X X X X X x Module missing or incorrectly wired on Signature data circuit x x x x x x x Mapping error Module not loaded into Signature database x x x x x x Ground Fault on input or output circuit x x X Output circuit open shorted incorrectly wired polarized device installed in reverse incorrect or missing EOL resistor X x x x x Missing or incorrect EOL resistor P codes 1 2 3 4 13 14 16 18 20 21 X 24 for smoke p
304. ond with the rotary switch setting and modules are reported as 100 plus the rotary switch setting Multiple faults will make the process more difficult but the addresses noted in the fault tables make an excellent starting point Table 8 40 Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation Table Name Description Possible causes Communicating Lists sensor and module Total number of communicating devices Devices addresses talking to the should equal number of installed devices PARRER If total is low see Communication Fault table for missing or not connected device s If total is high see Unexpected Fault table for extra device s installed on circuit Internal Fault Devices reporting an internal Replace device failure 8 70 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Table 8 40 Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation Table Name Description Device Type The wrong device type for the Fault current configuration Unexpected A device is reporting at an Fault unconfigured address All unconfigured addresses are polled at startup and at 10 minute intervals thereafter Duplicate Device Fault the same address Communication Missing device Fault Open Fault Module field wiring is open Short Fault Module field wiring is shorted EST3 Installation and Service Manual Two or more devices have Possible causes Photo detector installed for ion detector lon detector installed for photo detector
305. onds Called party disconnect 15 available in most areas To determine whether called party disconnect control is available in the area to be served consult the local telephone company In areas not having called party disconnect the 3 MODCOM module is vulnerable to jamming by an incoming call To minimize the possibility of jamming we recommend that the customer order a separate unlisted number for exclusive use of the 3 MODCOM module The customer should keep this number confidential In the case of the two line dialer two premises telephone numbers would have to be busied by incoming calls to jam the system Progressive anti jamming measures would entail the use of one unlisted telephone number or two unlisted numbers for maximum dialer integrity The 3 MODCOM must be connected to the incoming line ahead of all connected equipment on that line but just behind the demarcation block This puts the control unit telephone connection in series assuring that all telephones answering machines and FAX machines are disconnected during dial out to the CMS This requirement is necessary so the 3 MODCOM dialer circuit can seize the line for its exclusive use in the event of an alarm Do not use a telephone line that is considered essential for conducting business at the site Use a separate line for the 3 MODCOM The dialer must be the first connection in line and it seizes the line and disconnects all other equipment when making a call
306. onfiguration The maglock peripherals consist of the following Passive infrared motion detector PIR Request to exit REX switch The PIR is connected via the CRC input circuit The REX is connected directly to the maglock instead of the CRC input circuit to meet NFPA requirements SDU programming When programming the system for this application you ll need to configure the CRC defining the device type You ll also need to define the input circuits For this application define the input circuit for the PIR as follows Device type Security interior Application Request to exit motion detector EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 29 Access control applications Multiple card readers 3 30 Description of the application Several access control applications require the use of multiple card readers For example Visitor and escort readers High and low position readers The CRC lets you use multiple card readers of the same technology or of mixed technologies It can support up to four card readers provided that the total current draw of the readers does not exceed the limits specified on the CRC installation sheet A visitor and escort application using multiple card readers is shown in Figure 3 10 below In this application both the escort and visitor must badge in to gain access The escort has a permanent plastic card and uses the proximity card reader The visitor is issued an inexpensive pap
307. oo aunyeubis OV 2 K L AlddNS 31044 annoy Ajljeuosied Ie49yY adh LLO 1 ON WOO ON 1no 2 WOO zesues 3103 A NI 100 WOO 95095 annoy NI XNV 002 GS JON Figure 5 9 Typical booster power supply wiring EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation Connecting the PT 1S impact printer The PT 1S impact printer can be connected to an EST3 panel to provide a hard copy printout of system status active events panel reports etc The PT 1S is a 80 character line width freestanding printer that uses standard form feed paper CPTISXCDR When connecting the PT 1S impact printer by itself Configure the serial port as a Printer port type and set the baud rate for the printer s baud rate Set printer switches SWI 1 2 and 3 to OFF ON and ON respectively 8 bits no parity When connecting the PT 1S impact printer to a serial port that is shared with a CDR 3 Zone Coder e Use an IOP3A to connect both devices Refer to the topic Connecting a CDR 3 Zone Coder for coded tone output later in this chapter Configure the panel s serial port as a CDR 3 Printer port type and set the baud rate for the CDR 3 s baud rate Set printer switches SWI 1 2 and
308. oop Device Type Security P Monitor Input Circuit Partition as determined by project Max Delta Count as determined by project e Delays None e Application Emergency Exit Door Contact Personality Basic For the request to exit switch Device Type Monitor e Input Circuit Partition None Max Delta Count not applicable Delays None e Application Request to Exit with Delayed Egress e Personality N O with Trouble ACDB operation When an employee badges in or out at the door the CRC bypasses the door contact for a specified period of time This is called the Bypass Time and 15 specified in the ACDB The duration of the CRCSND horn is also specified in the ACDB as the Emergency Exit Sounder Time This can be set to any value between 0 and 255 seconds Setting the value to 0 seconds effectively inhibits the CRCSND Setting the value to 255 seconds programs the CRC to operate the CRCSND until the CRC is manually reset by badging at the CRC card reader EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Elevator control Description of the application An access control system can determine which floors are available to a given cardholder This application is shown in Figure 3 6 A CRC and independent power source are installed in the elevator cab When a cardholder presents his card it is processed by the CRC If valid the CRC sends an access granted event a
309. orkmanship standards If wired with a backup amplifier verify that the backup amplifier s wattage is equal to or greater than the wattage of any primary amplifier it can replace If mixing 15 and 30 watt amplifiers with 20 and 40 watt amplifier modules make sure the back up amplifier is 20 or 40 watts whichever is required Verify that the EVAC and Page signals are available at the speakers Create an amplifier fault Verify backup amplifier substitution Class B amp output configuration Disconnect the module s audio output wiring TB2 7 amp TB2 8 from the 3 ZAxx and verify that the appropriate amplifier Trouble message appears in the Trouble queue Restore the connection Class B supplementary NAC output configuration 3 ZA20 amp 3 ZA40 only Disconnect the module s supplementary notification appliance circuit wiring TB2 3 amp TB2 4 from the 3 ZAxx and verify that the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble queue Restore the connection Short the module s supplementary notification appliance circuit wiring TB2 3 amp TB2 4 from the 3 ZAxx and verify that the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble queue Remove the short Control display modules 1 Verify that the display s are properly seated in the module and secured with the four snap rivets Verify that the ribbon cable between the display and its host module is firmly seated on both ends Activate the lamp test and verify all
310. ormation to help you determine whether A power supply must be added to the SAC bus Adequate voltage will be available to CRCs and KPDISPs on the SAC bus The standby battery in each CRC is properly sized Determining the need for a remote power supply The need for additional power is dictated by the current drawn by the devices on the SAC bus Each 3 PPS M can supply a total of 7 A through two 3 5 A outputs Each SAC line can therefore draw a maximum of 3 5 A This consists of the current drawn by the CRCs and KPDISPs plus any readers strikes or maglocks If the load on the 3 PPS M supply is greater than 3 5 A you ll need to split the devices over two SAC busses or add a remote power supply To determine the total load on the 3 PPS M 1 Complete Form below to calculate the system alarm and standby load current 2 Total the columns to determine the Total Alarm Load and Total Amp Hours These two totals will be used in later calculations 3 Ifthe Total Alarm Load is greater than 3 5 A the devices must be divided between two SAC busses each with a separate supply OR a remote power supply must be installed EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 21 System calculations Form A 3 SAC alarm and standby load Device Qty Alarm Total alarm Standby Total Standby Amp current current current standby time hours mA mA mA current Hours mAH mA KPDISP 100 35 CRC 950 940 CR 5355 72 70 5365 31 25
311. ors Signature relay Power supply Hardware configuration Signature SDU programming relay ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 18 Remote control of a parking garage entrance When the cardholder badges in the access event is sent from the CRC to the 3 SAC and then to the CPU At the CPU the access event activates a predefined command list EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 45 Access control applications 3 46 The command list operates the Signature relays on the Signature data circuit supported by the Signature controller module These relays activate the gate opener a spotlight and a VCR image recording system An inside card reader and could be used to control exits from the area but it would be more appropriate to use a motion detector since egress from the area 1s not controlled Power supply A CRCXF CRC Transformer power supply is shown assuming that the 15 be located at some distance from the electrical room and control panel If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications must have ground fault detection disabled and must have a circuit ground circuit common that is isolated from earth ground SDU programming The SDU programmer must create a command list that specifies activation of the correct relays and devices the delays required and the deactivation of the devices Since there is no restoration phase of acc
312. ower and that 20 appliances will be placed on the NAC The cable is 12 AWG wire and the manufacturer specifies a wire resistance factor of 0 002 Q ft Itot 20x0 1A 2 Vm Vr Itot x 20 4 V 2A x 0 37 V A 20 4 V 0 74 V 19 66 V Vm Va 19 66 V 16 0 V 3 66 Rmax Itot 3 66V 2 0A 183 Q Lc Rmax Rw 2 1 83 Q 0 002 Q ft 2 915 ft 2 457 5 ft So the maximum wire run for this NAC would be 457 ft rounding down for safety B 16 EST3 Installation and Service Manual System calculations 25 or 70 Vrms NAC wire length The maximum allowable wire length is the farthest distance that a pair of wires can extend from the amplifier to the last speaker on the notification appliance circuit without losing more than 0 5 dB of signal Calculating the maximum allowable wire length using this method ensures that each speaker operates at its full potential Several factors influence the maximum allowable wire length Wire size e Output signal level of the amplifier driving the circuit Number of speakers installed on the circuit To calculate the maximum allowable wire length for a 0 5 dB loss use the following formula 59 25 X Amplifier output Max length Wire resistance X Circuit load where e Amplifier output is the signal level in Vrms supplied by the amplifier driving the circuit e Circ
313. ower low or missing P codes 13 14 18 20 and 21 Module incorrectly in alarm or active on Signature controller module X X X X x Initiating device circuit shorted or initiating device incorrectly installed x x x x x Incorrect EOL resistor value too low x Applicable for module This table also applies to equivalent M series components and products that emulate these module types Table 8 33 Signature detector troubleshooting Symptom Possible causes Detector not responding correctly Detector installed in wrong location or improperly addressed Detector not entered in system database Incorrect device response in database Detector in trouble on CPU Detector missing or incorrectly wired on Signature data circuit 2 Mapping error Detector not loaded into control module database Ground Fault on Signature Data circuit 4 Internal detector fault Refer to Advanced Techniques Section Detector incorrectly in alarm on control panel Detector extremely dirty lonization detector installed in area of extremely high airflow Detector installed in area of high ambient smoke ONS Defective detector 8 50 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Signature diagnostic tools The SDU Signature diagnostic tools are designed to assist the installing technician in isolating and correcting faults with the Signature Data Circuit SDC detectors and modules The troubleshooti
314. ox sides using sheet metal screws and four locks The kit also includes special knockout plugs that secure the unused knockout holes 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch a switch that detects removal of the cover Central station grade B alarm certificate Figure 2 2 shows the equipment that can be used as part of a Central Station Grade B Alarm Certificate installation Note that this is the same equipment used for a Grade A Police Station Connect Certificate installation EST3 Installation and Service Manual Security applications Listed Grade A bell Tamper loop Bell circuit Wires must be in a metal conduit with no boxes or other junctions KPDISP SAC bus Control panel 3 IDC8 4 3 SAC 3 MODCOM Telephone lines one line with 24 hour test or two lines with line cut monitors 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch ATCK Attack Kit Other factors Power supply Central monitoring station Hardware configuration SDU programming il ACDB KDC operation Figure 2 2 Components used with a central station grade B certificate application For this certificate the control panel cabinet must be fitted with an ATCK Attack Kit and a 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch In addition a listed Grade local bell 15 required The bell must be positioned where it can be heard from every arming station in the system You can use multiple bells if required The bell requi
315. p Audio Output Analog 0625 Amplifier Daughter Board 0626 Fuse Supervision 0627 PAL Supervision 0629 Request Backup 0630 Riser Supervision 0631 User Interface 0632 Master Phone Supervision 0633 Handset Off Hook 0640 Jumper Fault 0641 AtoD Converter Failure 0642 City Tie Open 0652 Input Supervision Trbls 0653 Phone Page Time Out 0654 Audio Hardware Mismatch EST3 Installation and Service Manual Source 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXX 3 2 3 ZAXX 3 ZAXx 3 ZAXx 3 ZAxx 3 2 3 FTCU 3 FTCU 3 FTCU 3 FTCU 3 OPS 3 OPS 3 OPS 3 ASU 3 ASU 3 ASU Service and troubleshooting Description 1 Circuit shorted 2 Speaker wattage tap setting exceeds output rating of amplifier 3 70 Vrms jumper setting used with 25 Vrms speakers 1 Open DC NAC circuit missing or wrong value EOL resistor 2 Shorted DC NAC circuit 1 Open Audio NAC circuit missing or wrong value EOL resistor 2 Shorted Audio NAC circuit 3 Output voltage jumper set wrong 1 Open Audio NAC circuit missing or wrong value EOL resistor 2 Shorted Audio NAC circuit 3 Output voltage jumper set wrong Defective board Open fuse in amplifier Bad PAL chip Replace amplifier N A 1 Open circuit missing or wrong value EOL resistor 2 Shorted circuit Ribbon cable between display and main PC board loose or missing Master handset internal wiring fault Hook switch defective Jumpers incorrectly set Internal module failure
316. paging microphone N A Mapping manually disabled N A Dirty detector on loop 1 N A N A Mapping manually disabled Dirty detector on loop 2 8 31 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 21 Local monitor pseudo points Address 0688 Table 8 22 Address 0621 Table 8 23 Address 5501 5502 5503 5504 5505 5506 5507 5508 5509 5510 5511 5512 5515 5532 5533 5534 8 32 Label Reconstct Line Data Card 2 Nonsupervised output pseudo points Label Manual Answer Control CRC pseudo points Label AC Brownout Low Battery Tamper Strike Fault Reader Fault RAM Fault or Stack Fault Code Supervision Database Supervision Communications Fault Loop 1 Loop 2 Task Failure Waiting for SDU Download CRC Strike Timed CRC Strike Unlock CRC Relay Timed Source Description 3 DSDC N A 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 Source Description 3 MODCOM Answers incoming call Event type Access trouble Access trouble Security alarm Access trouble Access trouble Access trouble Access trouble Access trouble Access trouble Security alarm configurable Security alarm configurable Local trouble Local trouble Access output Access output Access output Description Sustained low voltage from CRC supply to device CRC battery below specified voltage CRC tamper switch was activated Strike device failed Card reader failed CRC processor failed C
317. pe DC notification appliance circuit Audio notification appliance circuit Signature data circuits We recommend that you test all circuits before they are connected to the control equipment Table 5 3 indicates the recommended tests and acceptable test results Note Individual devices are not checked as part of these tests equipment installed on field circuits must be individually tested to ensure proper operation when the system running Test 1 Measure the resistance between conductors The circuit resistance should be infinite if no devices are installed on the circuit The circuit resistance should be approximately 15 kO when the polarized notification appliances and the end of line resistor are correctly installed 2 Reverse the meter leads The circuit resistance between conductors should read approximately 10 O to 20 O If the resistance reading is still approximately the same value when the meter leads are reversed one or more polarized devices are installed incorrectly 3 Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground The resistance should be infinite 1 Measure the resistance between conductors The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are installed on the circuit The circuit resistance should be approximately 15 when the polarized notification appliances and the end of line resistor are correctly installed 2 Reverse the meter leads The circuit
318. pe of IDC is prohibited by UL 864 viii EST3 Installation and Service Manual Content About this manual This manual provides information on how to properly install wire and maintain the EST3 integrated system and related components This manual applies to the following EST3 models EST3 EST3R EST3 230 EST3R 230 Organization Chapter 1 System overview a descriptive overview of the components and subsystems that comprise an EST3 system Chapter 2 Security applications covers security applications This chapter contains block diagrams that show the components required to create specific security systems Chapter 3 Access control applications covers access control applications Like Chapter 2 this chapter contains block diagrams and descriptions of specific access control systems Chapter 4 Centralized audio applications describes the equipment and configuration required to create centralized audio for a site Chapter 5 Installation installation information for system components and applications that supplement the instructions provided on individual component installation sheets Chapter 6 Power up and testing information and procedures necessary to perform initial system power up and acceptance testing Chapter 7 Preventive maintenance lists the required scheduled maintenance items and procedures Chapter 8 Service and troubleshooting a comprehensive set of procedures and tables to aid certified
319. programmable read only memory Nonvolatile memory containing the operating system EPROM is erasable only by ultraviolet light EST3 Installation and Service Manual external command port fiber optic flash memory global domain group group domain IDC input KDC KPDISP label listing local domain local system logic functions M device or zone march time matrix modem Glossary An RS 232 connection which permits the CPU module to be connected to a remotely located control system Communication format that uses light signals carried on glass fibers to transmit and receive data Nonvolatile read write memory Features which operate in all network cabinets A collection of Signature devices that is treated as a single entity for programming purposes Groups can have messages and responses over and above the messages and responses of the individual group members Features that operate in a specific group of network cabinets Initiating device circuit An input circuit connected directly to any manual or automatic initiating device whose normal operation results in an alarm or supervisory signal indication at the control panel The electrical integrity of the circuit is monitored by the fire alarm system A signal generated by a field device and sent to the control panel for evaluation and responses as determined by the system database Inputs to the system are detectors modules and switches Keypa
320. provider for the exact structure they require When programming transmissions remember that device messages require two separate send commands one for activation and one for restoration Contact ID numeric messages with several parameters including event code partition and device or user The format 15 EventCode Partition DeviceNumber User SIA DCS ASCII text messages that include a number of optional parameters including time date user partition and device The format is Date Time UserID AlarmCode Device User Partition SIA P2 3 1 numeric messages that consist of four digits These contain the account number three digits and the alarm code one digit The format 15 AccountNumber AlarmCode The 15 no standard assignment of alarm codes and meanings Obtain the codes used by your CMS EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation SIA P3 4 2 numeric messages that contain two numbers and no other parameters The format is EventCode consists of two fields separated by a carriage return CR The first field 1s the User ID The second field 15 the text message that will be displayed on an alphanumeric pager Message length including User ID and CR is 60 characters The format is User CR Message Location No standards describe the content of the message Typically you ll use the device location message as displayed on the LCD module Check with your paging servi
321. quation The worksheet method is simpler but your installation must meet the criteria listed on the worksheet If your installation does not meet these criteria you need to use the equation method The methods given here determine cable lengths that work under all operating conditions The calculations ensure that the required operating voltage and current will be supplied to all notification appliances To do this we assume these two worst case conditions The voltage at the NAC terminals is the minimum provided by the power supply The notification appliances are clustered at the end of the NAC cable Other more detailed methods that distribute the appliance load along the NAC cable may indicate that longer cable runs are possible What you ll need Appliance and cable values Whether you use the worksheet method or the equation method you ll need to know The minimum operating voltage required for the appliances The maximum operating current drawn by each appliance resistance per unit length of the wire used O ft This information can be found on the appliance installation sheets and on the cable specification sheet Power supply values For either method you ll need some fixed or calculated operating values for your specific power supply The fixed values are Maximum voltage 27 4 V Rated voltage 20 4 V Load factor 0 37 V A Power type DC EST3 Installation and Service Man
322. r Verify that a Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue 3 SSDC 1 Signature Driver Controller module 1 Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail connectors and secured with the two snap rivets Verify that removable terminal strips and TB2 are firmly seated EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 11 Power up and testing 6 12 2 3 Verify the wiring to all Signature devices Map the SDC circuit by reading the device data adjusting modifying and accepting devices as required writing the information back to the devices and rereading the device data With no map errors displayed put an input device on the circuit in the active mode and verify the appropriate message is displayed on the LCD module Put the input device in the Trouble mode and verify that the correct Trouble message is displayed Note Individual device testing will be done later 3 AADC 1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller module 1 Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail connectors and secured with the two snap rivets Verify that removable terminal strip is firmly seated Verify the wiring to all addressable analog devices Read the addressable analog circuit device data adjusting modifying and accepting devices as required writing the information back to the addressable analog module With no errors displayed put an input device on the circuit in the active mode and verify the
323. r CRCXM Card Reader Controller Use the CRCRL in conjunction with an external power supply to control a lock which requires voltage or current outside the CRC s operating range EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications The CRCRL can be mounted inside the CRC housing when connected to power limited wiring The unit includes a hook and loop patch which can be attached to the CRC battery strap When nonpower limited wiring is used the CRCRL must be mounted in a junction box The CRCRL is listed as an Access Control Accessory and Control Unit Accessory Battery Each CRC has space for an internal 1 2 Ah sealed lead acid battery The battery supplies power to the CRC and its peripherals and provides local standby power The CRC battery provides 30 minutes of standby power for access control functions and up to 4 hours for security functions The battery cannot be used for fire applications CRCXF CRC Transformer The CRCXF CRC Transformer is a 16 5 Vac transformer that can power the CRC or CRCXM It provides local power for applications requiring additional power at door lock The CRC has AC load terminals for easy connection to transformer Be sure to check the CRC installation sheet for a list of applications that prohibit the use of the CRCXF Input circuits 1 and 2 Each CRC supports two input circuits for such devices as e Door contacts Motion detectors Request to exit REX switches e
324. ralized audio applications ATP external battery charger When multiple ATPs are connected to a common battery set disable the ATP internal battery charger by installing J3 and removing J2 on the APSB terminal board This is located in the ATP see Figure 4 11 Use La Marche model A33 10 24 external battery charger which can charge up to 160 Ah batteries as shown in Figure 4 13 4 20 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications WUC Listed 47 KOhm OL 24 VDC 160 Wiring Notes 1 Supervised 2 Power Limited SGA CTI Single Input Module NOTE THEA33 10 24 Fersonality Code 3 MUST BE INSIALLED IN 3 Not Power Limited THE SAME ENCLOSURE AS THE ATP DATA IN DATA OUT DATA IN DAT OUT From Sgnature Controller To Next Device or Previous Device 1 2 Figure 4 13 ATP external battery charger wiring 4 21 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications Amplifier backup Various methods are available to provide a spare amplifier in the event that a primary amplifier fails Depending upon the local Authority Having Jurisdiction a single backup amplifier can be required for each primary amplifier or a single backup per bank of amplifiers 4 22 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications SIGA CT1 or CT2 INPUT MODULES Personality Code 3 DEFINED AS MONITOR DEVICE TYPE
325. ram an EST3 integrated system The relative percent obscuration of a detector A series of actions separated by time delays A collection of devices that are configured for testing as a group using the system test function An abbreviation for Signature A The wiring which connects Signature Series devices to the fire alarm panel Notification appliance circuits that follow the action of the panel s alarm silence features Silenceable NACs are used for audible devices only Strokes per minute An action that is activated upon power up of the panel and remains active until manually reset A sequence that is begun upon power up of the panel An IDC input circuit used to monitor the status of critical fire protection equipment e g sprinkler valves Condition generated when a supervisory zone is open in ground fault or when a Signature Series device is not responding to a poll Condition generated when a supervisory zone or device is shorted A Windows based program used to enter and modify information contained in the system Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol A communication protocol that lets the EST3 system transmit text messages to suitably equipped and supported alphanumeric pagers via the 3 MODCOMP Telephone company A universal 3 pulse evacuation signal meeting the requirements of NFPA Standard 72 section A 2 4 10 a and ULC 527 An input activated by the time of day or day of the month EST3 Installation and Ser
326. ranch length with 6 to 9 SIGA UMs configured for 2 wire smokes Signature Signature Maximum allowable wire distance using non twisted non shielded wire pairs detector module addresses addresses 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG ft m ft m ft m 1 25 0 5045 1538 8015 2443 12748 3886 26 50 0 4494 1370 7139 2176 11355 3461 51 75 0 3950 1204 6275 1913 9981 3042 76 100 0 3414 1040 5423 1653 8625 2629 101 125 0 2884 879 4581 1396 7286 2221 0 1 25 4106 1252 6523 1988 10375 3162 1 25 1 25 3542 1080 5627 1715 8950 2728 26 50 1 25 2985 910 4742 1445 7542 2299 51 75 1 25 2435 742 3868 1179 6152 1875 76 100 1 25 1891 576 3004 916 4778 1456 101 125 1 25 1353 412 2150 655 3419 1042 0 26 50 2869 874 4557 1389 7248 2209 1 25 26 50 2296 700 3648 1112 5802 1768 26 50 26 50 1730 527 2749 838 4372 1332 51 75 26 50 1170 357 1859 567 2957 901 76 100 26 50 617 188 979 299 1558 475 101 125 26 50 68 21 108 33 172 53 0 51 75 1796 547 2853 869 4537 1383 1 25 51 75 1214 370 1929 588 3067 935 26 50 51 75 638 195 1014 309 1613 492 51 75 51 75 69 21 109 33 173 53 76 100 51 75 101 125 51 75 0 76 100 833 254 1323 403 2105 642 1 25 76 100 242 74 385 117 613 187 26 50 76 100 51 75 76 100 76 100 76 100 101 125 76 100 0 101 125 1 25 101 125 26 50 101 125 51 75 101 125 76 100 101 125 101 125 101 125 EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 9 System calculations B 10 Determining the total loop length The total loop length is the sum of the lengths of all t
327. re Controller module e 3 SAC Security Access Control module e 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator module The Signature Controller module supports the SIGA loop The 3 SAC module supports the SAC bus Power for the KPDISP can be taken from the 3 PPS M and routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted pair wires The 3 MODCOM module supports modem communication between the control panel and the KDC programs via telephone lines In the Class B configuration illustrated an appropriate RS 485 line terminating resistor 15 required in the KPDISP located in partition 4 The electrical room partition 1 must be armed 24 hours a day and have limited high level access SDU programming When programming the system for this application you define the required partitions and assign the correct partition number to each security device Part of the programming effort includes using the Resource Profile Manager RPM tool to create resource profiles for the site owner and for each company owner Since none of the devices are shared each company should receive 100 of the resources of their KPDISP A small percentage may be set aside for use of the site owner depending on the owner s policy Programming for the 3 MODCOM module determines the dialer and modem parameters defines the receivers and accounts and assigns each account to the correct receiver Finally when running the RPM tool you specify which if any of the KPD
328. remote microphone 15 used disconnect the remote microphone wiring TB1 11 amp TB1 12 from the 3 ASU Verify a remote microphone trouble is annunciated Press the All Call switch on the front of the 3 ASU Verify the Call LED next to the switch lights Remove the microphone from its bracket press the Push To Talk PTT switch Verify that that the preannouncement tone 1f configured sounds followed by the Ready to Page LED lighting Speak into the microphone and verify that the Page Level Meter is operational and the message is being transmitted over all speakers 3 FTCU Firefighter Telephone Unit 1 Verify that the 3 FTCU is installed using accepted workmanship standards Verify the wiring to all devices The SIGA CC1 should be set to personality code 6 Verify that the 3 FTCU display indicates 0 Calls Pending and Unit OK Take the master handset off hook Verify that the display indicates Handset off hook Replace the master handset on hook Take a firefighter telephone off hook plug a phone in a phone jack Verify that the incoming call buzzer sounds the display indicates 1 Calls Pending the location of the incoming call is displayed in reversed text and 0 calls connected is shown on the display Silence the buzzer by EST3 Installation and Service Manual Power up and testing pressing the ACK switch Press the Connect switch Verify that the display indicates 0 calls pending
329. res a tamper detection loop Both the bell circuit and the tamper detection loop can be supported by a 3 IDC8 4 module A single phone line that is tested at least once in every 24 hour period can be used Alternately two lines with line cut monitoring can be used in place of a line with 24 hour testing If the central monitoring station CMS does not have testing services the SDU can program the system to issue tests on a fixed or relative basis to meet this requirement EST3 Installation and Service Manual 2 9 Security applications 2 10 The CMS must have a maximum response time of 30 minutes When this application includes partitions the partition that contains the EST3 panel equipped with the 3 MODCOM and local bell must be armed 24 hours a day and have limited high level access Grade A police station connect certificate The equipment installation requirements and application restrictions for a Grade A Police Station Connect Certificate installation are the same as for a Central Station Grade B Alarm Certificate installation as described above Central station grade C alarm certificate Figure 2 3 shows the equipment that can be used as part of a Central Station Grade C Alarm Certificate installation Control Panel D 3 MODCOM KPDISP SAC bus 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Telephone lines one Tamper Switch line with 24 hour test or ATCK Attack Kit two lines with line cut monitors
330. resistance between conductors should still read approximately 15 kO 3 Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite 1 With field wiring disconnected verify the continuity of each conductor Each conductor should measure less than 38 2 Measure the resistance between conductors The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are connected to the circuit The circuit resistance between conductors should be between approximately 18 250 devices and 4 5 1 device when devices are installed 3 Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 19 Installation Table 5 3 Field wiring tests Circuit type Addressable analog circuits Traditional initiating device circuits Telephone riser circuit RS 485 communication circuits 5 20 Test 1 Verify the continuity of each conductor Each conductor should measure less than 50 Measure the resistance between conductors The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are connected to the circuit Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite Verify the continuity of eac
331. ribution of audio signals The functions of four of these channels are fixed by the system These four channels are referred to by their functions Page EVAC Alert and Auxiliary Input channels The four remaining channels are referred to as general channels 1 to 4 Under manual or automatic network control each amplifier s input can be connected to either the Alert channel the Evacuation EVAC channel the Page channel the Auxiliary Input channel or one of four 4 general input channels Should conflicting commands be issued to a single amplifier the amplifier responds to the channel with the highest priority The eight channels are prioritized as follows with the Page channel having the highest priority EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview Page channel Paging is a manual function An operator is required to select a destination for the page and then make an announcement The Page channel is never automatically selected by the EST3 system The page channel always carries a live page signal regardless of its source There are three sources which can supply the paging signal 1 the local 3 ASU microphone 2 the remote microphone and the 3 the firefighter telephone system These sources are automatically prioritized as shown in Table 1 2 Table 1 2 Page priorities Priority Page signal source 1 highest Local microphone 2 Firefighter phone 3 lowest Remote microphone The page command is a non latc
332. rm the programmed advance feature currently only degraded mode Changes to the active state when the Signature controller module in rail slot xx reports an actual and expected data mismatch 8 25 Service and troubleshooting Table 8 19 Local alarm pseudo points Address Label 0676 Unprogrammed Device 0676 Unprogrammed Device Data Card 1 0686 Unprogrammed Device Data Card 2 Table 8 20 Local trouble pseudo points Address Label 0001 Class A Fault Spur 0002 Class A Fault Video Bus 0003 Annunciator Supervision 0004 Rail Module Communication Fault 0005 Video Communication Fault 0006 RAM Fault or Stack Fault 0007 Code Supervision 0008 Internal Fault 0009 Configuration Fault 0010 Database Supervision 0071 Task Failure 0071 Waiting for SDU Download 0600 Annunciator Supervision 0601 Class A Failure 0601 Rail Module Communication Fault 0602 Ground Fault Detection 0603 Audio Supervision 8 26 Source 3 AADC1 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 3 DSDC 3 SSDC1 3 SDDC1 Source 3 SAC 3 SAC 3 SAC 3 SAC 3 SAC 3 SAC 3 SAC 3 SAC 3 SAC 3 SAC 3 SAC 3 SAC General CPU General CPU CPU Description Device not defined in SDU database is in alarm or trouble state Device not defined in SDU database is in alarm or trouble state Device not defined in SDU database is in alarm or trouble state Description Fault or break in Class A loop on SAC bus Fault or break in Class A
333. rovide an integral 24 Vdc visual notification appliance circuit Amplifier modules are available in 20 40 and 95 watt versions with each amplifier providing a single supervised Class B or A audio output circuit The amplifier is configurable for either 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms output An independent supervised Class B or Class A 24 3 5 Amp notification appliance circuit NAC is also provided on the 20 and 40 watt amplifiers to drive notification appliances In addition automatic backup amplifiers can be added on a switched common backup configuration Each audio power amplifier has an integral demultiplexer making the 8 audio channels available to the amplifier s input as directed by the system programming Each amplifier also contains circuitry that handles routine signal processing functions such as channel priority The amplifier s output is a dedicated supervised 25 70 Vrms speaker circuit which covers one audio zone in the protected facility Figure 1 4 is an example of an enclosure with four zone amplifiers and a backup amplifier In response to an alarm selected audio amplifiers have been connected to the required audio channels Note that three different audio signals are being broadcast simultaneously EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 7 System overview Network Data Riser Network Audio Riser Central Processor Module Equipment Enclosure Local Rail Bus 9 a
334. rovides interruption of power to audible devices at a predetermined rate or sequence A predefined list of SDU commands You can activate a command list from a rule from another command list or from an external command and control system Users of the ACDB program can specify which command list is executed for an access control event The RPM exports the command list names labels in the resource profile To convert data entered during programming into a format used by the fire alarm control panel Card Reader Controller Digital alarm communicator transmitter A system component which transmits digital alarm supervisory and trouble signals to a central monitoring station CMS over dial up telephone lines The 3 MODCOM is a DACT User defined permanently stored system parameters containing system zone definitions device types responses messages etc Any Signature Series detector or module A number that uniquely identifies a detector or module on a Signature data circuit See DACT Prevent an input output or system feature from functioning To send a compiled project database from your PC to the system control panel Electrically erasable programmable read only memory Nonvolatile memory containing the system database The check in group response generated when an active check in occurs outside the normal check in time period i e an emergency Permit an input output or system feature to function Erasable
335. rries a signal designed to notify the occupants that an emergency situation exists in the facility Occupants hearing the alert signal are not in immediate danger but should prepare to evacuate In some installations the alert signal advises occupants that persons evacuating the danger area will be entering the area for safety The Alert channel is preprogrammed and activated by the system in response to an alarm The Alert signal is automatically sent to areas that are not in immediate danger and do not require immediate evacuation The Alert channel has priority over all other channels except the Page and EVAC channels The alarm silence function automatically silences the Alert channel when an operator presses the Alarm Silence switch General channel The General channel is used to distribute special purpose signals to special areas in the facility Typically these areas include elevator cabs stairwells and areas in less peril than those areas receiving the Alert signal The general channel signals can be preprogrammed in response to an alarm or they may be manually activated EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 37 System overview 1 38 General channels have a lower priority than the Alert channel The alarm silence function does not automatically silence the Alert channel unless programmed to do so Manual audio zone selection If manual audio zone selection is required on the system the appropriate control displa
336. rt 1 35 page to evac 1 35 pager messages 3 3 panel controller 8 9 partitions muster application 3 34 passive infrared motion detector 3 28 3 29 peripherals required for maglocks 3 28 personality fault 8 63 PIN schedules 3 6 Police station connected Grade A with basic line security C 3 power elevator control application 3 23 transformer 3 5 power for continuous locks application 3 35 power for intermittent locks application 3 37 power from a remote source application 3 42 power from an AC source application 3 39 power supplies AC power source 3 41 circuit common 3 8 3 23 3 44 3 46 continuous locks application 3 36 DC power supply 3 42 3 44 elevator control application 3 23 ground fault detection 3 8 intermittent locks application 3 38 jumper settings 3 8 panel 3 8 power from a remote source 3 44 2 3 Index power supplies continued power from a remote source application 3 42 power from an AC source application 3 39 remote controls 3 46 remote power source 3 44 transformer 3 8 transformer source 3 41 power wiring 5 42 power up procedure 6 3 prealarm setting 1 27 preventive maintenance schedule 7 3 primary power supply 8 7 priority audio channel 1 34 problem classification 8 3 Proprietary Grade A C 7 Proprietary Grade AA C 7 proximity cards 3 6 pseudo point descriptions 8 24 R rac
337. s 8 47 Device troubleshooting 8 49 Signature diagnostic tools 8 51 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Content DSDC status 8 65 Addressable analog diagnostic tools 8 70 3 AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller 8 74 Addressable analog device troubleshooting 8 75 Wiring problems 8 77 System addresses A 1 Address format A 2 LRM addresses A 4 Control display module addresses A 9 Device addresses A 10 System calculations B 1 Network data riser limits B 2 Signature data circuit wire length B 5 Notification appliance circuit calculations B 11 25 or 70 Vrms wire length B 17 Addressable analog circuit wire length B 19 Cabinet battery B 20 SAC bus power B 21 CPU memory 26 Fiber optic cable worksheet B 28 Listing requirements C 1 standards 2 Minimum requirements for UL security applications C 3 UL and ULC requirements C 10 Glossary Y 1 Index 2 1 EST3 Installation and Service Manual iii Content Document history Date 17JUL96 31MAR97 14DEC98 210CT99 30AUG01 290CT01 17AUG04 21JUNO07 Revision 1 0 1 5 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 Reason for change Initial release Revised detector cleaning procedure CAB amp RCC Cabinets download wiring Compatibility info Power supply specifications 3 CPU wiring System addressing
338. s Pre Amp 1 25 Vrms Pre Amp Z2 70 Vrms Pre Amp Z2 25 Vrms Jumper setting 1 1 2 P1 2 3 2 1 2 1 2 3 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications EOL 15 0 EOL EOL rm 15KQ EOL S EBEN EN EBEN ERN L BEEN EN EN To TB1 on Audio Amplifier To TB1 on Audio Amplifier To TB1 on Audio Amplifier To TB1 on Audio Amplifier AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE BACKUP Riser 1 Riser 2 Riser 3 To TB2 on Audio Amplifier To TB2 on Audio Amplifier coocoocooc fo To TB2 on Audio Amplifier To TB2 on Audio Amplifier 555555555 55265 55 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 m UID WEIDI E io H gt PCON1 CDR Shield if used Class A circuits Only Field wiring identical Field wiring identical to riser
339. s a quick reference for interpreting the mapping of system addresses Content Address format A 2 LRM addresses A 4 Control display module addresses A 9 Device addresses A 10 EST3 Installation and Service Manual A 1 System addresses Address format A 2 The system derives the addresses it assigns from the panel s cabinet number and the LRM s location within the panel see Figure 1 The basic address format is PPCCDDDD where PP is the panel s cabinet number The cabinet number is assigned when the installer downloads the CPU database into the panel CC is the LRM s slot address The cabinet number and the slot address make up the LRM s logical address DDDD is the device s point address The LRM s logical address and device s point address make up the device or circuit s logical address The CRC Card Reader Controller and KPDISP Keypad Display are devices supported by a 3 SAC module However they also act as independent processors and have their own pseudo points For this reason their device numbers are further subdivided You can think of a SAC device as having this address format PPCCSSDD SS is the CRC or KPDISP device number as assigned during LRM configuration DD is a pseudo point within the device EST3 Installation and Service Manual System addresses
340. s on the 3 ASU Audio Source Unit When the Ready to Page LED lights steady speak into the telephone still connected and verify that the telephone s audio is distributed throughout the facility Press the Disconnect switch on the 3 FTCU and hang up the master and remote phones 8a Class A telephone riser configuration Disconnect the telephone riser wiring TB1 2 amp 1 2 or TB1 3 amp TB1 4 from the 3 FTCU and verify that a riser trouble message appears in the Trouble queue Take a firefighter telephone off hook plug a phone in a phone jack Verify that the incoming call buzzer sounds the display indicates 1 Calls Pending the location of the incoming call is displayed in reversed text and 0 calls connected is shown in the display Restore the connection 8b Class B telephone riser configuration Disconnect the telephone riser wiring TB1 1 amp TB1 2 from the 3 FTCU and verify that a riser trouble message appears in the Trouble queue Restore the connection EST3 Installation and Service Manual 6 15 Power up and testing 6 16 9 Disconnect each phone station jack station and verify that a Trouble message appears in the Trouble queue Restore the connections 3 ZAxx Audio Amplifiers 1 Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail connectors and secured with the two snap rivets Verify that removable terminal strips are firmly seated Verify that the 3 ASU is installed using accepted w
341. s signal depending on JP2 setting with a 1 Vrms 1 kHz tone at the amplifier input If a oscilloscope is used to adjust levels use the following peak to peak voltage levels hd 25 Vrms T1 V pp 70 Vrms 200 V pp The amplifier must be connected to a load to properly adjust the gain In the event the actual speaker circuit can not be used a dummy load must be fabricated according to Table 8 16 The wattage rating of the dummy load must exceed the output power rating of the amplifier Table 8 16 Amplifier dummy load values Output power 25 Vrms output 70 Vrms output 30 Watts 20 8 Q 30W 1670 30W 50 Watts 12 5 Q 50W 1000 50W To maintain DC supervision and keep the amplifier out of trouble while adjusting the gain connect a 47 kO EOL resistor EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting across the NAC B output TB4 2 and TB4 3 then connect the dummy load to the A Output terminals TB4 4 and TB4 5 Caution Do not operate the amplifier with both the speaker circuit and the dummy load connected Table 8 17 SIGA AAxx Audio Amplifier troubleshooting Problem No output Backup 1 kHz Tone sounding Low Output Possible cause oa F WN gt 1 2 1 2 24 Vdc power or input signal missing Output circuits wired incorrectly Daughter board not firmly seated in connector Module defined incorrectly in database In backup mode with backup amplifier or wiring problem Branch
342. se expected corrective action must be taken Before commencing testing notify all areas where the alarm sounds and off premises locations that receive alarm and trouble transmissions that testing is in progress Records of all testing and maintenance shall be kept on the protected premises for a period of at least five 5 years Required Tools e Slotted screwdriver insulated Digital multimeter 2inch 30 5 cm jumper lead with alligator clips Panel door key A complete check of installed field wiring and devices should be made at regular intervals in accordance with NFPA 72 and ULC 524 requirements These requirements are covered in the chapter on preventive maintenance EST3 Installation and Service Manual Power up and testing Control and emergency communications equipment testing The procedures listed in the following sections should be performed on the equipment installed in each cabinet connected to the system These procedures are designed to test the hardware and its installation The applications programming will be tested later Note The network configuration information must be downloaded into the network and Audio Source Unit using the System Definition Utility SDU program before starting testing Primary power supplies 1 Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards Verify adequate separation between power limited and nonpower limited wiring Refer to N
343. security Multiple racks can be installed side by side where additional cabinet capacity is required The RKU series of 19 in 48 3 cm equipment racks 1s used to house the banked amplifiers and associated equipment Five sizes of racks are available to meet all requirements These are listed in Table 4 below EST3 Installation and Service Manual 4 3 Centralized audio applications Table 4 1 RKU enclosure specifications Model Width Height Depth Rack Space RKU 36 B 22 31 in 41 06 in 18 50 in 36 75 in 56 7 cm 104 3 cm 47 0 cm 93 3 cm RKU 42 B 22 31 in 46 31in 18 50 in 42 00 in 56 7 cm 117 6 cm 47 0 cm 106 7 cm RKU 61 B 22 31 in 65 56 in 18 50 in 61 25 In 56 7 cm 166 5 cm 47 0 cm 155 6 cm RKU 70 B 22 31 in 74 31in 18 50 in 70 00 in 56 7 cm 188 7 cm 47 0 cm 177 8 cm RKU 77 B 22 31 in 81 31 in 18 50 in 77 00 in 56 7 cm 206 5 cm 47 0 cm 195 6 cm 44 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications REAR DOOR W KEY LOCK CONDUIT KNOCKOUTS 0 5 amp 0 75 CONDUIT TOPENDPANEL y A A 4 RACK HEIGHT SPACE 18 50 in 47 0 cm RKU Series Equipment Rack Front View Refer to Text for Dimensions A SUPPORT BAR B 19 RACK MOUNT Figure 4 1 RKU Equipment Rack EST3 Installation and Service Manual 4 5 Centralized audio applications ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel 4 6 TROUBLE SILENCED mm PRESS TO SILENCE
344. smitting data and receiving acknowledgements Obtain this device locally and place a 0 1 UF 200 V or greater capacitor in series with one of the leads You can install the capacitor permanently within the case if you prefer Alternately you can use a lineman s butt set in monitor mode During downloading from a remote computer you will hear the distinct sound of modems establishing a connection then a series EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 17 Service and troubleshooting 8 18 of rapid chirps as data is transmitted from the ACDB or KDC program Note Remove the amplifier when you finish troubleshooting Do not install the amplifier permanently Common causes of problems Evaluation of visual and audible indications will usually serve to isolate the source of trouble Before attempting to replace the 3 MODCOM module the following causes of problems should be investigated e The 3 MODCOM module is not properly seated on the rail connectors or one or more connector pins have been bent away from the associated sockets modular telephone plug is not connected to the appropriate line 1 or line 2 jack or is not fully seated or is not connected at the telephone block The 3 MODCOM has been configured with incorrect CMS telephone numbers The telephone line is faulty If the module and telephone line are okay check the CMS telephone number by dialing it using a standard telephone plugged directly in
345. source profile tree D Hardware configuration SDU programming SDU ACDB KDC operation Figure 2 5 Multiple site security and access control system Hardware configuration Each site must have an EST3 system In each EST3 system at least one panel must include a 3 MODCOM module to support modem communication between headquarters and sites A and B The KDC and ACDB programs can communicate with the EST3 system either by modem or by direct connection to an RS 232 port on the CPU module 2 14 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Security applications Each system includes 3 SAC modules as required to support the security and access control systems implemented SDU programming No special project programming is required to enable multiple site security and access control systems When running the RPM tool each site receives 100 of the resources for that site Note that all profiles must be sent to the site C headquarters when the project is finished ACDB KDC operation At the headquarters site all three profiles are imported into the ACDB KDC program The result is a global tree of resources that includes each KPDISP and CRC device in each site Importing all the profiles into one ACDB KDC program creates the global database When additions or changes to the KPDISP database are made headquarters can transmit the changes to the affected sites EST3 Installation and Service Manual 2 15 Security applications Mul
346. source to the auxiliary and four general channels Figure 1 8 shows the all call minus mode page source to auxiliary and general channel connections The EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 13 System overview page auxiliary and four general audio channels all receive the page signal Any amplifier connected to the page auxiliary or general audio channels will receive the page The EVAC and alert channels are connected to their respective signal sources as in the normal mode Automatic messaging One of the features of the 3 ASU Audio Source Unit is the method used to monitor the integrity of the digital audio system When an audio messaging system is configured default audio messages are recorded for the Evacuation and Alert channels The text of default messages should be generic in nature and should not include location specific instructions When the system is in the normal condition the 3 ASU continuously transmits default messages over the network audio riser The zone amplifiers use the default messages to verify their operational integrity as well as the integrity of the riser wiring When an alarm is detected the evacuation and alert message channels are selected by the amplifiers in the appropriate areas in the facility as directed by the system rules If a specific evacuation message has been programmed to play in response to the alarm it is sent out over the evacuation channel Location specific evacuation messages
347. t in place Similarly the EST3 system power supplies can provide 24 Vdc power to the RZB or UIO cards or existing power supplies can be left in place Refer to the following installation sheets for wiring details 3 AADCI and 3 AADCI MB Addressable Analog Driver Controller Installation Sheet RZB V N 12 6 3 Remote Zone Interface Module Installation Sheet e UIO 12 Universal Input Output Module Installation Sheet EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 41 Installation AC power and DC battery wiring 5 42 Due to power limited nonpower limited wiring separation requirements it is easier to route and wire the nonpower limited AC power and battery conductors before installing the LRMs in the rails Nonpower limited wiring should be routed to the chassis notches to the left and rear of the cabinet Power limited wiring should be routed to the right and front of the cabinet WARNING Do not energize power until instructed to do so 1 Connect the AC power source to TBI line neutral and ground terminals on the 3 PPS M Primary Power Supply Heat Sink and the 3 BPS M Booster Power Supply Heat Sink s DO NOT ENERGIZE THE AC POWER SOURCE AT THIS TIME 2 Connect the positive battery lead to TB2 1 and the negative battery lead to TB2 2 Each heat sink assembly must have its own pair of 12 AWG 2 5 sq mm wires going to the battery Do not connect the heat sinks assemblies together and run a common wire to the battery DO NO
348. tains amplifiers and a 3 ASU include the following features in the initial startup version of the project database Program a control display module toggle switch to send a 0 7 Vrms 1 kHz tone to the amplifiers Label the switch IKHZ TONE and add the following rule to the rules file AMPLIFIER SETUP SW 1KHZ TONE AMPON TO Ch Gen MSGON 1KHZ TONE TO Ch Gen Record a message in the 3 ASU database labeled IKHZ TONE Import the Steady tone at IkHz wav file from the EST3 Fire Alarm Support Tools CD ROM into this record Note For firmware versions earlier than 1 5 copy the Steady tone at 1kHz wav file from the NLibrary Sounds FCCA directory on the EST3 Fire Alarm Support Tools CD ROM to a directory on your hard drive that doesn t contain any other files You can import the file from this directory 5 16 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation If a CDR 3 Zone Coder is installed and connected to the AUX input on a 3 ASU include the following features in the initial startup version of the project database Program a control display module toggle switch that is to turn on the amplifiers and select the Auxiliary channel Label the switch INPUT ADJUST and add the following rule to the rules file 3 ASU AUX INPUT SETUP SW AUX INPUT ADJ AMPON TO Ch Aux EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 17 Installation System installation sequence Follow these gener
349. tation SDU programming ACDB KDC operation Figure 3 3 Access control reporting to a central monitoring station When a reportable access event occurs the event message travels from the CRC to the 3 SAC The 3 SAC passes the message to the CPU which executes a predefined command list The command list specifies the details of the message that is sent to the 3 MODCOM for transmission to the CMS EST3 Installation and Service Manual SDU programming Access control applications Reporting access control events to a CMS depends entirely on programming and the creation of command lists In essence you must assign a command list to each CRC event you want to report The command list contains the details of the message to be transmitted The following CRC events can be assigned command events Access granted Access granted irregular Access granted anti passback Access granted muster Access denied unknown Access denied reader disabled Access denied access level not active Access denied outside schedule 1 Access denied outside schedule 2 Access denied partition armed Access denied PIN not entered Access denied PIN not valid Access denied two person timeout Access denied anti passback Access denied escort EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 15 Access control applications Common door access Description of the application A site that makes use of a common door is shown in Figure 3 4 Here the door is the
350. tches inoperative All Module LEDs and switches inoperative AND host module working correctly Switch activation does not perform the required function EST3 Installation and Service Manual Possible cause and wires reversed 3 RS485 card not seated properly Network A and Network B circuits crossed Improper wire No power to panel Ribbon cable between LCD and CPU loose or defective CPU defective LCD defective CPU not configured in SDU for LCD mU Or comu et ear Omm Ribbon cable between display and CPU module loose or defective Display not configured in SDU Display defective Display not defined in SDU database no dese eno Domain not configured correctly 3 FIBMB fiber optic interface Several models of the 3 FIB card are available to support compatible operations with different models of the CPU 3 FIB Compatible with the 3 CPU 3 FIBA Compatible with the 3 CPU and 3 CPU1 The 3 FIBA provides Class A audio when used with the 3 CPUI but not when used with the 3 CPU 3 FIBMB Compatible with both the 3 CPUI and the 3 CPU3 but not with the 3 CPU Note If network communication must be maintained when the node 15 powered down for service connect a 12 V battery to J2 on the fiber optic interface card The LEDs on the 3 FIBMB interface board adjacent to the fiber optic indicate circuit activity Test jumpers Jumper JP1 is used to put the module in test mode In the test mode
351. te power supply The 3 SAC module supports the SAC bus Power for the CRC is normally taken from the 3 PPS M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted pair wires In this case the power from the 3 PPS M is simply passed through the CRC The remote power supply is supervised by the 3 SSDC 1 module via the Signature loop The remote power supply must share a common ground with the 3 PPS M SDU programming When programming the system for this application you ll need to configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the SDU This can be either a strike or maglock EST3 Installation and Service Manual Access control applications Remote controls Description of the application In any access control system a card reader and CRC can be used to operate devices that are completely remote from the CRC In such cases the CRC simply creates an access event and passes it to the 3 SAC for processing by the CPU Any device that can be controlled by an EST3 panel can be operated in response to an access event As a typical example Figure 3 18 shows how the entrance devices to a secured parking area could be operated from a remote card reader Note that any type of CRC input device could be used in place of a card reader Control panel 3 SAC Signature controller Command lists c SAC bus Spotlight Signature data circuit Signature relay Other fact
352. ted system the voltage outside the 2 second test period may float randomly but if the system is faulted the voltage is likely to be a fixed value such as 3 or 19 Substituting known good Signature series devices When substituting a known good detector or module in place of a suspect device one of two scenarios can take place If the substituted device is the same model as the suspect device the system accepts it with no further operator action When the substituted device is installed the system goes into trouble When the quantity of devices defined on the circuit is reached the system automatically remaps the circuit stores the revised information and returns to normal This process may take a few minutes If the substituted device is a different model than the suspect device when the device count is correct the Signature controller module automatically remaps the circuit A trouble occurs at the address of the suspect device as the result of a map fault because the known good device s parameters differ from those of the suspect device that was removed from the circuit You must accept the parameters of the known good device to remove the map fault These can be changed later You cannot use device substitution as a troubleshooting technique for Signature security devices By design the Signature controller does not automatically remap a replaced security device This is intended to prevent swapping a security device
353. th each device You can use this information to diagnose problems A message counter tracks the number of communications sent between each device and the 3 AADCI controller An error counter tracks the number of communications failures occurring between each device and the 3 AADCI controller Both counts return to 0 each time the controller is restarted You can use these To help to isolate a problem compare the number of messages sent to a specific device to the number sent to a neighboring device of the same type Devices are polled each time the system is started and any time an object reports its status as trouble or alarm Polling frequency 8 72 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting differs for different objects and circumstances Pull stations are polled much more frequently than detectors or modules Devices that report communication failure are polled more often than devices that are not experiencing the failure Devices with high message counts but few errors may be pull stations or devices that change state regularly such as monitor modules Devices that have increased error counts and only marginally increased message counts may indicate wiring or device problems e Devices with low message counts and an equal number of errors are non existent devices All 198 addressed are polled occasionally to identify any devices that may have been installed and not configured If th
354. th every panel upstream of the local CPU module Tip To download data to every panel across the Class B network data riser connect to the first connection on the network data riser as the download panel the panel with no connections on its Network A terminals EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 21 System overview Foreign language support 1 22 Printer use with foreign languages When supporting a single byte character set language your printer must be able to support the appropriate DOS code page To support a double byte character set language your printer must be able to support the appropriate Windows code page The required code pages are listed below Remember that not all Windows characters are available on DOS printers so some characters are not supported on these printers Language Code page Chinese simplified Windows Page Code 936 GB Chinese traditional Windows Code Page 950 Big 5 Korean Windows Code Page 949 Extended Wansung Hebrew DOS Code Page 862 Turkish DOS Code Page 857 Dutch French Italian DOS Code Page 850 Portuguese Spanish English Polish Slovak DOS Code Page 852 Russian DOS Code Page 866 Bilingual language support EST3 display modules all LCD models and the KPDISP feature bilingual operation For two languages to be supported simultaneously they must appear on the same code page Refer to the table below to determine the system bilingual capabilities Bilingual oper
355. the real time audio signal and converts it to a digital format The output of the digital message playback unit and the integral tone generator database 15 already in the digital format The 8 signal sources in digital format are then combined together as selected by the system designer using a multiplexer This makes up the network audio riser signal EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 9 System overview Firefighter s telephone Auxiliary input Network audio riser eight Multiplexer digitized audio channels Digital message playback unit Tone message database Digital signals Figure 1 6 ASU Signal Flow The amplifiers at the remote panels extract the audio signals from the network riser amplify it and send it to the speakers Local tone 25 70 VRMS generator supervised audio circuit Network audio riser Network data riser command and control EOLR Ej Channel eight digitized audio 4 El selection Power d channels and decode d amp E supervision BA We Figure 1 7 Amplifier Signal Flow Audio signal priority During system configuration each of the eight available audio channels is assigned one of the five available attributes listed in Table 1 1 The Page and Auxiliary attributes may only be assigned to a single channel The General attribute may be assigned to up to four channels Table 1 1
356. the first 5096 of the circuit Re connect the previously isolated portion of the circuit and open the circuit at a new location If during the first open circuit test some devices restored open the circuit at a location electrically farther from the Signature controller module and repeat the test If during the first open circuit test no devices restored open the circuit at a location electrically closer to the module and repeat the test Continue to increase or decrease the EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting number of devices on the opened circuit leg until you eventually isolate the single device or wire segment that is causing the problem Distinguishing short circuits from off hook conditions in telephone risers If local regulations require the ability to distinguish between a short circuit and an off hook condition in a telephone riser you must configure the circuit so that it functions as a 4 state telephone The table below lists compatible riser selector modules and compatible telephone sets Table 8 27 Devices than can be used to configure a 4 state telephone Riser selectors Telephone modules SIGA CC1 Portable handset and receptacle P N SIGA CC1S 6833 1 and 6830 3 UNE neon teen SIGA MCC1S Remote telephone and wall box Nonbreak Glass P N 6831 4 and 6830 1 For instructions on configuring a four state telephone refer to the installation sheet supplied with the SIGA input
357. the page commands work is illustrated in Figure 1 17 This figure shows a nine story high rise building with a fire on the 6th floor The fire plan requires the evacuation signal to be sounded on the fire floor floor above the fire and floor below the fire The alert signal 1s required to sounded in all other areas of the building except the stairwells The first column Fire Alarm shows the automatic responses on the affected floors according to the fire plan ASU page commands Floor Fire Alarm Page to Pageto All Call All Call Zoned Evac Alert Minus Paging Stairwells Page Page 9th floor Alert Alert Page Alert Page Alert 8th floor Alert Alert Page Alert Page Alert Tth floor Evac Page Evac Evac Page Evac 6th floor Evac Page Evac Evac Page Page 5th floor Evac Page Evac Evac Page Evac 4th floor Alert Alert Page Alert Page Alert 3rd floor Alert Alert Page Alert Page Alert 2nd floor Alert Alert Page Alert Page Alert 1st floor Alert Alert Page Alert Page Alert Legend Fire floor Floor above or floor below fire Figure 1 17 ASU Page Command Example The Page to EVAC command replaces the EVAC signal with the Page signal as shown in the figure s second column The third column shows the Page to Alert command response all the Alert signals have been replaced by the Page signal The All Call Minus command directs the Page to the areas which are not receivin
358. their original locations the map supervision function recognizes that previously mapped serial numbers occupy new map locations Once the mapping supervision function has recognized the need to re map the circuit the panel is put in the pending state Once in the map pending state the panel will automatically re map the circuit when the quantity of devices re installed on the circuit is equal to or greater than the quantity of devices defined in the original map If the panel were connected to a computer running the SDU Program the DSDC status function would indicate map pending EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting In Figure 8 13 The PHS S N 34 1 originally installed at address 102 has been installed in the location originally occupied by the IPHS S N 33 1 Control Panel Display PHS installed 102 PHS TROUBLE ppmm101 in new location EI SIN 34 1 IPHS not yet installed IPHS S N 33 1 DSDC Status Screen CT1 SIN 48 1 COMMON TROUBLE P code 02 MAP PENDING CT2 204 S N 49 1 3MAP3 CDR P codes 01 01 Figure 8 13 Partially restored circuit Until all devices are re installed on the circuit and the circuit is automatically re mapped the original S N to panel address correlation is still valid Examination of Figure 8 13 shows that the device address moves with the detector until the circuit is re mapped In this example relocating the PHS detector temporarily relocated
359. tion affects all the cabinets on the network Figure 1 15 Sample domain consisting of three groups Using the System Definition Utility SDU you can configure the system so that information from any cabinet can be selectively sent to any combination of other cabinets on the network Each cabinet may selectively transmit the following information to other cabinets on the network Reset commands Alarm Silence commands Trouble Silence commands Drill commands e Acknowledge commands EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview A cabinet can also be configured to receive state changes Alarm Supervisory Trouble Monitor firefighter telephone incoming calls logicals events audio controls and so forth from a select group of cabinets Feature function domains are associated with the cabinet providing the operator controls In Figure 1 15 the feature function domain for Cabinet 1 which has the operator controls for the first subnet is groups 1 and 3 The feature function domain for Cabinet 6 which has the operator controls for the second subnet is groups 2 and 3 Two subnetworks with operator controls at cabinets 1 and 6 Cabinets 3 and 4 are common to both subnetworks Commands Sending Cabinet Reset Alarm Trouble Drill Acknowledge cabinet state silence silence bm Cabinet 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 2 Cabinet 2 1 2
360. tion and photoelectric elements are used the sensitivity setting applies to both elements Reduced sensitivity settings are used to reduce the occurrence of nuisance alarms EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview The alarm sensitivity setting may be individually set for each detector using the SDU program Alternate alarm sensitivity setting Alternate alarm sensitivity refers to the secondary threshold expressed in percent smoke obscuration at which the smoke detector goes into alarm The alternate alarm sensitivity setting for smoke detectors can be set to one of the same five sensitivity levels as the primary alarm When smoke detectors having both ionization and photoelectric elements are used the sensitivity setting applies to both elements This feature permits increasing or reducing an individual detector s sensitivity at various times of the day dependent upon environmental conditions occupancy manufacturing processes etc Increased sensitivity 1s typically used when a facility is unoccupied Reduced sensitivity is typically used to reduce the occurrence of nuisance alarms when occupancy or environmental conditions may create prealarm conditions An alternate alarm sensitivity setting for each detector can be set using the SDU program Alarm verification Upon receipt of the initial alarm signal from a verified detector the EST3 panel issues a detector reset command After a programmable reset retard period
361. tiple tenant security 2 16 Description of the application Figure 2 6 illustrates a simple strip mall security application The mall consists of three identical stores and an electrical room The control panel supports a SIGA data circuit and a SAC bus The panel also supports modem communications via telephone lines The SIGA circuit has pull stations and smoke detectors In addition the SIGA circuit has two security devices the motion detector and the SIGA SEC2 security loop module The SIGA SEC2 connects a conventional door contact to the SIGA circuit The SAC bus is used exclusively for the KPDISP devices Each company owner has a Keypad Display Configuration KDC program The program runs on a computer equipped with a modem and uses the modem and a dial up telephone line to communicate with the control panel Each company owner can use the KDC to download changes to that company s portion of the security database The changes are routed through the panel to the appropriate KPDISP unit Note Fire and security functionality cannot be programmed into a control panel from a remote location You must perform all panel programming on site Changes to the security database have no impact on the parameters or operations of listed fire system equipment The control panel can be configured to provide telephone connection to a central monitoring station CMS Each tenant company can have a separate account at the same CMS or ca
362. to connect the CRC to the control panel The SAC bus requires one pair for data communication One wire of the second pair is required to maintain a common ground between the control panel and the CRC For details refer to the topic Power from an AC source later in this chapter If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications must have ground fault detection disabled and must have a circuit ground circuit common that is isolated from earth ground Hardware configuration In this application none of the CRC input circuits or relay contacts are used The CRC simply reads the card and passes the command list request to the 3 SAC and CPU for processing Since the CRC lock and input circuits are not used you must provide dummy loads to maintain correct supervision currents See the installation sheet for the correct load values SDU programming The SDU programmer must create a command list for each combination of floors desired ACDB operation The site security officer determines which floors should be accessible for an access level and assigns the correct command list to the access granted event for that level The site security officer also determines which cardholders belong to each access level EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 23 Access control applications Emergency exit door 3 24 Description of the application An emergency ex
363. to service in new locations after re mapping IPHS 102 SIN 33 1 CT1 S N 48 1 P code 02 DSDC Status Screen CT2 S N 49 1 3MAP5 CDR P codes 01 01 Figure 8 15 Final map When a factory new detector replaces an in service detector until mapped the new detector is operational with a default address of 00 When the circuit is re mapped the new detector will be given the address assigned to its map location Ifa factory new detector is added over and above the expected number of devices on the circuit it will be operational with a default address of 00 however the panel will be in trouble as the actual map contains one more device than the expected map 8 44 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Modules When a module 15 replaced with another module of the same type upon automatic re mapping the replacement module will be assigned the personality code of the module originally installed at that map location If a module is replaced with a module of a different type one of three things can happen If you replace a single address module such as the SIGA CTI or SIGA CCI with a different type of single input module the circuit will re map all devices however the new device type will not operate due to incompatible personality codes A map fault will be generated because the actual device differs from the expected device The data entry program must be used to accept the new
364. to the RJ 31X jack The jack will accommodate a standard modular phone plug You should hear a dial tone when going off hook lose the dial tone after dialing the first digit hear the receiver ringing hear the CMS receiver go off hook and send a handshake tone Typical problems dialing the CMS involve missing or incorrect area codes the need to dial 1 for long distance and missing line access codes example dialing 9 for an outside line If the receiver answers check that it is sending out the correct handshake For SIA P2 3 1 pulse SIA P3 4 2 pulse and SIA DCS the receiver should send a single tone of 0 5 to 1 0 seconds in duration For Contact ID the handshake signal consists of two short tones of different frequency For TAP there should be a modem type exchange of handshake messages If the receiver sends the correct handshake and the 3 MODCOM transmits data but the receiver does not send an acknowledgement check that the receiver is compatible with the desired protocol SIA DCS P2 and P3 standards are available from the Security Industry Association Typical problems involve an incompatible format or data message If the handshake and acknowledge signals are audible check that the correct account number was configured in the 3 MODCOM EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting and that the code being sent was correctly programmed in the CMS computer Where a 3 MODCOM module is suspecte
365. troller card Click here to disable mapping on the selected controller card Select display refresh rate here Click here to enable mapping on the selected controller card Figure 8 24 DSDC in process progress chart EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 69 Service and troubleshooting Addressable analog diagnostic tools The SDU addressable analog diagnostic tools are designed to assist in isolating and correcting faults with addressable analog circuits detectors and modules System definition utility The quickest method for isolating most common problems is with the Systems Definition Utility SDU diagnostic tools 1 Connect the computer that runs the SDU to the system and open the appropriate project If the actual project is not available create a phantom project with an empty 3 AADCI circuit and connect directly to the module in question 2 From the menu bar select Tools gt System Sensor gt Diagnostics 3 On the Options tab clear the selection from Message Counters and upload Trouble Tables Ready Communication and Display as Device Addresses should be selected 4 Click Upload AADC Tables 5 Select the Status Tables tab when the table upload is complete Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation Each table lists the addresses for the modules and sensors reporting the associated condition with a total at the bottom When displayed as Device Addresses sensor addresses corresp
366. twork which supports up to 64 cabinets on a peer to peer Class A or B token ring network Below 15 a partial list of local rail modules that can be incorporated into a system e Central Processor module CPU One is required for each panel Several models of CPU are available See the current compatibility lists for details Primary Power Supply module 3 PPS M 3 BPS M or 3 BBC M One power supply module is required for each panel Main LCD Display module LCD One LCD is required to provide a point of control for the entire network Additional displays can be added to any CPU module for additional points of control or annunciation Several LCD models are available See the current compatibility lists for details Additional control display modules as required by the application 3 BPS M Booster Power Supply module e 3 MODCOM Modem Communicator module 3 SAC Security Access Control module 3 SSDC 1 Signature Driver Controller module e 3 AADC 1 Analog Addressable Driver Controller module e 3 IDC8 Initiating Device Circuit module 3 OPS Off Premises Signaling module 3 ZAxx Zoned Amplifier modules EST3 Installation and Service Manual System overview The audio and firefighter phone functions use a different hardware format providing operator controls and storage for the microphone and telephone handset in a chassis configuration System features Each cabinet in the system provides local co
367. ual B 11 System calculations B 12 The maximum voltage is the highest voltage measured at the terminals This value is not used in the calculations but 15 given so you can ensure appliance compatibility The rated voltage 1s the theoretical operating minimum for the power supply and is calculated as 8596 of 24 volts The oad factor is a measure of how the power supply voltage reacts when a load is applied The load factor measures the voltage drop per ampere of current drawn by the load The power type reflects the type of power supplied to the NAC terminals at minimum voltage The current draw of notification appliances can vary substantially with the type of power supplied full wave rectified Vfwr or direct current Vdc It is important to know the power type at minimum terminal voltage You ll need to calculate the following values relating to your power supply and to the NAC circuit current These are Minimum voltage Voltage drop The minimum voltage 1s the lowest voltage measured at the NAC terminals when the power supply is under the maximum load for that circuit 1 e for the appliances that constitute the NAC The voltage drop is the difference between the minimum voltage and 16 V This value is for use with the worksheet only EST3 Installation and Service Manual Worksheet method Use this worksheet to determine the maximum cable length of a notification appliance circuit for a given number of app
368. uctors isolates NUM fault Figure 8 10 Ground fault isolation If the LCD Ground Fault LED goes out the ground fault is located on the portion of the circuit that has been disconnected If the LCD Ground Fault LED remains on and no devices restore the short has been isolated to the first 5096 of the circuit Re connect the previously isolated portion of the circuit and open the circuit at a new location If during the first open circuit test the Ground Fault LED went off open the circuit at a location electrically farther from the Signature controller module and repeat the test If during the first open circuit test the Ground Fault LED remained on open the circuit at a location electrically closer to the 3 SSDC 1 and repeat the test Continue to increase or decrease the number of devices on the opened circuit leg and you will eventually isolate a single device or wire segment that is causing the problem The ground fault detection circuitry requires approximately 30 to 40 seconds to respond when the fault is removed EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting The panel performs a ground fault test for 2 seconds at 40 second intervals If the system is working properly the voltage between earth ground and logic negative should be between 12 3 Vdc and 16 8 Vdc during the 2 second test The system reports a ground fault when the voltages are less than 12 3 and more than 16 8 In a non faul
369. uild of the map was scheduled Mapping was aborted by an external event such a new start on a device A rebuild of the map was scheduled Mapping supervision detected that the Device Type of the Device being supervised has changed A Map Fault was flagged Mapping was aborted because there is short or open on the SDC wiring Unable to recreate current map at panel startup The panel will re map to reconstruct the map 8 54 Suggested corrective action 1 N N Upload the current map Compare current map with expected map Write the map back to the Signature controller module Upload the current map Compare current map with expected map Write the map back to the Signature controller module Review the Serial Number or Short Address If missing replace the device Persistent problem is indicative of a wiring fault Please wait for automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing Please wait for automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing Please wait for automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing Please wait for the automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing Please wait for the automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing Replace the device Correct the Signature controller module programming An open or short on a Class A circuit A short across the entire Class B circuit A Reset may be nee
370. uired for a general security system is shown in Figure 2 1 We ll discuss each item shown in the drawing plus the other factors called out on the drawing Control panel Signature data circuit Signature fire MD SEC2 alarm Motion Detector Security Loop devices Module Signature Controller Module 3 SAC Security Access Control Module KPDISP Conventional Keypad Display security devices 3 MODCOM Telephone lines Modem Communication Module Central KDC program monitoring station Distributor Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB KDC operation Resource profile Figure 2 1 Equipment required for a basic security system Equipment The equipment used in security applications includes Control panel Signature Controller module SIGA MD Motion Detector module e SIGA SEC2 Security Loop module 3 SAC Security Access module SAC bus 2 2 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Security applications KPDISP Keypad Display 3 MODCOM Modem Communication module RPM Resource Profile Manager tool KDC Keypad Display Configuration program Control panel Itis a UL listing requirement that all cabinets in a system that includes security functions must have a tamper switch The control panel must include 3 3 TAMPS or 3 TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch Signature Controller module The Signature data circuit plays a dual role i
371. uit load is the total watts required by the audio circuit e Wire resistance is the resistance rating of the wire per 1000 ft pair see Table B 5 For example the maximum allowable wire length for an audio circuit consisting of a 30 W 25 Vrms amplifier driving thirty 1 watt speakers using 18 guage wire would be 95 ft 59 25 X 25 13 X 30 94 95 Table B 5 Wire resistance ratings Wire Size Resistance per 1 000 ft pair ohms 18 AWG 0 75 sq mm 13 0 16 AWG 1 0 sq mm 8 0 14 AWG 1 50 sq mm 5 2 12 AWG 2 5 sq mm 3 2 Table B 6 and Table B 7 give the maximum allowable wire lengths for various wire sizes and loads Use Table B 6 when designing circuits for amplifiers set for 25 Vrms output Use EST3 Installation and Service Manual B 17 System calculations Table B 7 when designing circuits for amplifiers set for a 70 Vrms output Table B 6 Maximum allowable length at 25 Vrms 0 5 dB loss Circuit load requirement Wire size 15W 20 W 30 W 40 W 95 W 120 W ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m 18 AWG 190 58 142 43 95 29 71 22 Over max Over max 0 75 sq mm current limit current limit 16 AWG 309 94 231 70 154 47 116 35 487 15 39 12 1 0 sq mm 14 AWG 475 145 356 109 237 72 178 54 75 23 59 18 1 5 sq mm 12 AWG 772 235 579 176 386 118 289 88 1218 37 96 29 2 5 Table B 7 Maximum allowable length at 70 Vrms 0 5 dB loss Circuit load requirement Wire size 15 W 20 W 30 W 40 W 95 W 120 W ft m ft m ft m ft
372. ular phone jack on the Signature controller module or on the CPU module Com port and baud rate settings can be made directly from the DSDC Status window The default baud rate 15 9600 baud Using DSDC status To access the DSDC Status function click Tools gt Signature Status Select the SDC to be monitored by using the Cabinet SSDC and Loop drop down lists The Delay drop down box sets the interval at which the status screens receives updated information from the Signature controller module The default value is 3 seconds Increasing the delay time permits the module to process more information between reports to the SDU thus decreasing the overall time it takes to generate a full status report To start the DSDC Status function click the Start Status Button Should the Confirm window appear after a short delay the SDU computer is not communicating with the 3 SSDC 1 Verify the module address download wiring COM port and baud rate are set correctly and click the retry button If communications fail when connected to the module via the CPU try connecting directly to the modular phone jack on the Signature controller module Displaying the current SDC status Click the Current Status Tab at the bottom of the window to display an annunciator panel showing the real time status of the connected SDC Refer to Table 8 39 to interpret the indicators EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 65 Service and troubleshooting
373. ulation worksheet Line Variable B AiO lt lt 2 Base usage N A Label usage N A Average number of characters in a message Average number of characters in a rule Number of routing definitions Number of rail modules other than Signature controller modules Number of Signature controller modules Number of zones Average number of devices in typical zone Number of Service groups Number of AND groups Average number of devices in AND Group Number of Matrix groups Average number of devices in a Matrix Group Number of Check In groups Average number of devices in Check In Group Number of time controls Number of Guard Patrols Number of Guard Patrol routes Number of Guard Patrol stations Number of physical devices Average number of Logics per device Sum of Results Lines A to Y Formula Result N A 70 000 48 22 x H K L N Q S T Between 0 and 42 Between 4 and 10 per controlled output 2 8 Fx916 Gx 1 776 H x 22 C J x 4 D x 2 N A 14x C 2x L x 22 Dx2 Mx4 N A N x 22 C 2 x D 4 x P N A Q x 24 C 2 x D 4 x R N A S x 26 C 2 x D 14 T x 22 C V x 4 U x 4 N A N A W x 46 C Y x 4 2 x D 8 N A A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W Y If result on line Z is less than 262 144 no additional memory is required If result on line Z is greater t
374. uld be located adjacent to the fire alarm control panel Table 4 4 URSM specifications Voltage 24 Vdc Standby Current 40 mA Trouble Contact Rating 30 2A Trouble Detection Levels 25 Vrms audio 10 Vrms 70 Vrms audio 23 Vrms Firefighter s phone 2 7 Vrms 4 10 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Centralized audio applications Installation The URSM requires one half of a standard mounting footprint and should be installed where the power pigtails can reach the power supply The GFD and must be installed in the same enclosure located adjacent to the fire alarm control panel Jumper JP1 on the GFD should be set to the 2 3 position Terminal connections Refer to Figure 4 6 Black pigtail 24 power in Red pigtail 24 power in TBI1 1 to 3 Channel 2 trouble relay contacts TB1 4 to 6 Channel 1 trouble relay contacts 1 7 Channel 2 70 Vrms audio riser input TB1 8 Channel 2 25 Vrms audio riser input TB1 9 Firefighter s Telephone riser input Ch 2 TB1 10 Channel 2 Riser input common TB1 11 Channel 1 70 Vrms audio riser input TB1 12 Channel 1 25 Vrms audio riser input TB1 13 Firefighter s Telephone riser input Ch 1 TB1 14 Channel 1 Riser input common Operation The trouble relay will activate 45 60 seconds after a circuit short circuit open or amplifier failure is detected EST3 Installation and Service Manual 4 11 Centralized audio applications
375. use e Account number as assigned by the CMS e Dialing test interval and time of day Several accounts may use the same receiver but each account is assigned to only one receiver Events and commands One event and two commands are particularly important when you create SDU rules for the 3 MODCOM These are activation activate and send Security and access control devices do not send event messages to the CPU Rather they send requests to execute predefined command lists You need to define the command lists and assign the correct command list for each security or access control event Activation an event that lets you define a command list Activate a command that lets you execute a command list in a rule EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 35 Installation 5 36 Send a command that sends a message to a CMS through the 3 MODCOM Installation Caution Prior to installation remove power from the rail To install the 3 MODCOM you ll need to follow these general steps 1 Arrange suitable telephone company lines and services 2 Install the 3 MODCOM on the rail 3 Connect the 3 MODCOM to the telephone company lines 4 Download configuration data from the 3 SDU 5 Make test transmissions to verify proper operation Requirements for telephone lines 3 MODCOM dialers can be used for most applications that use telephone lines the exceptions being The central station telephone number cannot be di
376. ut relay selects the back up amplifier input as its signal source Changes to the active state when the amplifier s input relay selects channel 1 Changes to the active state when the amplifier s input relay selects channel 2 Changes to the active state when the amplifier s input relay selects channel 3 Changes to the active state when the amplifier s input relay selects channel 4 Changes to the active state when the amplifier s input relay selects channel 5 Changes to the active state when the amplifier s input relay selects channel 6 Changes to the active state when the amplifier s input relay selects channel 7 Changes to the active state when the amplifier s input relay selects channel 8 Changes to the active state when the amplifier s input relay selects the Page channel EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Signature data circuit SDC operation Table 8 26 SDC operation Condition Remove a detector then re install the same detector in the same base Remove a module or pull station then re install the same device in the same location Remove a detector then re install a different detector of the same type in the same base Remove a module or pull station then re install a different device of the same type in the same location SIGA UM replacement modules must have jumper JP1 set in the same position as the original module Remove a detector t
377. vice Manual Y 5 Glossary verification alarm waterflow device zone Y 6 Upon receipt of an alarm by a smoke detector verified detectors attempt to automatically reset Receipt of a second alarm within the 60 second confirmation period after the automatic detector reset period is indicative of a verified alarm Devices or zones defined as waterflow devices are not permitted to silence their notification appliances while the alarm is active A group of Signature Series detectors and modules which has a unique zone number and acts as a single entity for programming purposes whenever any component of the zone is activated EST3 Installation and Service Manual Index 3 3 AADC1 with IRC 3 5 41 3 MODCOM 3 3 3 32 3 34 3 RS232 card 3 34 3 SAC description 3 3 device capacity 3 3 6 6 Types of Remote Stations C 9 A AC power and battery wiring 5 42 AC power source application 3 39 AC power supply elevator control application 3 23 remote controls application 3 46 Access control C 8 access control applications 3 1 access control system diagram 3 2 access events command lists in 500 3 15 access levels visitors 3 31 ACDB 3 MODCOM receiving function 3 3 computer location in muster 3 32 configuring CRC 3 8 CRCSND configuration 3 4 description 3 7 door timers 3 9 role in a security system 3 9 transmission methods 3 7 ACDB operation commo
378. wiring 5 42 Connecting auxiliary booster power supplies 5 44 Installation 5 44 Configuration 5 44 Connecting the PT 1S impact printer 5 46 System printer power supply 5 48 Adjusting amplifier output levels 5 49 What you will need 5 49 Adjustment procedure 5 49 EST3 Installation and Service Manual 5 1 Installation Design considerations 5 49 Connecting a CDR 3 Zone Coder for coded tone output 5 50 What you will need 5 50 Adjusting the gain on the 3 ASU auxiliary input 5 50 Connecting an external modem for use with the Remote Diagnostics Utility 5 53 Running the RPM and distributing profiles 5 55 5 2 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation overview Installation Electrostatic discharge precaution Observe static sensitive material handling practices The components used in this system are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD When handling electronic assemblies you must take precautions to avoid the build up of static charges on your body and on the equipment Do not open the anti static packaging until you are ready to install the electronics e Wear a grounded wrist strap to bleed off any static charge which may have built up on your body Energized system precaution Caution Never install or remove a module or cabinet component with power applied to the cabinet DC vo Circuit compatibility The following circuit compatibility
379. wists per foot in 14 to 22 AWG 1 50 to 0 25 sq mm For the power wires we recommend 14 or 16 AWG Additional power supply wiring When an additional power supply is required you must connect a circuit common point for correct operation To establish a circuit common connect the 24 Vdc terminal on the additional power supply to the 24 Vdc terminal of the last device This circuit common must be connected to the panel to every device and to the circuit common point of any additional power supplies 5 40 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Installation 3 AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller and IRC 3 When upgrading an IRC 3 system to EST3 the 3 AADCI Addressable Analog Driver Controller module lets you use existing IRC 3 system segments without rework The 3 can be connected to an existing IRC 3 Remote Zone Interface Module RZB V N 12 6 3 or a Universal Input Output Module UIO 12 The 3 AADCI Addressable Analog Driver Controller module provides one Class A or Class B loop This loop becomes the data communication line for the existing IRC 3 system The 3 AADC1 includes a line interface module LIM card You can also use the LIM card from an existing 3 AADC module by installing it on a 3 AADCI MB The MB version is a local rail module without a LIM card The audio features of the EST3 system can be connected to the audio riser channels of the RZB module or existing audio equipment can be lef
380. with one that has been compromised for criminal purposes Detectors When one or more devices are removed from a Signature Data Circuit for servicing as shown in Figure 8 11 the panel will display a trouble condition for each device If the System Definition Utility program SDU were connected to the panel the DSDC Status screen would also indicate a trouble condition and the need to re map If the detector is removed from an isolator base the isolator will transfer EST3 Installation and Service Manual 8 41 Service and troubleshooting 8 42 001 Control Panel Display 101 101 TROUBLE ppmm101 IPHS S N 33 1 IPHS S N 34 1 DSDC Status Screen 2 5 SN 48 1 COMMON TROUBLE P code 02 MAP PENDING CT2 204 S N 49 1 3MAP1 CDR P codes 01 01 Figure 8 11 Detectors removed for service If these devices are returned to their original locations as shown in Figure 8 12 the map supervision function recognizes the detectors have been returned as originally installed and mapped and takes no additional action Control Panel Display IPHS The same detectors returned to service in SIN 33 1 their original locations 102 SIN 48 1 203 B Code 02 CT2 SIN 49 1 204 P codes 01 01 DSDC Status Screen Figure 8 12 Detectors returned to service in original locations If the devices are returned to the Signature Data Circuit but are not returned to
381. y Map Result Module PFX Reset Device Query Alarm Status Query Ready Comm Enable Device Query PreAlarm Status Find Serial Number Disable Device Query Normal Status Find New Alarm Start Device 8 58 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Table 8 36 Signature controller module Internal Messages Query Trouble Status Query New Start Status Query Active Status Disable External Output Open Line Isolator Close Line Isolator Reset Device Status Move EEPROM to RAM Assign Short Address Assign Group Address Enter Service Mode Select Sensors Write Value to RAM Write Value to EEPROM Find New PreAlarm Find New Normal Find New Trouble Assign Address Relay Control Read Software Version Read Device Status Read Sensor Values Read Specific Trouble Read Value From RAM Send Value to Visible LED Query New Status 3 SDC Command Initiate Reset 3 SDC Command Initiate Restart Service and troubleshooting Enable Visible LED Disable Visible LED Enable External Output 3 SDC Processor Status Query 3 SDC Enable Loop 3 SDC Disable Loop 3 SDC Line Initialization Complete 3 SDC Send a Device Msg 3 SDC Get a Device Reply 3 SDC Configure Loop 3 SDC Query Current Configuration 3 SDC Send Signal Rate 3 SDC Query Signal Status Displaying device trouble Each Signature device is equipped with a 32 bit trouble register Should a device s trouble bit be set at any time in the device s history the device and t
382. y modules must be mounted on modules in the same cabinet as the Audio Source Unit Typical configurations of control display modules is shown in Figure 1 18 Exact operation of each display is dependent on system programming Typical operation 15 described below a o Page Alert 5 D Alert 5 12th Fl n 12th FI 8 8 E D Evac D Statusi Page D Page D Page amp D Page 11th FI 11th FI m 7 D Page o 5 Alert 5 D E Alert 5 10th FI n 10th FI E o Evac D Status a Page o Page 5 5 9th FI 9th a Page Alert 5 Alert 5 8th FI 8th FI Evac Statusi o Page o o Page 7th FI 7th FI Sr o Alert 5 0 Alert 5 6th FI n 6th FI 5 5 Nl M n n Statusi T p o Page 5 n Page 5 5th FI 5th FI
383. ying the SDC in process progress chart Click the Progress Tab at the bottom of the window to display a graphical presentation of the five major processes that take place during SDC configuration Finding device serial numbers e Communicating with individual devices Mapping the devices Verifying the End Of Line EOL status of a device e Programming parameters into a device s memory This display is useful in determining an overall picture of SDC configuration activity 8 68 EST3 Installation and Service Manual Service and troubleshooting Select COM port here Select baud rate here Select data circuit from list displayed here Select controller from list displayed here 22 DSDC Status Cabinet DSDC Card Select cabinet from sie cr 1 list displayed here 1 Serial Numbers Found 0 2 Communicating 0 3 Mapping E Expected Devices 4 Checking EOL 0 Actual Devices 0 5 Programming Graphical representation of devices remaining to be processed Graphical representation of devices already processed 1 2 3 e 5 Status Status Log j Progress Start Status Reinitialize B2 Disable Mapping T Enable Mapping fl cose Waiting to Establish C amp mmunications Click here to start receiving status information LPCSTAT3 CDR Click here to reinitialize the selected con
384. you create a separate resource profile for each company that will be using the access control system The resource profile defines the access control system for the ACDB program It includes detailed information about each CRC used by a given company For example Communication method Primary or secondary control Number of cardholders Number of schedules Number of holidays Number of access levels Command lists used ACDB Access Control Database program The Access Control Database ACDB program lets you define and maintain a database of information about CRCs cardholders and access levels The ACDB program runs on the your PC Additions or updates to the access control database can be transmitted to the CRC units in two ways The first method is via modem and dial up telephone line to the 3 MODCOM The information is then routed to the CPU through the correct 3 SACS and finally to the CRC units The second method is by connecting your PC directly to the CPU using an RS 232 cable The connection is made between the PC s COMI port and any of the RS 232 terminals on the CPU As in the first method after reaching the CPU additions and changes are routed through the correct 3 SACs to the CRCs Note Changes to the access control database have no impact on the parameters or operations of listed fire system equipment EST3 Installation and Service Manual 3 7 Access control applications 3 8 Other fa
385. ystem or when no location specific message has been specified 28 27 m Figure 1 9 Automatic Message Processing Firefighter phone The 3 FTCU contains a master telephone handset that provides an analog telephone riser for totally independent 2 way communications between the fire command station and Firefighter telephone stations jack telephones installed at strategic locations throughout the protected facility Taking a telephone off hook or plugging into a telephone jack generates a visual and audible incoming call signal at the fire command station The individual originating the call hears a tone until the handset is connected to the system The fire command station operator manually connects the incoming phone call to the phone riser to complete the call Up to five remote telephones may be connected to the riser simultaneously The fire command center operator can also use the telephone circuit as a page source permitting paging via the telephone system EST3 Installation and Service Manual 1 15 System overview Digital network subsystem Network data riser wiring The network data riser provides the communication path between each CPU module 3 CPUx or 3 ANNCPUX installed in the system Each CPU module has two bi directional RS 485 ports Network A and Network B that are used to connect the network data riser wiring Network B is isolated from ground and Network A is not The correct method for running the networ
386. ystems NFPA 12 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems NFPA 15 Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection NFPA 16 Deluge Foam Water Sprinkler and Foam Water Spray Systems NFPA 17Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes UL 217 Smoke Detectors Single amp Multiple Station UL 228 Door Closers Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances UL 1971 Visual Signaling Appliances EST3 Installation and Service Manual Underwriters Laboratories of Canada 7 Crouse Road Scarborough ON Canada M1R 3A9 Content Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 ULC 5527 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems ULC 5524 Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems ULC 5536 Standard for the Inspection and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems ULC 8537 Standard for the Verification of Fire Alarm Systems ULC ORD C693 1994 Central Station Fire Protective Signaling System and Services CAN ULC S301 Standard for Central and Mon

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

CMS User Manual - NET GENERATION  notice technique  Lopi WILMINGTON DVS FACE 99500148 User's Manual  CAT 329D L User's Manual  Hama 54358 screen protector  USER MANUAL - Rockwell Security  JVC KS-AX5700 Car Audio Amplifier  Baxi Potterton Gold HE A Range User's Manual  HP Jetdirect 380x 802.11b Wireless External Print Server (USB    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file